Turk

INTERFACETECHNOLOGYIN MODULARHOUSINGS

I 423/08

Introduction

A – 2 /0407 Hans Turck GmbH & Co.KG • D–45466 Mülheim/Ruhr • Tel. 0208/4952-0 • Fax 0208/4952-264 • E-Mail: [email protected] • www.turck.com

The Company

TURCK is one of the leading manufac-turers in industrial automation. As apioneer and pace maker in sensortechnology, TURCK has consistentlyutilised its lead to develop comprehensiveand innovative solutions for the diversetasks of automation.

As a full range supplier of IP67 products,TURCK offers a unique product portfoliofor the entire field of industrial automation,ranging from the I/O to the controllerconnection level.

The TURCK Group was founded in 1965.Today, TURCK in Germany and the subsid-iaries in 22 countries work with an excel-lently qualified staff of 2.300 employees.

Exclusive agencies in 53 countries addi-tionally support TURCK’s worldwide salesand service.

Our activities are focused on the conceptof perpetual optimisation of manufacturingprocesses. Our close cooperation with thecustomer is the key factor of success.

Based on expert application engineeringand competent customer support, TURCKproducts ensure the efficiency and cost-effectivity of industrial installations world-wide.

TURCK capitalises on the potentials ofglobalisation. With production sites inGermany, Switzerland, the USA and China,TURCK is capable of adapting to thespecific needs of the diverse marketsthroughout the world.

Hans Turck GmbH & Co.KG • D–45466 Mülheim/Ruhr • Tel. 0208/4952-0 • Fax 0208/4952-264 • E-Mail: [email protected] • www.turck.com A – 3 /0407

A

The Programme

Interface technology means isolating, con-verting, processing and matching of sig-nals in all areas of control and automationtechnology. Regardless of if its a modularhousing for top-hat rail mounting or a 19“card for a rack, TURCK offers the mosteffective solution for almost every application.

The “Interface Technology in ModularHousings” includes devices in theinterfacemodul, multimoduland multisafe® housings.

If you are looking for interface technologyon a 19“ card, the multicart® series is theideal solution. Please request the “InterfaceTechnology on 19“ Card” catalogue.

The interfacemodul series offers a host ofnew features such as removable terminalblocks with screw connection or cage-clamp connection, universal power supply,a common housing concept as well asparameterisation via PACTware™.

Further advantage result for the user, e.g.simplified connection and exchange ofdevices, reduced inventory costs anduniversal application in many countries onthe globe.

A focal point of the “Interface Technologyin Modular Housings” is the availability ofthe respective equipment for explosionhazardous area in the “intrinsic safety i”protection class. The particularly wide-ranging offer includes the spectrum oftasks from isolating switching amplifierswith optionally input circuit monitoring anddiffering numbers of channels, to rotationalspeed monitors for monitoring of rotating

or oscillating movements, valve controlelements for switching of valves or otherpower converters in explosion hazardousareas.

TURCK interface devices in modularhousings are approved without exceptionconform to the Ex-guideline94/9/EG (ATEX). This ensures possibleuse in all EU countries.

Introduction


Your are looking for a customised solutionconcerning your application or searchingfor a particular product? You want to orderor download catalogues, data sheets,manuals, software or configuration files?For comprehensive information, please goto www.turck.com

THE TURCK PRODUCT DATA BASEIN THE WORLD WIDE WEB

www.turck.com


A

Interface Technology in Modular Housings

Functions – Selection GuideExplosion Protection FundamentalsGeneral Technical Data and Guidelines

Isolating Switching Amplifiers

Rotational Speed Monitors/Motion Controls

Analogue Data Transmitters/Isolating Transducers

Logic Controllers

Valve Control Modules/Intrinsically Safe Power Supply

Coupler and Interface Devices

Power Supplies

Level Controls

AccessoriesResistor module, Immersion electrode, NTC thermistor, Programming adapter,Adapter cable, Power-Bus, Frequency generator, DTM professional license,Temperatur transducers, Programming device for temperature transducers

Index of Types – Interface Technology in Modular HousingsTURCK Housings: interfacemodul, multimodul, multisafe®

– Interface Technology on 19“ CardTURCK Housing Style: multicart®

The data sheets for the multicart® series can be found in the“Interface Technology on 19“ Card” catalogue

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

A

9

10

Introduction


��

�

�

��

�

�

��

Switching amplifiers

Isolating switchingamplifiers

Rotational speedmonitoringFrequency-to-currentconversion

Analogue datatransmitters forstandard signals

TemperaturetransducersTemperaturemeasuring amplifier

Isolating transducers

HART® isolatingtransducers

Intrinsically safe outputbarrierIntrinsically safe HART®

output barrier

Potentiometeramplifiers

FunctionCircuit type

Functions – Selection Guide

multimodul:Polycarbonate/ABS,snap-fit to hat rail (DIN50022) or screw ontomounting panel

multisafe®:Polycarbonate/ABS,base mounting orsnap-fit to hat rail(DIN 50022),removable terminalblocks

interfacemodul:Polycarbonate/ABS,snap-fit to hat rail (DIN50022) or screw ontomounting panel,removable terminalblocks Type IM… Type MK… Type MS…

Chapter 2

MK21... MS21, MS22,MK21...Ex0 MS23, MS24,MK26... MS25, MS27,

MS28

Chapter 3

IM31... MK31.. MS31...MK31...Ex0

Chapter 3

MK32...Ex0

IM34...Ex

Chapter 3

IM33..Ex MK33...Ex0

IM33..Ex-Hi

Chapter 3

MK35...Ex0

IM35...Ex-Hi

Chapter 3

IM36...Ex

Chapter 1

IM12... MK1...

IM1...Ex MK1...Ex0 MS1...Ex0IM12...Ex MK13...Ex0 MS13...Ex0

MK15...Ex0


A

�

Setpoint monitors

Thermistor relays

Pulse processingAmplifier relays

Valve control modules/Intrinsically safepower supplies

Coupling and interfacemodulesRelay couplersElectronic couplers

Amplifier relaysfor sensors

Power supplies

FunctionCircuit type

Level controls

Chapter 4

IM43... MK43... MS43...

Chapter 4

MK44...

MS41...

Chapter 5

IM72...Ex MK72...ExMK72...Ex0

Chapter 6

MK71...IM73... MK73...

MK73...S...

Chapter 7

MK81... MS81...

Chapter 7

IM82... MK82...

Chapter 8

MK91... MS91...

Introduction


The fact that national directives were still ineffect restricted free trade in this area.In the beginning of 1994, the ”FrameworkDirective 94/9/EC of the EuropeanParliament and Council of 23 March 1994on the approximation of the laws of theMember States concerning equipment andprotective systems intended for use inpotentially explosive atmospheres” waspassed. This directive has regard to the”European Treaty” of 1985, in particulararticle 100a (amendment of 2 February1992), establishing the EuropeanCommunity.

To find a general abbreviation for this newdirective it was agreed to use the nameATEX 100a. ATEX is an abbreviation of theFrench translation of ”explosiveatmosphere” (atmosphère explosible) and100a refers to the article 100a. Apart fromthe article 100a, there are further articleswhich have not yet been fully transposedinto according directives. TURCK cata-logues always use the term ATEX torelate to the new directives on explosionprotection conforming to ATEX 100a.

Within the member states of the EuropeanUnion the ATEX 100a was translated intonational legislation, e.g. in the FederalRepublic of Germany by the ”Geräte-sicherheitsgesetz (§11 GSGV)” and the”Explosionsschutzverordnung (EXVO)”.

The directives applying for explosionprotection were valid until 30.06.2003.The ATEX 100a came into force on the01.07.2003, which has been up-datedand re-named to ATEX 95a.

Installation and operation of electricalequipment in hazardous areas –standards and requirements

Involved with installation, acceptance andoperation of electrical equipment are:

The Legislator having industrialsupervision, trade organizations, TÜV andexperts as supervisory authorities.

All Plant Personnel are required toobserve strict guidelines such as health andsafety and other work regulations thatgovern the maintenance and operation ofelectrical equipment located in thehazardous area.

The System Specifiers who must meetsafety requirements according to IEC 31(CO) 43, ATEX137, EN 60079-14.

The Manufacturers of Componentsbound by constructional requirements setforth by EN 50014...20, 28 and 39 andATEX 100a.

EN 60079-14Installation of intrinsically safe systemsin explosion hazardous areas

This standard includes the safety require-ments that must be observed (e. g. identi-fication and classification of explosionhazardous locations, temperature classes,cabling and wiring, requirements for theinstallation of electrical devices in zones0 and 1).Contrary to the standards described,which are primarily for manufacturers,this standard applies to maintenance,operators and test personnel.

As EN 60079-14 this standard alsocomplies with the requirements of ATEX.Please note that the former exemptionclause for components is no longerincluded. Partly an approval for individualcomponents is now required.

ElexV – Regulations on electricalequipment in explosion hazardouslocations (old) /areas (new)

As a national directive, the ElexV isaddressed to those responsible inGermany for the technological causes ofthe formation of explosive mixtures.

The former ElexV of 1980 related toEuropean regulations on explosionprotection of industrial electrical equipment.This ”old” version constituted the legalbasis for almost the entire field of explosionprotection of electrical equipment. Bydefining explosion hazardous areas andespecially by dividing these into specificzones, ElexV gained major importance asa standard for explosion protectionmeasures. Since the introduction of theATEX directive in 1996 a lot has changed.Definitions relating to the non-electricalaspects of new electrical equipment arenow covered by the new ”ExplosionProtection Directive” (ExVO). The amended

Summary of Topics Page1 Directives and standards 82 Definitions of terms 93 Electrical equipment featuring

protection type “Intrinsic Safety“ 104 Zone Classification 125 Marking of devices 156 Manufacturer obligations 157 Guidelines for use of devices

with intrinsically safe circuits 168 Proof of intrinsic safety 199 Approvals outside the EU 2010 Approvals and certificates of

conformity via Internet 20

The process of harmonisation ofregulations in the field of explosionprotection within the member states of theEuropean Union was initiated in 1996. Oneof the main reasons for harmonisation isthat the different regulations existing in theindividual member states present a tradebarrier. A transitionary period applied untilthe 30.06.2003 in which both the old andnew regulations could be applied.Since the 01.07.2003, the same commonregulations apply for explosion protectionin all EU states.

In the following please find a brief compari-son between the new and the ”old”regulations. Our more detailed brochure”Explosion Protection - A PracticalGuide” can be provided on request.Nevertheless, the user is obliged to knowthe presently applicable regulations anddirectives.

1 Directives and standards

HistoryUntil the end of 1975, numerous nationaldirectives covering the field of explosionprotection existed in the individualEuropean states. On 18 December 1975,the first framework directive on explosionprotection (mining excluded) came intoeffect, applying in the member states ofthe European Union: 76/117/EWG.

Until 1990 there were frequent amend-ments of this directive. This directivereferred to the characteristics andstructure of the equipment at issue andwas directly related to standards. Itapplied exclusively to electrical equipmentand explosion protection (except mining).

Explosion Protection


Aversion of ElexV of 1996 refers only tothose parts which have not yet beentranslated into national regulations.

ATEX 137 - Directive for systemoperatorsThe directive 1999/92/EC of the EuropeanParliament and Council of 16 Decemberconcerning the essential health and safetyrequirements is intended to guard workersagainst the potential hazards of anexplosive atmosphere. It is addressed tosystem operators and employers andcontains binding regulations. Among otherthings, it requires to assess the risksresulting from a potentially explosiveatmosphere, to classify areas exposed topotentially explosive atmospheres and tokeep an explosion protection document.

The explosion protection directive –(ExVO)

The ExVO determines the placing on themarket of devices, protective systems andcomponents intended for use in potentiallyexplosive atmospheres and is the Germantransposition of the directive 94/9/EC.It describes the essential health and safetyrequirements and mandatory conformityassessment procedures. The ExVO ismainly aimed at manufacturers of devices,maintenance and test personnel.

In compliance with the directive 94/9/EC,ExVO excludes the following equipmentfrom its scope (summarised): medicaldevices, explosive substances, orunstable chemicals, personnel protectionequipment, seagoing vessels, offshoresystems and products for militarypurposes.

EN 50014 – Electrical apparatus foruse in potentially explosiveatmospheres –General requirements

EN 50014 contains general requirementsfor the construction and testing of anyelectrical apparatus to be used inhazardous areas.EN 50015...20, 28 and 39 describe thetechnical requirements of different meth-ods of protection:– oil immersion (EN 50015)– pressurised apparatus (EN 50016)

EN 50020 – Protection type ”IntrinsicSafety (i)”

All other methods of protection attemptto contain an explosion to the inside of thehousing and to prevent penetration of anignitable gaseous mixture.

The method of “intrinsic safety“ is basedon a different approach. It limits theelectrical energy to such an extent, thatelevated temperatures, sparcs or arcsare incapable of generating the energyneeded to ignite an explosive atmosphere.Due to the limitation of electrical energy,these circuits are especially suited toapplication in the field of measuring,control and instrumentation. The methodof “intrinsic safety“ has some significantadvantages over other protectionmethods, e.g. maintenance and wiring oflive circuits. These systems are easy tohandle and cost effective due to inex-pensive intrinsically safe components.

2 Definitions of terms

Explosion

An explosion is an exothermic reaction ofa material (such as gas, fumes, or dust)occurring at a high reaction speed.

The risk of an explosion exists whereverthere is the probability of an explosiveatmosphere containing flammable gases orvapours, flammable liquids, combustibledust, or ignitable flyings due to handling,

flammable gases or vapours can existunder normal operating conditions, orbecause of repair or of leakage, andwhen these conditions provide theprobability that a dangerous fuel to airmixture will occur;

– where the explosive or ignitablemixtures can come in contact with asource of ignition and they continue toburn after ignition.

Explosive (flammable) mixtures(general term)

A combustible (flammable) mixture is anatmosphere containing substances thatwhen mixed with air, gases or vapours,propel a reaction after ignition.

Explosive (flammable) atmospheres

An explosive atmosphere contains gases,vapours or dust mixed with air as well asthe usual filler materials that can explodespontaneously under atmosphericconditions.

Dangerous explosive atmospheres

A dangerous explosive atmosphere isa mixture containing concentrations offlammable gases or vapours that, whenignited, can cause damage to personsdirectly or indirectly through an explosion.

Explosion hazardous location

An explosion hazardous area is a locationwhere potentially explosive atmospheresmay exist due to local operatingconditions.

– powder filling (EN 50017)– flameproof enclosure (EN 50018)– increased safety (EN 50019)– intrinsic safety (EN 50020)– encapsulation (EN 50028)– intrinsically safe electrical systems

(EN 50039)

With this protection method, all or partsof the electrical apparatus are immersed inoil so that the explosive atmosphereabove the oil level or outside the enclosurecannot be ignited.

processing, using and storing of thesematerials.

Such hazardous atmospheres can bepresent for instance in chemical industries,gas stations, refineries, power plants, paintshops, vehicles, sewage plants, grain mills,airports, grain silos and filling plants.

Explosion hazards

Explosion hazards exist in locations:

– in which ignitable concentrations of

Introduction


Ignition triangle

In order to have an explosion, the followingthree components must be presentsimultaneously:

Possible sources of ignition:

– hot surfaces– flammable or explosive gases– mechanically generated sparks– electrical installations– transient currents– static electricity– lightning, ultrasonic energy...

Oxidizers:

– air (21 % Oxygen)– pure Oxygen– oxygen releasing compounds

(i.e. potassium manganate)

Fuels (flammable substances):

Flammable concentrations of gases andpowders from liquids or solids whichhave the potential for igniting an explosion.

Explosive limits

A mixture is only explosive when itsconcentration falls within certain materialspecific limits. These limits are called theupper and lower explosive limits and arelisted in according tables.

Flash-point temperature

The flash-point is the lowest temperatureat which a liquid releases sufficient vapoursthat are ignitable by an energy source andextinguish when the energy source isremoved.

An explosive atmosphere cannot occurwhen the flash-point of a material is notexceeded during storage or handling.Flammable liquids, which do not dissolvein water, constitute a source of danger.

In Germany they are classified accordingto VbF (directive for the installation andoperation of plants where flammableliquids are stored and handled). Furtherparameters to evaluate the danger are theglow temperature, the minimum ignitionenergy and the ignition temparature. Thesevalues are listed in according tables.

Primary and secondary methods ofprotection

Basically there are two methods used toprevent an explosion.

Primary method of protection

The primary method prevents formation ofa dangerous atmosphere by one or moreof the following measures:

● avoiding the use of flammable liquids● increase of flash point● limiting the concentration to safe levels● through natural and technical ventilation● monitoring the concentration

The primary method of protection is notdescribed in this brochure. Please refer tothe explosion protection regulations of theprofessional association of the chemicalindustry in Germany (Ex-RL) andEN 1127-1.

Secondary method of protection

The secondary method comprisesmeasures to prevent ignition of an explosi-ve mixture. Here, constructive or electricaltechniques are used to

● segregate the electrical parts of theequipment, which could ignite a dange-rous mixture, by keeping the explosiveatmosphere away from the ignitionsource

● prevent an explosion by impeding thepropagation to the surrounding explo-sive atmosphere.

The secondary protection method isfrequently used, if primary protectiondoes not provide adequate protection.

3 Electrical equipment featuringprotection type “Intrinsic Safety“

The term “intrinsic safety“ implies that theelectrical energy of an intrinsically safecircuit is limited to such an extent that athermal effect or spark is incapable ofigniting an explosive atmosphere underspecified conditions.

TURCK devices for use in explosionhazardous locations comply with protec-tion type “intrinsic safety“. The devices aredivided into two different kinds of electricalequipment: intrinsically safe equipment andassociated equipment. Marking of thedevices enables clear distinction betweenthe two types of apparatus (see point 5).Further there are devices defined as“simple equipment“ which maintain anexceptional position within this field.

Intrinsically safe electrical apparatusis any apparatus in which all circuits areintrinsically safe. Direct installation inhazardous locations is permitted, providedthat all related requirements are met. Anexample is a NAMUR sensor approvedaccording to EN 60947-5-6 or atransmitter.

Associated electrical apparatusis any equipment which may incorporateboth intrinsically safe and non-intrinsicallysafe circuits. Intrinsically safe devices maybe connected to associated electricalequipment, provided that all essentialconditions for this kind of interconnectedassembly are fulfilled.

Associated electrical apparatus mustgenerally be installed outside the hazar-dous areas. If installed within thehazardous location, additional types ofprotection must be provided.

All TURCK devices, type multisafe®,multimodul, interfacemodul and multicart®

with intrinsically safe circuits, are classifiedas associated electrical apparatus.


��

��

� !��


A

Groups and temperature classes

Electrical apparatus for use in thehazardous area is classified into groupsand classes based on the likelihood of anexplosion danger. This is of great impor-

tance from a safety aspect as well as aneconomical aspect because it deter-mines the requirements that must be metby the electrical apparatus.

Definition of Groups is based on thelocation in which the apparatus is going tobe used.

– Group I classified apparatus may beused in mines susceptible to firedampand must conform to Europeanstandards EN 50014...50020 and 28.

– Group II classified apparatus may beused in all other potentially explosiveatmospheres.

Group II classified apparatus is used inall hazardous (classified) areas exceptmining applications where methane may bepresent. Depending on the application,different flammable materials with differentignition energy ratings are needed. From apractical point of view, subdividing GroupII is therefore necessary and makes sense,not only for economical reasons.Subdivision of Group II equipment isdetermined by the different ignition energyof the flammable materials. The differentgroups are classified by capital letters inascending alphabetical order according tothe hazard risk of the associated material.Materials belonging to group C require lessignition energy than Group A materials (seetable 1).

Simple electrical equipment

Simple components and simple equipmentnot generating or storing more than 1.5 V,0.1 A and 25 mW, do not require approval.This kind of equipment includes thermo-elements, photocells, switches, resistorsand simple printed circuits, which featuredefined and known parameters and do notaffect the intrinsically safe circuit.A definition of simple electrical apparatus iscontained in EN 50020 and EN 60079-14.

Categories

The intrinsically safe electrical apparatusconforming to EN 50020 is divided intotwo categories. This classification isdetermined by the failure probability andthe ignition capability of the intrinsically safecircuitry.

Category ”ia”

Category ”ia” indicates that the electricalapparatus should not be able to ignite adangerous mixture during normaloperation and in the event of a single fault,nor in the event of any combination of twofaults. Intrinsic safety must be maintainedeven when two independent faults occur atthe same time.

Therefore, components of any apparatusof category ”ia” that are susceptible tofaults must be present in triplicate.

Category ”ib”

An electrical apparatus in category ”ib”should not be capable of causing ignitionduring normal operation and in the event ofa single fault. Intrinsic safety must bemaintained in the event of a single fault.

A fault could be the failure of a componentthat is susceptible to disturbances. Anyapparatus in category ”ib” must have allcomponents in duplicate.

Tab. 2 Surface and ignition temperatures

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6I MethaneII A Acetone Ethyl alcohol Gasolines Acetadehyde

Ethane i-Amylacetate Diesel fuel Ethyl etherEthyl acetate n-ButaneAmmonium n-Butyl alcohol Aircraft fuelBenzol (pure)Acetic acid Fuel oilsCarbon monoxide n-HexaneMethanolPropaneToluene

II B City gas Athylene*)(carbonated hxdrogen)

II C Hydrogen Acethylene*) Ethylnitride*)

*) no authorised regulations

Tab. 1 Flammable materials - temperature classes and groups

Temperature Maximum surface Ignition temperatures of Temperatureclass temperature of flammable materials (°C) classIEC/EN apparatus (°C) NEC 500-3NEC 505-10

T1 450 > 450 T1T2 300 > 300 ≤ 450 T2

280 > 280 ≤ 300 T2A260 > 260 ≤ 280 T2B230 > 230 ≤ 260 T2C215 > 215 ≤ 230 T2D

T3 200 > 200 ≤ 300 T3180 > 180 ≤ 200 T3A165 > 165 ≤ 180 T3B160 > 160 ≤ 165 T3C

T4 135 > 135 ≤ 200 T4120 > 120 ≤ 135 T4A

T5 100 > 100 ≤ 135 T5T6 85 > 85 ≤ 100 T6

Introduction


Temperature class

The temperature class specifies the maxi-mum allowable surface temperature of anapparatus. In this category, the explosionprotected apparatus can be approved fordifferent temperature classes - a decisionwhich depends on technical and economi-cal considerations.

In the majority of cases, explosion proofequipment for the lowest temperature canbe very expensive to buy and install. Bycomparison, using products featuringprotection type „intrinsic safety“ is moreefficient and cheaper. Intrinsically safeequipment for direct installation inhazardous areas requires temperatureclassification. For associated apparatustemperature classification is not needed.

Ignition temperature

The ignition temperature (defined as thetemperature at which a mixture self-ignitesduring testing) directly relates to thetemperature class. The temperature classindicates the maximum surface tempe-rature of an apparatus and must be lowerthan the minimum ignition temperature ofthe flammable material (see table 2 - pageA-11) to prevent an ignition.

Device Groups and CategoriesAccording to the ATEX Directive

The ATEX directive includes a new kind ofdevice marking which describes theapplication and the constructional level ofsafety.

This new marking per ATEX does notreplace standardised marking includingtemperature class, explosion group andprotection type.

Marking according to ATEX containsinformation on the area of application andthe safety level achieved by the device.Marking according to EN 50020 providesdetailed information on how the protectionmeasures were realised and which appli-cations are permitted. EN 50020 andATEX use similar terms but the informationprovided may be essentially different.

The first criterion is the EquipmentGroup. This classification accords to thegroups described on page 11 and definesthe location in which a device may beinstalled.– Device Group I: for mining underground

with a potential hazard due to firedampand/or combustible dusts.

– Device Group II: for all other locationsin which a potentially explosiveatmosphere exisits

The second criterion is the EquipmentCategory, defining the level of safety:1: very high level of safety: devices

featuring two independent means ofprotection; even in the event of raredevice disturbances, the deviceremains functional and maintains therequisite level of protection

2: high level of safety: devices featuringone means of protection. Even in theevent of frequently occurring devicedisturbances or equipment faults whichnormally have to be taken into accountthe device provides the requisite levelof safety

3: normal safety; the device ensures therequisite level of protection duringnormal operation.

Equipment classified as Group I(underground mining susceptible tofiredamp) uses the prefix M, e. g. M1, inaddition to the category classification.

The third and last criterion is theSubstance Group which characterisesthe application of devices in particularatmospheres:G: explosion protection in explosive

atmospheres due to gases, vapoursor mists (G: gas)

D: explosion protection in explosiveatmospheres due to dusts(D: dust)

The equipment category also determineswhether the device is an associatedapparatus or an intrinsically safeapparatus. If it is an associated apparatusthe equipment category is put into roundbrackets, e.g. II (1) G.

4 Zone classification

According to EN 60079-10 and EN 1127-1explosion hazardous areas are divided intozones such as flammables gases, vapours,mists and combustible dust. Theclassification is based on the likelihood thata dangerous explosive atmosphereoccurs. The ATEX directive has re-definedthe zone division as follows:– zone 0, 1 and 2 for gases and vapours– former zones 10 and 11, now zones

20, 21 and 22 for dusts– zones G and M for locations used for

medical purposes

equipmentgroup

related equipmentcategory

Likelihood of anexplosiveatmosphere

Compliance with safetyrequirements by

Zoneclassification

Zone 0 (gas, ...)Zone 20 (dust)

continuously, forlong periods orfrequently

2 independent means ofprotection

II 1 G (for gas, ...)1 D (for dust)

Zone 1Zone 21

occasionally 1 independentmeans of protection

II 2 G2 D

Zone 2Zone 22

unlikely orinfrequently - for ashort period only

normal operation II 3 G3 D

additional equip-ment category

–

1

1 or 2

Requirements fulfilled by


Tab. 3 Zone classification – equipment category


AZone 1

Zone 1 are locations in which an explosiveair/gas mixture is likely to occur undernormal operation. Here ATEX does notincorporate any changes.The exampleidentifies the area near the gas pumpduring refuelling as a zone 1 location.

Generally the following areas in industrialplants are considered to be zone 1locations:

– in the vicinity of zone 0– close to inspection openings– near filling and draining devices– inside of machinery

Any equipment certified for zone 1 mustbe Group IIA, IIB or IIC and at leastcategory ”ib”.

Zone 2

Zone 2 comprises areas in which anexplosive and dangerous atmosphere isunlikely to occur, but, if it does, only for ashort period. The ATEX definition of zone 2differs slightly: An explosive atmosphereshould not occur, but, if it does, onlyinfrequently and for a short period.

– any areas near zone 0 and 1– areas near flange seals whenever

standard flange joints are used– areas near pipe lines in closed rooms

Unlike apparatus for zones 0 and 1,equipment for use in zone 2 does notrequire a test certificate by an authorisedbody. Devices for zone 2 must conform tocategory 3 and must meet the followingcriteria (EN 60079-15):

● restricted breathing enclosures(10 K overtemperature only)

● sealed enclosures(various test methods/requirements)

● simple pressurized enclosure(like „p" without purging)

● limited energy(intrinsic safety without safety factor)

● encapsulated switching devices(simple „pressurized enclosure")

● lower requirements for equipmentin zone 1, e.g.– clearances and creepages– housing impact test– plastic materials– construction of lampholders and

starters

Installation of devices in Zone 0 to 2

For installation in zones 0 to 2 (gas,vapour) it is required that intrinsically safeand associated equipment must meet atleast those requirements applying to thezone in which the intrinsically safeapparatus is to be installed. If the equip-ment meets higher requirements, opera-tion is obviously permitted. The nationalregulations apply to interconnectedassembly and installation of devices.Please refer to point 7 for furtherinformation.

Gases and vapours

Zone 0

Zone 0 is a location in which ignitableconcentrations of flammable gases orvapours are continuously present, orpresent for long periods. The exampleshows a gas station with zone 0 locations.

According to the previous national regula-tions any apparatus or parts thereof usedin a zone 0 location had to be speciallycertified and approved for use in zone 0locations. Further, the certificate ofconformity had to mention explicitly thatthe equipment and parts thereof werepermitted for use in zone 0. When usingintrinsically safe and associated equipmentas an interconnected assembly, both partsused to require a system approval.

This restriction is not included to the ATEXdirective. If both parts of equipment meetthe regulations for installation in zone 0, itis permitted to use the equipmentaccordingly without an extra approval.When electrical equipment approved byboth previous and new regulations is usedas an interconnected assembly, it isrequired to meet all requirements set forthby both directives. Additionally a systemapproval is needed.

Intrinsically safe apparatus designed foruse in zone 0 must meet category ”ia”safety standards and must have no livecontacts. Galvanic isolation betweenintrinsically safe and non-safe equipment isthe method of choice. If earthing of theintrinsically safe circuit is required forfunctionality, this must be done outsidezone 0, but as close as possible to zone 0.

��

��

��

Introduction


Combustible dusts

Explosion protection regulations applyingto combustible dusts differ from thoserelating to gases and vapours due to thedifferent hazard points. Here, ATEX alsodetermines new regulations. Transpositioninto new directives and standards has notyet been completed, so that it is likely thatthere will be various amendments andcomplications.

The previous zone classification and thenew division into zones according to ATEXdiffer in many respects. Following pleasefind a comparison.

Previous zones 10 and 11 will be replacedby the zones 20, 21 and 22. Here the zoneclassification is similar to that of gases andvapours.

Previous Zone 10 - new Zone 20

��

According to the previous regulations,zone 10 comprises areas in which adangerous explosive atmosphere isconstantly present or prevails for a longperiod.

According to ATEX, zone 20 is classifiedas an area in which a dangerous explosiveatmosphere in form of a dust cloud iscontinuously present, or occurs frequently,or for a long period. The possibility of adust deposit with a known or excessivethickness is given. The presence of dustdeposits as a single event does notconstitute a zone 0 classification.

As a rule, these conditions can only prevailinside an enclosure, pipes and instruments.

Areas, in which dust deposits occur, butwhere clouds of dust are not presentconstantly, frequently, or for a long term,do not belong to this zone.

Previous Zone 11,new Zone 21 and Zone 22

��

Zone 11 comprises areas in which it islikely that a dangerous explosiveatmosphere occurs occasionally due towhirling up of dust. According to ATEX,zone 11 is subdivided into two zones, i.e.zones 21 and 22.

Zone 21:

Areas in which, during normal operation,a potentially explosive atmosphere in formof a dust cloud can occur occasionally.Dust deposits or layers of combustibledust will usually be present.

��

These can be areas in the close vicinity offilling or dust extraction stations, wheredust deposits are present and explosiveconcentrations of flammable dust mixedwith air may occur during normaloperation.

Zone 22:

An area in which it is unlikely that apotentially explosive atmosphere in form ofa dust cloud occurs during normaloperation. If such an atmosphere occurs,then only for a short period, or in the eventof dust accumulation, or in layers ofcombustible dust.

An example: areas in the vicinity ofequipment containing dust which canescape due to leakages und where dustdeposits can build up (e.g. mills from whichdust is released and accumulates) could beclassified as zone 22 environments.

Devices for use in Zone 20 to 22

Installation and operation of devices inzone 20 to 22 are subject to the nationalregulations (pr EN50281-1-2). Associatedequipment does not require an approvalfor flammable dusts, an approval for gasesand vapour is sufficient. It must be ensuredthat the limit values of intrinsic safety of theEC type examination certificate are met incase of an interconnected assembly. Thenit is permitted to mark the intrinsically safeequipment, for instance as II 1 D and theassociated apparatus as II (1) G. To avoidmisapprehensions, the marking II (1) GD isusual.

During installation it is required to observethe special conditions of dust protection.E.g. simple apparatus for use in zone 20 to22 must have an approval, whereas this isnot necessary for simple equipment inzones 0 to 2.

Medical environments

According to the previous regulations,medical environments, e.g. all equipmentused for anesthesia or for articificialrespiration, were subdivided into zonesM and G. ATEX no longer includes medicalequipment in the scope of its explosionprotection regulations. The applicablelegislation covering the protective aspectsassociated with medical products do notrelate to explosion protection so thatthere is a juridical insecurity in this field.


��


A5 Marking of devices

Equipment for explosion protected areasmust be clearly marked. There are twodifferent types of marking. According toCENELEC marking of an apparatusconforming to EN 50014/20 must providethe following information:

– manufacturer’s name or trademark– part number– EEx-symbol– ignition category (e. g. „ia”)– designated group together with the

respective subdivision (e. g. IIC)– temperature class or maximum surface

temperature (for group II devices only)– serial number (may be omitted if space

is restricted)– test authority, date and file number– ”x” after the test certificate number

indicates that special conditions mustbe met (see certificate forspecial conditions)

An intrinsically safe apparatus could havethe following marking:

EEx ia IIC T6temperature classexplosion grouptype of protectionconform to Europeanstandard

An associated apparatus could have thefollowing marking:

[EEx ia] IICexplosion group type of protectionacc. to European standardassociated apparatus

To date, the test certificate number of thetest authority used to contain thegeneration number of the applicablestandard to indicate the amendmentstatus, e.g.:

PTB Nr. Ex-85.B.2128XPTB Nr. authorised bodyEx- explosion protected

apparatus85. year of issueB. generation indicator2128 serial certificate numberX special conditions

According to ATEX marking must be asfollows:

PTB 97 ATEX 2128XPTB authorised body97 year of issueATEX accord. to 94/9/EC2128 serial certificate numberX special conditions

Within the European Union the devicesmust meet the respective requirements. Ifthe manufacturer fulfills these, he ispermitted to affix the CE sign.The ATEX directive extends marking.The identification number of the notifiedbody, which carried out the qualityassurance system approval, is added tothe CE sign (see point 6).

0102

For example, the test body of the TÜVHannover uses the identification code0032 and the PTB in Braunschweig hasthe code number 0102. Additionally theyear of production and the constructionallevel of safety must be contained in thedevice’s marking. In case of intrinsicallysafe apparatus marking according toATEX would be:

II 1 Gexplosion protected againstgas, vapour and mistvery high safety levelsuited for zone 0all areas except mining

Associated equipment is identifiable byround brackets enclosing the devicecategory:

II (1) Gmay not be installed inhazardous areas

6 Manufacturer obligations

Certificates of conformity andEC type test certficates

An authorised body is entitled to test andcertify that devices are suited for use inexplosion hazardous areas and complywith the relevant regulations andstandards.

Previous regulations required themanufacturer to submit a test sample tothe test body and to ensure compliancewith existing regulations. The authorisedtest body then issued the certificate ofconformity and passed it on to themanufacturer. The certificate of conformitycontains all relevant data associated withexplosion protection.

Here, the ATEX directive also implementsa change. The manufacturer is requestedto supply a type test sample to anauthorised inspection body, which drawsup a test report to be submitted to thenotified body entitled to issue the EC typeexamination certificate after verifyingconformity. Notified bodies and externalinspection bodies are registered centrally.The EC type examination certificatecontains all data relevant for explosionprotection.

The obligation to keep a copy of thiscertificate is the responsibility of themanufacturer of the device. Along with thecertificate, the manufacturer provides aninstruction manual with all relevant Ex data.In addition, the manufacturer issues adeclaration of conformity, stating that allapplicable standards and directives aremet. The user needs these documents todocument compliance of the systeminstallation correctly.

Introduction


��

��

��

�� !� ��"��

#�� !��$ ��!�� !�� %� ��&��!�'��!��(� ��#��!��(��!&��!��(�

��)��%�!�� '��(��(��

�&��!��!��!�

CE marking of equipment

Devices for use in explosion hazardousarea are equipped with the CE marking andthe identification code of the testingauthority. The assessment procedure forCE marking is clearly defined and dependson the device category. The exampleshown relates to device category 1,featuring the highest safety level. Theapplicable annexes of the directive94/9/EC are also shown.

Different annexes apply to the variousdevice categories.

Assessment of the quality assurancesystem

The manufacturer of intrinsically safedevices, categories 1 and 2, must have anapproved quality management system.This approval is needed to ensure thatthe manufacturer produces the devicesaccording to the test type sample and thatconformity to relevant protection regula-tions is given. Assessment of the qualityassurance system is carried out by anotified body. Assessment can beachieved in two different ways:

Assessment and certification can be donedirectly within the frame of certificationaccording to ISO 9000ff. Approval ofthose fields associated with explosionprotection is accomplished in cooperationwith an expert of the notified body. If theISO certificate has already been granted,it is possible to certify those parts relatingto explosion protection subsequentlywithin the frame of an additional audit.

The following illustration shows bothpossibilities:

TURCK’s manufacturing sites for explosionprotected devices are certifed accordingto ISO 9001 and have a quality systemapproval.

7 Guidelines for use of deviceswith intrinsically safe circuits

The national regulations and standards arethe basis for use of devices with intrin-sically safe circuits. These must be strictlyobserved and followed. The user is obligedto inform himself on all revisions.The following guidelines relate to the ATEX(94/9/EG) directive of the member statesof the European Union, especially to thefield of explosion protection in areasexposed to hazards by gas.

If the device is classified as an associatedapparatus equipped with intrinsically safeand non-intrinsically safe circuits it may notbe installed in explosion hazardous areas.It is permitted to connect intrinsically safedevices located in the hazardous area tothe intrinsically safe connections of thisdevice. With the Turck devices, seriesmultisafe®, multimodul and multicart®,these connections are marked in blue.When interconnecting devices within suchan assembly it is mandatory to provide aproof of intrinsic safety (EN 60079-14:2004, chap. 12.2.5).It is required to verify that all data relatedassociated to explosion protection of thedevices allow mutual operation. Verificationmust include the internal capacitances andinductances of the cables used. Pleaserefer to section 8.1 on page A-19 forfurther information.

Intrinsically safe circuits should never beinterconnected with non-safe circuits. Evenif only interconnected once, it is possiblethat essential protective elements aredamaged without the user being aware

of this fact. A simple function test is notsuited to verify a damage of this kind.Once intrinsically safe circuits have beenconnected to the non-intrinsically safecircuit, it is not permitted to use the devicesubsequently as intrinsically safeequipment.

The governing regulations cover instal-lation of intrinsically safe circuits, mountingto external connections, cable characteris-tics and cable installation. Cables andterminals with intrinsically safe circuitsmust be marked and separated from non-intrinsically safe circuits or featureappropriate isolation (> 1.500 VAC)Following an excerpt from the require-ments according to EN 60079-14:

– protection against external electricalor magnetic fields (e.g. power currentcables)

– prevent conductor splicing of fine wiresthrough wire sleeves

– min. cross section of 0.1 mm (alsosingle wires of a conductor)

– protection against damaging(mechanical, chemical, thermic...)

– armouring, metal cladding, shieldingof cables and lines

– common use of single-core non-sheathed cables of intrinsically and non-safe circuits in one line is not permitted

– separate error assessment when usingmulti-conductor cables and lines

– when marking cables by colour,light-blue must be used.

It is required to observe the specifiedclearances between the intrinsically safeconnections of this device and the earthedcomponents and connections of otherdevices. If intrinsically safe TURCKdevices, style multimodul or multisafe® areused, these may be mounted directly nextto each other. The required safety distanceof 6 mm between intrinsically safeconnections is ensured by the terminaldesign. It is further required to observea safety distance of 3 mm (EN 50020,chapter 6.3, table 4) to earthed compo-nents, such as covers or side panels ofmounting cabinets. A thread measure of50 mm must be observed betweenintrinsically safe connections and non-safeconnections.


�� !!!��

��*�+,,, ��

-�� !�. ��!� �!�� !� ��

�� !��

-��/�/�� (��(��&��#� ��!�� !��

� � ��!��

�� !�� &��#� ��!!��!��(��+01+1��'�� '��


A

�"��#$�%�#��%%

Due to the open construction and thespecial wiring of Eurocard style devices,the following regulations must be followedwhen installing multicart® switchingamplifiers:

● According to IEC publication 60529,multicart® style devices require aprotection of at least IP20.Generally, this is achieved by installingspecial partiton barriers or specialenclosures in the mounting rack.

● connections for intrinsically safe andnon-intrinsically safe circuits must eitherbe separated by a physical barrier sothat they are at least 50 mm (threadmeasure) apart from each other, or eachconnection must be provided with cablesleeves which cannot slip off and ensurecovering of all bare parts. These safetymeasures are not necessary if crimpsnap-in type edge connectors are used.

● all edge connectors on the multicart®

devices must be coded by a pin/plugcoding to avoid insertion of the wrongmodule. The coding is prepared by themanufacturer by means of coding pinsand holes on the contact strips accor-ding to a coding plan.

● within the mounting rack, the safetydistances must also be observed.

A thread measure is defined as the dis-tance between circuits separated by anpartition barrier. The reason for thisregulation is that it possible to work withlive intrinsically safe circuits; thus it mustavoided that these come into contactincidentally with any non-safe connectioncomponents.

This distance is only required for externalconnections which can be accessed by theuser. The minimum distance between twointrinsically safe circuits must be 6 mm andseparation from other (earthed) metal partsmust be 3 mm.

The approval expires, if the device isrepaired, altered or opened by a personother than the manufacturer or an expertunless the device-specific instructionmanual explicitly permits such interven-tions. Only an expert disposes of theinformation on protection measuresneeded to assure that the device is still inaccordance with the applicable regulationsafter such an intervention. Visible damagesof the device’s housing (e. g. black orbrown discolouration due to heataccumulation, perforation or deformation)indicate a serious error and the devicemust be turned off immediately. It isrequired to check the connected equip-ment too.

Inspection of a device with regard to allrelevant aspects of explosion protectionmay only be carried out by an expert or themanufacturer. Operation of the device isonly permitted within the specified limits,e.g. the supply voltage may never exceedthe maximum rating and the temperaturerange during operation must be strictlyobserved.

Intrinsically safe circuits with galvanicisolation - as is the case with TURCKdevices - should not be earthed, unless notabsolutely necessary from a functionalpoint of view.

Circuits without galvanic isolation, e.g.Zener barriers, always require earthing.EN 60079-14 includes the relevantearthing regulations. Within zone 0 earthingof a circuit is not necessary. If earthing isnecessary for functional reasons, then itmust be carried out in close vicinity ofzone 0.

Prior to every initial set-up or after anychange of the device interconnection withinthe assembly, it must be ensured that allapplicable regulations, directives andframework directives are met, that allsafety regulations are fulfilled and that thedevice is functioning properly. Only thenoperation is permitted.

Mounting and connection of the deviceshould only be carried out by qualified andtrained staff familiar with the relevantnational and international regulations ofexplosion protection to ensure correctoperation.

The system operator must ensure that thesystem is always in the required safecondition. The system must be inspectedcontinuously and necessary maintenancework must be carried out immediatelywhile observing the safety regulations.The system must be tested in case ofneed, latest every three years.

Accidents

The operator must report any explosionwhich could have been caused by theelectrical equipment to the supervisorybody. The supervisory body is entitled toorder an investigation by an expert.

&��

� ��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

�

� ��

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Introduction


The safest method is an isolated (earth-free) design of intrinsically safe circuits.As a rule, earthing is usually not necessaryfor functional reasons. Earthing of anintrinsically safe apparatus at one point ispermitted and in many cases needed toprevent disturbances. Metal housings ofintrinsically safe equipement do not requireearthing. Further details on Zener barriersare included in the data sheets availablefrom the respective manufacturers.

�

2�3�� -��

'#��(��"�#�$�(��"��)��*��#��

�#�+#��#��

��%*��#��*��'��

4��.2�3�� -��Safety barriers

Safety barriers are considered protectiondevices and their function is to avoidpossible errors and faults by preventingthe transfer of unsafe levels of energy tothe hazardous area. Possible faults are:

– excessive voltage in thehazardous area

– high current levels in thehazardous area (short-circuit)

Because barriers have no galvanicisolation, they require connection to theequipotential connection (PA) leading intothe hazardous area to prevent potentialvariances between conducting construc-tional parts and the intrinsically safe circuit.

The following parameters must beobserved when using safety barriers:

– Zener voltage UZ

– short-circuit current Ik– maximum current Im

In cause of fault, these maximum energyvalues could reach the hazardous area.

The safety parameters of the barrier are:

– the supply voltage of the barrier shouldalways be lower than the maximuminput voltage indicated on the barrier,otherwise any leakage currentsoccurring during normal operationcould flow through the Zener diodes

– total series resistance R of the barrier– maximum voltage UM on the hazardous

side– maximum allowable external

inductances La and capacitances Ca.

Section 12, 2.4 of EN 60079-14 generallyrequires intrinsically safe circuits to beearth-free, but for safety and functionalreasons earthing is permitted.Due to an earth fault between two differentpotentials of remote system components,compensation currents may flow in theintrinsically safe circuit. These currents cancounteract intrinsic safety, e.g. by causingexcessive heat within a cable whichoriginally was rated correctly for theintrinsically safe circuit.



A

14.3

Intrinsically safe electrical equipment

No. Type Type name Approval Number Expl. Group DeviceCategory

UI

[V]II[mA]

PI

[mW]LI

[mH]CI

[nF]

Proximityswitch

BIM-INT-Y1X KEMA 01 ATEX 1264 X EEx ib IIC T6 15.0 60.0 100.0 50.0 30.01

2

Cable inductances and capacitances:(Manufacturer data or LC = 1 mH/km, CC = 110 nF/km) Total cable length: 130 m 0.13

Total inductances and capacitances:(ΣLI and ΣCI)

50.13 44.3

Intrinsic safety is given if the following conditions are fulfilled: U0 ≤ UI I0 ≤ II P0 ≤ PI L0 ≥ ΣLI C0 ≥ ΣCI

Associated equipment

Type Type name Manufacturer Approval Number Expl. Group DeviceCategory

U0

[V]I0[mA]

P0

[mW]L0

[mH]C0

[nF]

Isolat. switch-ing amplifier

MS13-11Ex0-T DMT 01 ATEX E119 [EEx ia] IIC 11.0 55.0 150.0 1.0 500.0

associated condition intrinsically equipment safe apparatus

+ cable

U0 ≤ UI

I0 ≤ IIP0 ≤ PI

L0 ≥ LI + LC

C0 ≥ CI + CC

The cable characteristics provided by themanufacturer should be used. Should thesenot be available, it is recommended to usethe following typical values (BASEEFAnewsletter no. 3, October 1980):LC = 1 mH/km / CC = 110 nF/km

The connection of proximity switches toisolating switching amplifiers, or 2-wiretransmitters to isolating transducers, orsolenoid valves to a valve control modulecan be considered as simple circuits.

The limit value indexes of the old certificateof conformity and the new EC typeexamination certificate differ.In this overview the indexes according toEN 60079-14 are used. Index „o“ standsfor maximum output values and „i“ formaximum input values.

The proof of intrinsic safety should be laiddown in a standardised document tofacilitate clear documentation.

The document should contain the date, thename of the manufacturer, the circuit typeand the type code. A possible form ofdocumentation is shown below.

8 Proof of intrinsic safety

According to EN 60079-14 a proof ofintrinsic safety must be provided toconfirm that equipment interconnectedwithin an assembly accords to therequirement of intrinsic safety. In thiscontext there is a clear distinction betweentwo basically different circuits:1. simple intrinsically safe circuit with a

single associated apparatus and atleast one intrinsically safe apparatuswithout additional supply

2. more than one associated apparatuswhich is capable of supplying electricalenergy to the intrinsically safe circuitnot only during normal operation butalso in a fault condition.

8.1 Simple circuits

The first definition of a simple intrinsicallysafe circuit requires to observe all electricallimit values stated in the EC type exami-nation certificate and the power charac-teristics. If these conditions are met, theuser is entitled to keep a proof of intrinsicsafety. Inductances and capacitances ofthe installed cables must be taken intoaccount.Intrinsic safety of a simple circuit is given,if the limit values are maintained accordingto the following conditions:

TURCK

TURCK

Example of a "Proof of intrinsic safety"

��,��

-�-�

./

��,��

-�-�

./

��#��!��#��#**#�#��

#��#��$#**#�#��

0��1

Manufacturer

Introduction


8.2 Interconnection/Assemblyof several devices

The second case considers interconnectionof several active associated devices.It differs essentially from the first case.Here it is not permitted to apply the electriclimit values of the EC type examinationcertificate for the proof of intrinsic safety.

Different limit values apply to an assemblyof the individual associated apparatus.Such an assembly will always be classifiedas equipment according to category „ib“,even if the single apparatus accords tocategory „ia“. An assembly may thereforenot be installed in zone 0. A detaileddescription of interconnection andassembly is beyond the scope of thiscatalogue. The related calculation methodsand an example are contained in annexesA and B of EN 60079-14. Additionally,the ignition curves of IEC 60079-11 areneeded. EN 50020 also contains theignition curves.

8.3 Non-linear characteristics

When interconnecting associatedapparatus whose typical curves are notentirely linear, a special procedure must beapplied. This procedure is explainedprecisely in EN 60079-25.

9 Approvals outside the EU

Equipment certified according to the ATEXdirective may be placed on the market,installed and put into service within themember states of the European Union.Even though Switzerland does not belongto the EU, approvals according to ATEXare accepted. An approval by SEV is notrequired, if the customer provides themandatory documentation, i.e. the instruc-tion manual, the EC type examinationcertificate, the CE declaration and thecertificate of the quality management auditrelating to explosion protection.

Many states outside the European Unionexplicitly request an own national approval.Therefore TURCK devices featureapprovals for many different countries.Own approvals are required e.g. in theUSA, Canada, China, Japan, Australia, CISstates, Hungary or in the Czech Republic,whereas other states accept approvalsissued by other states. For this reason itis indispensable to be familiar with thenational requirements.

In many states approvals are granted fora certain period only. Therefore it is recom-mended to check if the approval hasexpired or has been prolonged accor-dingly. If an approval expires after installa-tion, many countries accept furtheroperation.

Approvals according to ATEX and appro-vals in the USA and Canada are notsubject to a time limit.

Apart from the national approvals there arealso specific installation and operationrequlations. These are supplied togetherwith devices featuring approvals for theUSA and Canada. The TURCK brochure„Understanding Hazardous AreaSensing“ (in English) gives insight intoexplosion protection in the United Statesand can be provided on request.

10 Approvals and certififcates ofconformity via Internet

TURCK offers their customers to view allvalid approvals and to download these asPDF files (Acrobat Reader, version 3.0):www.turck.com⇒ Worldwide Headquarters Germany

⇒ Download⇒ Approvals

��#��!��#��#**#�#��

#��#��$#**#�#��

2��1



AMounting of devices

multimodul and multisafe® devices aresuited for hat-rail mounting (EN 50022) orscrew panel mounting.

Accordance with safety regulations mustbe verified during installation. Devices mustbe protected against dust, dirt, moistureand other environmental influences.Theyshould also be protectd against the risksof mechanical damaging, unauthorisedaccess and incidental contact. Whenmounting devices in cabinets, it must beensured that dissipating heat is conductedaway. If natural ventilation is insufficient forthis purpose, it is required to integrateventilation slots, ventilators or coolingmeans. The manufacturers of mountingcabinets provide according calculations.The admissible temperature range isindicated in the technical data of thedevices.

The most favourable installation mode ismounting on a horizontal hat-rail on whichmost devices may be mounted directlynext to each other. Exceptions may benecessary, e.g. due to separationdistances of intrinsically safe devices.When mounting devices on a verticallyinstalled hat-rail, usually an air gap of a fewmillimetres should be observed to ensuresufficient ventilation in case of heat accu-mulation. The lower the temperature in themounting cabinet, the smaller the gapmay be.

Notes for mounting and installation

Mounting and installation have to beperformed conform to the valid regulationsand the operator is obliged to ensure thatthey are observed. On devices withintrinsically safe connections, specialknowledge in the field of explosionprotection is required.

The removable terminal blocks of thedevices are coded and can only beinserted into the intended socket. Thiscoding may not be changed or damaged.

Environmental conditions

The devices listed in this catalogue aredesigned for normal industrial use undernormal atmospheric conditions. This doesnot exclude non-condensing humidity. Theoperational temperature range is stated forevery device. Sources of intensive solarradiation or other heat sources should beavoided.Use in environments with high-energyradiation should be avoided due to the useof semi-conductor components in thedevices. Usage may still be possible after athorough examination of the applicationand further clarification by TURCK.

The devices have been designed anddeveloped to the current state-of-the-art inthe field or electromagnetic compatibility.Conformity to the respective guidelines isconfirmed by the use of the CE mark.However, the operator is urged to ensurethat his installation is designed for EMCcompatibility.

Removable terminal blocks

interfacemodul and multisafe® devices aregenerally equipped with removableterminal blocks with screw connection.Cage-clamp style terminals are alsoavailable with the following devices:– IM1-12Ex-R-CC– IM1-22Ex-T-CC– IM1-22Ex-MT-CC– IM1-451Ex-R-CC– IM31-11Ex-i/CC– IM31-12Ex-i/CC– IM31-22Ex-i/CC– IM33-11Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC– IM33-22Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC– IM35-11Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC– IM35-22Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC– IM72-11Ex-CC/L– IM72-22Ex-CC/L.

Terminal blocks of intrinsically safe devicesare coded to avoid interchange errorsduring installation. The coding scheme maynot be damaged or altered.

multimodul devices are equipped withscrew terminals.

Relay outputs

The use of relay couplers is limited by theirrelatively low switching frequencies andlimited contact life. TURCK uses highquality relays with a mechanical life of atleast 20 mio. switching operations.The electrical life depends strongly on theconnected load type and can drop toapprox. 1 mio. switching operations, whenthe relay contacts are subject to maximumload. All switching capacity and switchingcurrent indications refer to resistive loads.Lower values apply to inductive orcapacitive loads, such as solenoid valvesor motors. For inductive loads it is requiredto observe the relay-specific load limits,which can be provided by TURCK onrequest. If the relay coupler is directlyconnected to a contactor, the contactormust be equipped with a protectivecircuitry at the coil connection. Relays aredesigned to switch large voltage andcurrent ranges. Once that a high currenthas been switched, low currents orvoltages cannot be switchedsubsequently.

Electronic outputs

Electronic outputs are typically bounce-free and fast switching devices.Compared to relay contacts, the currentand voltage ranges of an electronic outputare clearly defined depending on the kindof output used. Transistor outputs are onlysuited to low currents and DC voltages,e.g. a PCL input. Switching frequenciesare above 1 kHz. In order to protecttransistors against overload, they areequipped with a short-circuit protection.Due to the resulting voltage drop it is notpossible to switch the low level of TTLinputs. Mosfets are a particular kind oftransistor. Based on their special designand circuitry, they can be used to switchAC and DC currents of up to 250 V. Theirswitching frequency is lower than that oftransistors, but the switching current maybe higher. Thyristor and Triac outputs areused in high current and AC voltageapplications.

General Technical Data and Guidelines

Introduction


Analogue outputs

In addition to switching outputs, analoguevoltage and current outputs are alsoavailable. A voltage output is a kind ofinternally regulated voltage source. Theoutput provides a measurable voltage.The minimum load resistance specified inthe data sheet must be observed.

When using current outputs, active andpassive outputs must be distinguished.Active outputs are an internally regulatedcurrent source and provide measurablecurrent signals. The load ratings of thedata sheet may not be exceeded. Passivecurrent outputs are internally controlledcurrent sink mode devices. The currentsink mode output requires voltage supplyto control the current flow. Passive currentoutputs are normally used in conjunctionwith remote processors featuring inputcircuits for connection of 2-wire isolatingtransducers or transmitters.

Voltage supply

The operating voltage range indicated inthe data sheets include all admissibletolerances. For safety reasons it is notpermitted to exceed these specifications,especially when intrinsically safe circuits areconcerned.

Most of the devices are equipped withuniversal power supplies which operatewith AC and DC voltages in a range of20 to 250 V. The DC-voltage range ofassociated apparatus is 20...125 VDC.

Time and date processing

With the exception of the PACTware™compatible devices, no processing of thetime and date information is undertaken.

General Technical Data and Guidelines

Configuration and parameterisationvia PACTware™

PACTware™ stands for “Process Auto-mation Configuration Tool” and is an open-source configuration software in which themanufacturers can integrate the operationof their field devices. The optimisation ofthe device operation is the primaryobjective with the PACTware™ concept.

Contrary to the concept of writing todevices via a text file (Device Description =DD), PACTware™ uses a commoninterface (Field Device Tool = FDT) betweenthe core program and the individualsoftware modules for device operation.Modern and user-friendly operatingconcepts can be implemented as a result.

FDT specifies an interface in order to usethe software modules for field devices(Device Type Manager = DTM) in variousapplications from differing manufacturers.Some of the TURCK field devices can beconfigured via PACTware™. The DTMswhich are required are contained in a freeof charge basic version which is notequipped with all functional features, aswell as in a Professional version.

More information about this topic can befound under www.pactware.de.The PACTware™ software and the DTMcan be downloaded free from the TURCKhomepage www.turck.com.

Installation of cables

Electrical cables are the connectionbetween field and interface devices andare important functional components ofan automation system. Therefore it isadvisable to observe some frameconditions when installing cables. Cablesmust be protected against negativeenvironmental influences.Chemical resistance, temperature rating,resistance against ultraviolet radiationand applicable operation standards arejust some of the parameters which shouldbe taken into account.By choosing an appropriate installationmethod it is possible to prevent damages,e.g. through vehicles. When connected tofield devices, the cable should be routed ina conduit. If connected to vibratingmachines or moving parts, some extracable should be added as a reserve.The minimum bending radius must also beobserved. Cable manufacturers provideinformation on cable installation andvaluable installation hints. Data integrityand reliability depend strongly on the cabletypes and installation methods.

Sensor cables should always be installedseparately from the power cables. Electro-magnetic interferences must also beavoided. Cable connections to motorswhich are controlled via frequencyconverters should be protected accordingto the manufacturer’s safety specifi-cations. If long cables are needed, it isrecommended to use shielded and earthedcables. The line resistance of sensors maynot exceed 50 Ω (EN 60947-5-6); themaximum cable length is determined bythe cable's cross-section:

R × S R = line resistance [Ω]l = S = cable cross-section

δ [mm2]δ = resistivity[Ω x mm2/m]l = cable length [m]

1

Hans Turck GmbH & Co.KG • D–45466 Mülheim/Ruhr • Tel. 0208/4952-0 • Fax 0208/4952-264 • E-Mail: [email protected] • www.turck.com 1 – 1 /0407

ISOLATING SWITCHINGAMPLIFIER

ISOLATING SWITCHINGAMPLIFIER

1 – 2 /0407 Hans Turck GmbH & Co.KG • D–45466 Mülheim/Ruhr • Tel. 0208/4952-0 • Fax 0208/4952-264 • E-Mail: [email protected] • www.turck.com

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifiersSelection Guide

Housing Styleinterfacemodul

FunctionsIsolating switching amplifier (TSV)TSV with pulse totalizerSwitching amplifierNumber of channels

Galvanic IsolationInput to outputOutput to powerInput to powerInput circuit acc. to EN 60947-5-6Intrinsically safe acc. to EN 50020Not intrinsically safe

Input Circuit MonitoringWire-break (WB) and short-circuit (SC)WB and SC, user programmable

Switching Frequency≤ 10 Hz≤ 200 Hz≤ 500 Hz≤ 1 kHz≤ 2 kHz≤ 3 kHz≤ 5 kHz (dynamic)

Output Circuits per ChannelRelay, 1 NO contact (S)/ SPDT (U)Transistor, potential-freeTransistor, pnpTransistor, npnTransistor with complementary outputAlarm Output

Switching OptionsNO (A)NC (R)NO or NC, programmable

Supply Voltage10…30 VDC

24 VDC115 VAC230 VAC

Special voltagesUniversal power supply

(20...250 VAC/20...125 VDC)Functional safety up to SIL 2Approved for installation in zone 2Data sheet – see page

Hou

sing

Type

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 4 4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

1S 1S 1S 1S 1 S1 1 1 1

1 21 1 1 1

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

IM1-

451E

x-T

IM1-

451E

x-R

*)

M1-

121E

x-T

IM1-

121E

x-R

IM1-

12E

x-M

T

IM1-

12E

x-T

IM1-

12E

x-R

*)

IM1-

22E

x-T*

)

IM12

-22E

x-R

IM1-

22E

x-R

IM1-

22E

x-M

T*)

*) Devices also available withcage-clamps:Type designation Ident-no.IM1-12Ex-R-CC 7541224IM1-22Ex-T-CC 7541235IM1-22Ex-MT-CC 7541236IM1-451Ex-R-CC 7541237



Housing Stylemultimodulmultisafe®




Switching Frequency≤ 10 Hz≤ 200 Hz≤ 500 Hz≤ 1 kHz≤ 2 kHz≤ 3 kHz≤ 5 kHz

Output Circuits per ChannelRelay, 1 NO contact (S)/ SPDT (U)Transistor, potential-freeTransistor, pnpTransistor, npnTransistor with complementary outputAlarm Output




Special voltagesUniversal power supply

(20...250 VAC/20...125 VDC)Functional safety up to SIL 2Approved for installation in zone 2Data sheet – see page

1) only for 230 VAC version

MK

1-2R

P

MK

1-22

N-E

x0M

K1-

22P

-Ex0

MK

13-2

2P-E

x0

MK

13-2

2N-E

x0

MK

1-2A

P

MK

1-11

-RH

ousi

ng

Type

●

2

●

●

●

1

●

●

33

●

2

●

●

●

1

●

●

33

●

1

●

●

●1)

●

●

●

1U

●

●

●

●

●

31

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

37

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

37

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

53

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

53

MK

1-22

-R●

2

●

●

●1)

●

●

●

1U

●

●

●

●

●

35

MK

13-R

-Ex0

MK

13-P

N-E

x0

MK

13-P

F-E

x0

MK

13-N

F-E

x0

MK

13-P

-Ex0

MK

13-N

-Ex0

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

2●

●

●

●

●

41

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

41

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

11

●

●

●

43

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1S

●

●

●

45

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

39

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

2●

●

●

●

●

●

39

MK

13-1

1AE

x0-R

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1U

●

●

●

●

●

47

MK

13-1

21A

Ex0

-R

MK

13-1

2AE

x0-R

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2U

●

●

●

●

49

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1U

●

●

●

●

●

51

MK

13-2

2AE

x0-R

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1U

●

●

●

●

55

MK

15-1

2Ex0

-PN

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

11

●

●

57

1


MS

13-3

3Ex0

-T

MS

13-3

3Ex0

-R

MS

13-2

31E

x0-R

MS

13-2

2Ex0

-R

MS

13-1

2Ex0

-T

MS

13-1

2Ex0

-R

MS

1-33

Ex0

-R

MS

1-22

Ex0

-R

MS

1-12

Ex0

-R

MS

13-2

2Ex0

-T

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

2U

●

●

●

59

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

1U

●

●

●

61

●

3

●

●

●

●

●

●

1S

●

●

●

63

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2U

●

●

●

●

69

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

71

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1U

●

●

●

73

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

75

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1S

●

●

●

●

77

●

3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1S

●

●

●

79

●

3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

81

MS

13-1

1Ex0

-T

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

67

MS

1-33

Ex0

-T

●

3

●

●

●

●

●

●

3

●

●

●

65



Housing Stylemulticart®




Switching Frequency≤ 10 Hz≤ 25 Hz≤ 200 Hz≤ 500 Hz≤ 1 kHz≤ 2 kHz≤ 3 kHz≤ 5 kHz (dynamic)

Output Circuits per ChannelRelay, 1 NO contact (S) / SPDT (U)Transistor, potential-freeTransistor, pnpTransistor, npnTransistor with complementary outputAlarm Output




Special voltages

Data sheet – see page

Hou

sing

Type

MC

13-4

51A

Ex0

-T

MC

13-4

51A

Ex0

-RP

MC

13-4

51A

Ex0

-R

MC

13-4

41A

Ex0

-T

MC

13-4

41A

Ex0

-R

MC

13-4

1Ex0

-RP

MC

13-8

Ex0

-R

MC

13-8

Ex0

-P

MC

13-4

81A

Ex0

-R

MC

13-2

41A

Ex0

-RM

C13

-241

AE

x0-T

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●

2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 4 4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●

●

● ● ● ●

2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1S 2U2 1 1

1 1 1 2 4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Catalogue multicart®

MC

16-4

2Ex0

-TP

MC

16-4

1Ex0

-RP

1



��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�� !��"

��!!��"

#��"�

Fig. 2: Typical output curve – inductive sensor to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

$��%��&��'"()*

��$ ��

+�,��-./

*0��

1'�+1)�2

3�-

Isolating switching amplifiers

Switching amplifiers are used in almost allindustrial applications where binaryswitching signals have to be transmittedfrom a hazardous area to a non-hazardousarea. These amplifiers may be connectedto:– sensors acc. to EN 60947-5-6

(NAMUR)– mechanical contacts

The components selected to make up anintrinsically safe circuit must exactly matchthe technical parameters specified in theconformity certificate (see page A – 19).

Switching amplifiers with intrinsically safecircuits are defined as associatedapparatus according to EN 50014/20standards and may not be installed inhazardous areas.

Design and functions

The wiring diagram shows a typical sensor- amplifier configuration.

A constant voltage of typically 8.2 VDC isapplied to the terminals of an input circuit.A source impedance or internal resistor(Ri, typ. 1 kΩ) senses the current flowpassing through the sensor at thatvoltage. When the proximity sensor perEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) is damped, thecurrent flow in the input circuit changes.The current differential from the undampedto the damped state is used to trigger theamplifer at a defined switching point and,thus, the analogue signal is converted intoa digital signal.

The standard for the sensor/amplifierfunction is set forth by EN 60947-5-6 andspecifies all essential data. Fig. 2 illustratesa typical output curve of an inductive

sensor per EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) atnominal operating conditions:(U0 = 8,2 V ± 0,1 V; Ri = 1 kΩ ± 1 %;TU = 20 °C ± 2 °C ).

The current range in which a switchingsignal occurs is between 1.2 and 2.1 mA.TURCK switching amplifiers are typicallycalibrated for 1.55 mA to which an internalswitching hysteresis of typ. 0.2-0.4 mA isadded. This switching current differenceresults in a contact travel difference whichmay be up to 10 % of the nominatedswitching distance of a sensor (dependingon sensor type).

An operational example of this is:

– a change in the output signal (from 0to 1 – OFF to ON) at or above 1.55 mA

– a change in the output signal (from 1 to0 – ON to OFF) when below 1.75 mA

Input circuit monitoring

NAMUR sensors (in conformance withEN 60947-5-6) are always in a lowimpedance state < 400 Ω, irrespective oftheir operational status. On the other hand,they feature a maximum resistance toensure a minimum current flow of > 0.05mA. These limit values can be used forshort-circuit and wire-break monitoring inthe input circuit of the amplifier. For this it isnecessary to simply add two switchingthresholds to the input circuit.

If a wire-break or short-circuit of the inputcircuit is detected, the respective outputturns off. Some switching amplifiers areequipped with an additional alarm output.If there is no input circuit error, the alarmoutput is on. If an error is detected, therespective output and the alarm outputturn off. (see page 1 – 8, table 3).

Mechanical contacts may be used as inputdevices instead of sensors. For theseapplications, the conditions for theoperating values in the input circuit changedue to the missing resistance. Mechanicalcontacts would look like a wire-break orshort-circuit to a switching amplifier withcircuit monitoring features: when thecontact is open, the current flow isinterrupted and when the contacts areclosed, the input circuit is short-circuited.

The advantages provided by the moni-toring feature are also available when usingmechanical contacts as input devices byconnecting shunt resistors, which simulateNAMUR type sensors, to the contacts.

Fig. 1: Configuration of a switching amplifier


TURCK switching amplifiers are available inthe following versions:

– without input circuit monitoring (forNAMUR sensors and mechanicalcontacts)

– with permanent wire-break monitoring (for NAMUR sensors and mechanicalcontacts with resistor circuit)

– with wire-break and short-circuitmonitoring

– with programmable wire-break andshort-circuit monitoring (for NAMURsensors and mechanical contacts whichare bridged by a resistor depending onthe selected monitoring function )

Output function mode

The output function mode is adjusted viathe switching amplifier and characterisesthe output's switching performance inrelation to the corresponding input.Important terms used in this context are"load current mode/normally open mode(NO)" and "no load current mode/normallyclosed mode (NC)" which refer to theoutput's switching mode when using amechanical contact as an input device.These functions are reversed when aNAMUR sensor is used as an input device– except for capacitive sensors andTURCK's magnetic field sensors series„permaprox®”.

�

�

�

�

�� 4��5��6�� !7

��"��

��

6��#�7

� ��

6��8�7

Table 4

The following drawings show possiblecombinations of the resistor circuitry forinput circuit monitoring.

– short-circuit monitoring:

��

– or wire-break and short-circuitmonitoring:

��9��

�3��

If the circuit monitoring function is tobe extended to the entire input circuit, aresistor must be connected directly to thecontact. This resistor circuitry can beordered as a ready-made module (typeWM1- see chapter 9, page 3).

When using multichannel devices with thecircuit monitoring features, any unusedinputs must be bridged by a resistor(10...22 kΩ) to disable input circuitmonitoring (in case input monitoring cannotbe disabled separately for each channel).Thus, superfluous error indications areavoided.

Load current mode (NO - normally openmode): the output is energised when theinput contact is closed or the inductiveNAMUR sensor is undamped.

No load current mode (NC - normallyclosed mode): the output is energisedwhen the input contact is open or theinductive NAMUR sensor is damped.

Tables 3 and 4 show these functions fordevices with and without input circuitmonitoring.

Installation guidelines

The sensor-specific installation require-ments are listed in the according sensorcatalogues (switching distance, ambientconditions etc). It is essential to meet theserequirements to ensure correct operation.When laying sensor cables it is necessary toobserve the following guidelines:

– the sensor cable should be routedseparately from the power cable

– prevent electro-magnetic interferences– if long cables are used, it is recom-

mended to use shielded andearthed cables

– the line resistance may not exceed50 Ω (EN 60947-5-6); the maximumcable length is determined by thecable's cross-section:

R x S R = line resistance [Ω]l = S = cable cross-section

δ [mm2]δ = resistivity[Ω x mm2/m]l = cable length [m]

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

6��#�7

� ��

6��8�7

��4��5��6�� !7

��"��

:��

��

��

� ��

��

�� $

��

��

� ��

��

Table 3


1


• 2-channel isolating switchingamplifier with removable terminalblocks

• Intrinsically safe input circuitsEEx ia

• Area of application according toATEX: II (1) GD, II 3 G

• Approved for installation in zone 2,however the device must be instal-led in a housing which complieswith the requirements of EN 60079-15 with a minimum protectiondegree of IP54

• Galvanic isolation between inputcircuits, output circuits and supplyvoltage

• 2 relay outputs with oneNO contact each

• Selectable NO/NC output function

• Adjustable signal multiplication

• Universal supply voltage(20...250 VAC/20...125 VDC)

The isolating switching amplifier IM12-22Ex-R is a dual channel device featuringintrinsically safe input circuits.

It can be used in conjunction with sensorsconforming to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),variable resistors or potential-freecontacts.

The output circuits feature one relay withone NO contact each.

The output mode (normally open mode =NO or normally closed mode = NC) can beadjusted via 3 front panel switchesseparately for each channel.

A signal multiplying function can also beadjusted. Here the switching status ofchannel 1 is transferred to outputs 1 and2. The output mode can also be adjustedseparately for each channel.

A green LED on the front indicates that thedevice is powered. The two yellow LEDsindicate the switching status of the relay.

Isolating SwitchingAmplifierIM12-22Ex-R2-channel

��

�

��

��

��

� �

��

� � ��

��

;��<��

��

��

=�

=�

>�

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

!

��

�

<��

�

�

�

�

�"

#

$

,

<��

�

�

��

��

��!"�%��?&"�%'�

��!""�%�?("�@

�,)��%


Type IM12-22Ex-RIdent-no. 7541231

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuits, output circuits and supply voltage for 250 Vrms

test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),intrinsically safe according to EN 50020

Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mA

Output circuits 2 relay outputs (NO)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

Ex-Approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 04 ATEX 2553 / TÜV 06 ATEX 552968 XMaximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 9.6 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 11 mA– Power P0 ≤ 26 mWMaximum external inductances/capacitances– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/1.1 µF / 5 mH/0.83 µF / 10 mH/0.74 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 2 mH/5,2 µF / 10 mH/3,8 µF / 20 mH/3,4 µF– Ex nL IIC 1 mH/1,9 µF / 5 mH/1,4 µF / 10 mH/1,2 µF– Ex nL IIB 1 mH/11 µF / 5 mH/7,5 µF / 10 mH/6,6 µFMarking of devices II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

II 3 G Ex nA nC [nL] IIC/IIB T4

LED indications– Power green– Switching status 2 x yellow

Terminal housing 12-pole, 18 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABS,flammability class V-0 per UL 94

Mounting snap-on clamps for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)or screw terminals for panel mounting

Connection removable terminal blocks, reverse-polarityprotected, screw connection

Connection profile ≤ 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2

with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature -25…+70 °C

Isolating Switching Amplifier IM12-22Ex-R

��*5

��

�*

1


• 1-channel isolating switchingamplifier with removeable terminalblocks

• Intrinsically safe input circuit EEx ia

• Area of application acc. to ATEX:II (1) GD, II 3 G


• Functional safety up to SIL 2(acc. to EN 61508)

• Input circuit monitoring forwire-break and short-circuit(can be disabled)

• Galvanic isolation between inputcircuit, output circuits and powersupply

• 2 relay outputs, each with one NOcontact



• Device also available with cage-clamps,Type designation: IM1-12Ex-R-CC,Ident-no.: 7541224

The isolating switching amplifiers typeIM1-12Ex-R is a single channel devicefeaturing an intrinsically safe input circuit.

It can be connected to sensors accordingto EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variableresistors or potential-free contacts.

The output circuits feature two relays eachwith one NO contact.

Three front panel programming switchesselect the output function (normally openmode = NO/or normally closed mode =NC) and enable separate activation andde-activation of wire-break (WB) and short-circuit (SC) monitoring.

When using mechanical contacts as theinput device, wire-break and short-circuitmonitoring must be disabled or shuntresistors must be connected to thecontacts (II). (See next page for contactconfiguration).

The green LED on the front cover indi-cates that the device is powered. The dualcolour LED indicates the switching status(yellow) as well as fault conditions (red).When the input circuit monitoring feature isactivated, red illuminates to indicate a faultin the input circuit and the output relays arede-energised.

Isolating switchingamplifierIM1-12Ex-R1-channel

>�

��

��

��

�

��

�

<��

�

�

�"

#

$

,

<��

�

�

��

��

��!"�%��?&"�%'�

��!""�%�?("�@

�,)��%

=�?�'

��

�

��

��

��

�

��

�!!�!!

�

��

<�� ;��+�� @�� ,-� .��;��,��


Isolating switching amplifier IM1-12Ex-R


Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuits and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Input circuit according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),intrinsically safe according to EN 50020

Operating characteristics– Voltage 8,2 V– Current 8,2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA

Contact configurationOf mechanical switches with activeinput circuit monitoring function

Output circuits 2 relay outputs with 1 NO contact eachSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au



LED indications– Power green– Switching status/fault indication 1 x yellow/red (dual colour LED)



Connection removeable terminal blocks, reverse-polarityprotected, screw connection, self-lifting

Connection profile ≤ 1 x 2.5 mm2, 2 x 1.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.0 mm2


resistor moduleWM1, ident-no.0912101

��*5

��

�*

�3��

��9��

1









• Two transistor outputs



The isolating switching amplifier typeIM1-12Ex-T is a single channel devicefeaturing an intrinsically safe input circuit.


The output circuit consists of twopotential-free and short-circuit protectedtransistors.

Three front panel programming switchesselect the output function (normally openmode = NO or normally closed mode =NC) and enable separate activation and de-activation of wire-break (WB) and short-circuit (SC) monitoring.


The green LED on the front cover indi-cates that the device is powered. The dualcolour LED indicates the switching status(yellow) as well as fault conditions (red).When the input circuit monitoring feature isactivated, red illuminates to indicate a faultin the input circuit and the transistoroutputs are disabled.

Isolating switchingamplifierIM1-12Ex-T1-channel

>�<��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

,

$

�

��&"�%'��!"��

#

�"

�

�=�?�'

�

,)��%

<��

��

��A

��

�

��

��"

��

�

��

�!!�!!

�

��

<�� ;��+�� @�� ,-� .��;��,��


Isolating switching amplifier IM1-12Ex-T

Type IM1-12Ex-TIdent-no. 7541227

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuits and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,



Operating characteristics– Voltage 8,2 V– Current 8,2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6.0 mA


Output circuits 2 transistor outputs, potential-free, short-circuit protectedSwitching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 50 mASwitching frequency ≤ 5 kHzVoltage drop ≤ 1.3 V










��*5

��

�*

�3��

��9��

1








• Two potential-free and parallelycontrolled MOSFET outputs with aswitching capacity of 250 VAC up to1 kHz



The isolating switching amplifier typeIM1-12Ex-MT is a single channel devicefeaturing an intrinsically safe input circuit.


The output circuit consists of twopotential-free and parallely controlledMOSFET outputs with a switching capacityof 250 VAC up to1 kHz.



The green LED on the front cover indi-cates that the device is powered. The dualcolour LED indicates the switching status(yellow) as well as fault conditions (red).When the input circuit monitoring feature isactivated, red illuminates to indicate a faultin the input circuit and the MOSFEToutputs are disabled.

Isolating switchingamplifierIM1-12Ex-MT1-channel

��

��

�,)��% �"

#�

$

,�

��

<��

��

��

�

�

��

�

�

�

>�

�

=�?�'

<��

��!"�%��?��"�%'�

��$"��)!�%�?�"),�@

��

�

��

��"

��

�

��

�!!�!!

�

��

<�� ;��+�� @�� ,-� .��;��,��


Isolating switching amplifier IM1-12Ex-MT

Type IM1-12Ex-MTIdent-no. 7541228






Output circuits 2 MOSFET outputs, potential-freeSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 90 mASwitching capacity per output ≤ 22.5 VA/10.8 WSwitching frequency ≤ 1 kHz










��*5

��

�*

�3��

��9��

1









• 2 relay outputs, each with one NOcontact, one of the outputs assignedfor alarm signals



The isolating switching amplifier typeIM1-121Ex-R is a single channel devicefeaturing an intrinsically safe input circuit.


The output circuits feature two relays eachwith one NO contact; one of the relays isassigned as an alarm output.



The green LED on the front cover indi-cates that the device is powered. The dualcolour LED indicates the switching status(yellow) as well as fault conditions (red).When the input circuit monitoring feature isactivated, red illuminates to indicate a faultin the input circuit and the output and alarmrelay are de-energised.

Isolating switchingamplifierIM1-121Ex-R1-channel

>�

<��

�

�"

#

$

,

<��

�

��

��

��!"�%��?&"�%'�

��!""�%�?("�@��

��

��

�

��

��

,)��%

=�?�'

��

�

��

��

��

�

��

�!!�!!

�

��

<�� ;��+�� @�� ,-� .��;��,��




Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuits and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Input Circuit according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),intrinsically safe according to EN 50020

Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA

Contact ConfigurationOf mechanical switches with activeinput circuit monitoring function

Output Circuits 2 relay outputs with 1 NO contact eachSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au



LED Indications– Power green– Switching status/fault indication 1 x yellow/red (dual colour LED)

Terminal Housing 12-pole, 18 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABS,flammability class V-0 per UL 94






��*5

��

�*

�3��

��9��

1









• Two transistor outputs, one outputis used for alarm indication



The isolating switching amplifier typeIM1-121Ex-T is a single channel devicefeaturing an intrinsically safe input circuit.


The output circuits are equipped with twotransistors; one of the transistors is usedas an alarm output.



The green LED on the front cover indi-cates that the device is powered. The dualcolour LED indicates the switching status(yellow) as well as fault conditions (red).When the input circuit monitoring feature isactivated, red illuminates to indicate a faultin the input circuit and the transistor outputand alarm output are disabled.

Isolating SwitchingAmplifierIM1-121Ex-T1-channel

��

�

��

��"

��

�

��

�!!�!!

�

��

<�� ;��+�� @�� ,-� .��;��,��

��

��

��

�

��

��

,)��%

��

��

�"

#�

$

,

<��

��&"�%'��!"��

�

�

>�

�

=�?�'

<��

A




Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input and output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms





Output circuits two transistor outputs, potential-free, short-circuit protectedSwitching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 50 mASwitching frequency ≤ 5 kHzVoltage drop ≤ 1.3 V



LED indications– Power green– Switching status/fault indication 1 x yellow/red (dual-colour LED)






��*5

��

�*

�3��

��9�� resistor moduleWM1, ident-no.0912101

1



The isolating switching amplifier type IM1-22Ex-R is a dual channel device featuringintrinsically safe input circuits. It can beconnected to sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variable resistorsor potential-free contacts.

The output circuits feature one relay withone NO contact each.

Six front panel programming switchesselect the output function of each channel(normally open mode = NO/or normallyclosed mode = NC) and enable separateactivation and de-activation of wire-break(WB) and short-circuit (SC) monitoring ofeach channel.


The green LED on the front cover indi-cates that the device is powered. The twodual colour LEDs indicate the switchingstatus (yellow) as well as fault conditions(red). When the input circuit monitoringfeature is activated, red illuminates toindicate a fault in the input circuit and therespective output relay is de-energised.








• 2 relay outputs, each withoneNO contact



>�

<��

�

�

�"

#

$

,

<��

�

�

��

��

��!"�%��?&"�%'�

��!""�%�?("�@

��

��

��

�

�

��

!

�

�

�

,)��%

��

��

��!

��

��

��

=�?�'

=�?�'

��

�

��

��

��

� �

��

��!!

��!!

�!!

�!!

��

<��

�� +�� @�� ,-� .��;��,��

;��









Output circuits 2 relay outputs with 1 NO contact eachSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au



LED indications– Power green– Switching status/Fault indication 2 x yellow/red (dual colour LED)







��*5

��

�*

�3��

��9��

1








• Galvanic isolation between inputcircuits, output circuits and powersupply

• Two transistor outputs for switchingof voltages up to 30 VDC at a max.frequency of 5 kHz



• Device also available with cage-clamps,Type designation: IM1-22Ex-T-CC,Ident-no.: 7541235

The isolating switching amplifier typeIM1-22Ex-T is a dual channel devicefeaturing intrinsically safe input circuits.


The output circuit consists of twopotential- free and short-circuit protectedtransistors, which are capable of switchingvoltages of 30 VDC at max. 5 kHz.



The green LED on the front cover indi-cates that the device is powered. The dualcolour LED indicates the switching status(yellow) as well as fault conditions (red).When the input circuit monitoring feature isactivated, red illuminates to indicate a faultin the input circuit and the respectiveoutput transistor is disabled.

Isolating switchingamplifierIM1-22Ex-T2-channel

>�<��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

!

�

�

�

�

,

$

�

��&"�%'��!"��

#

�"

�

�=�?�'

�=�?�'

�

,)��%

<��

��

��

��!

��

��

��

A

�

��

��"

��

� �

��

��!!

��!!

�!!

�!!

��

��

<�� ;�� +�� @�� ,-� .��;��,��




Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuits, output circuits and supply voltage for 250 Vrms





Output circuits 2 transistor outputs, potential-free, short-circuit protectedSwitching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 50 mASwitching frequency ≤ 5 kHzVoltage drop ≤ 1.3 V



LED indications– Power green– Switching status/Fault indication 2 x yellow/red (dual colour LED)







��*5

��

�*

�3��

��9��

1


• 2-channel isolating switchingamplifier with removeableterminal blocks

• Intrinsically safe input circuits EEx ia



• Connection of sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

• Galvanic isolation between inputcircuits and output circuits andsupply voltage

• Monitoring of the input circuit forwire-break and short-circuit(can be enabled/disabled)

• Two unipolar MOSFET outputs forswitching of voltages up to250 VAC with a max. frequencyof 1 kHz

• Programmable output mode(N.O./N.C. mode)

• Universal operating voltage(20...250 VAC/20...125 VDC)

• Device also available with cage-clamps,Type designation: IM1-22Ex-MT-CC,Ident-no.: 7541236

The isolating switching amplifier, typeIM1-22Ex-MT, features two channels andintrinsically safe input circuits.

The device enables connection of sensorsaccording to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) (I),variable resistors or potential-freecontactors (III). The output circuits areequipped with two unipolar MOSFETtransistors.

Six front panel switches are used to set theoutput mode separately for each channel(N.O or N.C. mode), as well as to enable/disable wire-break (WB) and short-circuit(SC) monitoring separately.

If mechanical contacts are used, the wire-break and short-circuit monitoring functionmust be disabled or the contact must bewired to a resistor circuitry (II). The contactcircuitry is shown overleaf).

A green LED indicates that the device ispowered. If there is an error in the inputcircuit - the dual colour LED assigned tothe faulty input will turn to red, providedthe input circuit monitoring function isactivated. Consequently the associatedoutput MOSFET is inhibited.

Isolating switchingamplifierIM1-22Ex-MT2-channel

�

��

��"

��

� �

��

��!!

��!!

�!!

�!!

��

��

<�� ;�� +�� @�� ,-� .��;��,��

��

��

�,)��% �"

#�

$

,�

��

<��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

�

��

!

��

�

�

�

!

�

>�

�

=�?�'

�

=�?�'

<��

��!"�%��?��"�%'�

��""��!�%�?��@

��

�

�

!

�


Type IM1-22Ex-MTIdent-no. 7541213

Operating voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input and output circuits and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Input circuits to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),intrinsically safe according to EN 50020

Operating values– Voltage 8.2 V– Strom 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6.0 mA

Contact circuitsof mechanical switches withactivated input circuit monitoring function

Output circuits two MOSFET outputsSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 100 mASwitching capacity per output ≤ 25 VA/12 WSwitching frequency ≤ 1 kHz



LED indications– Switching status/error indication 2 x green/red (dual colour LED)– Operational readiness (power ON) green

terminal housing 12 poles, 18 mm wide, Polycarbonatet/ABS,flammability class V-0 per UL94

Mounting snap-on hat rail (DIN 50022)or panel screw mounting

Connection removable terminal blocks, polarity protectedscrew connection, self-lifting



��*5

��

�*

ready-made resistormoduleWM1Ident-no.0912101

�3��

��9��

Isolating switching amplifier IM1-22Ex-MT

1



• Common alarm output



• Approved for installation in zone 2,however the device must beinstalled in a housing whichcomplies with the requirementsof EN 60079-15 with a minimumprotection degree of IP54



• 5 relay outputs, each witha NO contact



• Device also available with cage-clamps,Type designation: IM1-451Ex-R-CC,Ident-no.: 7541237

The isolating switching amplifiers type IM1-451Ex-R are four channel devices featuringintrinsically safe input circuits. They can beconnected to sensors according to EN60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variable resistors orpotential-free contacts. The output circuitseach feature a relay with a NO contact. Thedevice also features a common alarmoutput.

Eight front panel programming switchesselect the output function of each channel(normally open mode = NO/or normallyclosed mode = NC) and enable separateactivation and de-activation of input circuitmonitoring.

When using mechanical contacts as theinput device, input circuit monitoring mustbe disabled or shunt resistors must beconnected to the contacts (II). (See nextpage for contact configuration).

The green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the device is powered. The four dualcolour LEDs indicate the switching status(yellow) as well as fault conditions (red).When the input circuit monitoring feature isactivated, red illuminates to indicate a faultin the input circuit and the respective outputrelay and common fault relay are de-energised.


��

��

��#$��

�

��

� � � �

�

�

%

#

�!! �!! �!! �!!

�&��&��&��&� ��

��

��

��

��

<�� ;��

�� ///��/+/?�/�/��

�,)��%

>�

��

��

��

��

#��

(

��

�"��

$

<�� <�� "

�$

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

!��

�

��

��

��

��

��

&

�

�

�

&

�

�

�

=�?�'

=�?�'

=�?�'

=�?�' �

�

�

&

�(

�#

�,

��

��

�&

��

�!

� �!"�%��?&"�%'�

�� !""�%�� ("@

#

(

�"

$

�

�

!

�

#

(

�"

$

�

�

!

�


Type IM1-451Ex-RIdent-No. 7541188

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6.0 mA


Output circuits 5 relay outputs (NO contact)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 3 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 750 VASwitching frequency ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 04 ATEX 2604/TÜV 06 ATEX 552967X/IEC Ex TUN 06.0007XMaximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 11.3 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 13 mA– Power P0 ≤ 36 mWMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/0.84 µF / 5 mH/0.62 µF / 10 mH/0.55 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 2 mH/4 µF / 10 mH/2.8 µF / 20 mH/2.5 µFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

II 3 G Ex nA [nL] IIC/IIB T4

LED indications– Power green– Switching status/fault indication 4 x yellow/red (2-colour LED)

Housing 20-pole, 27 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 per UL 94


Connection removable terminal blocks, reverse-polarityprotected, screw connection, self-lifting



Isolating Switching Amplifier IM1-451Ex-R

�3��

��9��resistor moduleWM1, ident-no.0912101

��*5

��

%�

1



• Common alarm output


• Area of application according toATEX: II (1) GD




• 5 transistor outputs, short-circuitand reverse polarity protected



The isolating switching amplifiers type IM1-451Ex-T are four channel devices featuringintrinsically safe input circuits. They can beconnected to sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variable resistorsor potential-free contacts.

The output circuits each feature a potential-free, short-circuit and reverse polarityprotected transistor output. A positivevoltage can be applied to the outputs viatheir common connection. The device alsofeatures a common alarm output.

Eight front panel programming switchesselect the output function of each channel(normally open mode = NO/or normallyclosed mode = NC) and enable separate

activation and de-activation of input circuitmonitoring.When using mechanical contacts as theinput device, input circuit monitoring mustbe disabled or shunt resistors must beconnected to the contacts (II). (See nextpage for contact configuration).

The green LED on the front cover indi-cates that the device is powered. The fourdual colour LEDs indicate the switchingstatus (yellow) as well as fault conditions(red). When the input circuit monitoringfeature is activated, red illuminates toindicate a fault in the input circuit and therespective transistor output and commonfault output are disabled.

Isolating SwitchingAmplifierIM1-451Ex-T4-channel

��

��

��#$��"

�

��

� � � �

�

�

%

#

�!! �!! �!! �!!

�&��&��&��&� ��

��

��

��

��

<�� ;��

�� ///��/+/?�/�/��

>�

��

��

��

��

(

��

#

��

$

��

�"

<��<��

�"

�$

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

!

��

��

��

��

�(

�#�

�

�,��

��

��&

�

�&��

&

�

�

�

=�?�'

=�?�'

=�?�'

=�?�'

��

&

�

�

�

��

�!

�

��&"�%'��!"��

(

#

$

�"

�

�

�

!

(

#

$

�"

�

�

�

!

�,)��%


�3��


Type IM1-451Ex-TIdent-No. 7541189

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6.0 mA

Contact configurationOf mechanical switches with activenput circuit monitoring function

Output circuits 4 transistor outputs, potential free, short-circuit protectedSwitching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 50 mASwitching frequency ≤ 3 kHzVoltage drop ≤ 2.5 V

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 04 ATEX 2604/TÜV 06 ATEX 552967X/IEC Ex TUN 06.0007XMaximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 11.3 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 13 mA– Power P0 ≤ 36 mWMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/0.84 µF / 5 mH/0.62 µF / 10 mH/0.55 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 2 mH/4 µF / 10 mH/2.8 µF / 20 mH/2.5 µFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


LED indications– Power green– Switching status/fault indication 4 x yellow/red (2-colour LED)






Isolating Switching Amplifier IM1-451Ex-T

��*5

��

%�

1


Switching AmplifierMK1-11-R/230VACMK1-11-R/24VUC1-channel

• 1-channel switching amplifier

• Input circuit according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

• Galvanic isolation between inputcircuit, output circuit and supplyvoltage

• The 230 VAC device providesadditionaI galvanic isolation fromsupply voltage

• Relay output with one SPDTcontact


The switching amplifiers type MK1-11-Rare single channel devices with an inputcircuit according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR). They can be used in conjunctionwith sensors conforming to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. The device is provided witha relay output with one SPDT contact.

Connecting the sensor according topossibility (I) of the block diagram, selectsthe normally open (NO) output function.If connected according to possibility (II),the normally closed (NC) output function isselected.

(

�

��+

��

&

!

�

�

�

�

!

�

�

A

A�

��

��

=�

>�

<�� 0��1

��0 1

$

,

#��!"�%��?��"�%'�

��!""�%�?("�@

�,�%

��

�

��

�

�

�

��

� �

��

��<�� ;��

A green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the device is powered. The yellowLED indicates the switching status.

Terminals 3 and 6 provide a voltage of8 V for a max. load of 75 mA.


*5

��%�

Switching Amplifier MK1-11-R

Type MK1-11-R/230VAC MK1-11-R/24VUCIdent-no. 7540000 7540007

Supply voltage UB 196...253 VAC 19...29 VUCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48...62 Hz 48...62 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 VA ≤ 2 VAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit and output circuit

and supply voltage for 250 Vrms, and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,

test voltage 4 kVrms test voltage 4 kVrms

Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V 8 V– Current 8 mA 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mA 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mA typ. 0.2 mA

Output circuits 1 relay output (SPDT) 1 relay output (SPDT)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDC ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

LED indications– Power green green– Switching status yellow yellow

Housing 12-pole, 27 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABS,flammability class V-0 per UL 94


Connection via flat terminals with self-liftingpressure plates



1


MK1-2AP/24VDC MK1-2RP/24VDC

Switching AmplifierMK1-2AP/24VDCMK1-2RP/24VDC2-channel


• Input circuits according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

• 2 transistor outputs, pnp,short-circuit protected:– normally open (NO) mode

(MK1-2AP/24 VDC)– normally closed (NC) mode

(MK1-2RP/24 VDC)

• Terminal housing, 18 mm wide,with snap-on clamps for top-hatrail (DIN 50022) or screw terminalsfor panel mounting

The MK1-2AP and MK1-2RP are dualchannel switching amplifiers with inputcircuits according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR). They can be used with sensorsconforming to EN 60947-5-6 or potential-free contacts.

The couplers provide two pnp, short-circuit protected transistor outputs perchannel. The input circuits are not self-monitored.

��

��

�

22

��

��3�� 4��5��6�� !7

��

�

��

��

�'��()�#*��

� �;��

The output mode is explained in thefunction truth table on the bottom.

The switching state of the respectiveoutput is indicated via yellow LED's.

��

��

��

�

��

� �

��

��

�

22

��

��3�� 4��5��6�� !7

�&

�� ,

#

(

!

�

��

��

<��

&

�

�

��

�

�

��""��


Type MK1-2AP/24VDC MK1-2RP/24VDCIdent-no. 7505500 7505501

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDC 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 % ≤ 10 %Current consumption ≤ 20 mA ≤ 20 mA

Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V 8 V– Current 5 mA 5 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mA 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mA 0.2 mA

Output circuits 2 pnp transistor outputs 2 pnp transistor outputsVoltage drop ≤ 2.5 V ≤ 2.5 VSwitching current per output ≤ 100 mA, short-circuit protected ≤ 100 mA, short-circuit protectedSwitching frequency ≤ 1 kHz ≤ 1 kHz

LED indicationsSwitching status 2 x yellow 2 x yellow




Connection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm² or 2 x 1.5 mm²with wire sleeves

Degree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature -25…+60 °C

,$

�,

#"

Switching Amplifier MK1-2AP/MK1-2RP

1


Switching AmplifierMK1-22-R/230VACMK1-22-R/24VUC2-channel


• Input circuits according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)


• The 230 VAC device providesadditional galvanic isolation frompower supply

• 2 relay outputs, each withone change-over contact


The switching amplifiers type MK1-22-Rare dual channel devices with input circuitsaccording to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR).They can be used in conjunction withsensors conforming to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. Each output circuit featuresa relay with change-over contact.

Connecting the sensors according topossibility (I) of the block diagram, selectsthe normally open (NO) output mode.If connected according to possibility (II),the normally closed (NC) output functionis selected.

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

� �<�� ;��

The green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the devices are powered separatelyfor each channel. The yellow LED indicatesthe output switching status.

��+

��

(

�

!

�

�

!

�

�

A

A�

��

��=�

>�

<�� (��0��1

�!��0 1

��

�&

$

��!"�%��?��"�%'�

��!""�%�?("�@

�,�%

=�

��

��

�"

>�

� �

,

�

#

&

�

!

�

�

A

A�

��

��

�,�%

�

�

�

�

�

�



Supply voltage UB 196...253 VAC 19...29 VUCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48...62 Hz 48...62 HzPower/current consumption ≤ 3 VA ≤ 2 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit and output circuit

and supply voltage for 250 Vrms and supply voltage for 250 Vrms

test voltage 4 kVrms test voltage 4 kVrms

Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mA 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mA 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mA typ. 0.2 mA

Output circuits 2 relay outputs (change-over) 2 relay outputs (change-over)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDC ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au silver-alloy + 3 µm Au







Switching Amplifier MK1-22-R

*5

�� &�

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMK1-22P-Ex0/24VDCMK1-22N-Ex0/24VDC2-channel

• 2-channel isolating switchingamplifier





• 2 short-circuit protectedtransistor outputs:– pnp

(MK1-22P-Ex0)– npn

(MK1-22N-Ex0)


The MK1-22N-Ex0 and MK1-22P-Ex0 aredual channel devices with intrinsically safeinput circuits. They can be used inconjunction with sensors conforming toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variable resistorsor potential-free contacts.

Each device is equipped with two short-circuit protected transistor outputs. Thereare pnp versions (MK1-22P Ex0) and npnversions (MK1-22N-Ex0) available.

Two front panel programming switchesselect the output function of each channel(normally open mode = NO/or normallyclosed mode = NC) and enable separateactivation and de-activation of input circuitmonitoring.

These units do not feature input circuitmonitoring (wire-break and short-circuit).If input circuit monitoring is required, theswitching amplifiers MK13-22N-Ex0 orMK13-22P-Ex0 should be used.

The green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the device is powered. The two yellowLEDs indicate the switching status.

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�

�

�

��

��

�#*��'��.

;��

<��

; � ��

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�

�

�

��

��

�#*��'��)��.

MK1-22N-Ex0/...

MK1-22P-Ex0/...

=�

>�

=�

�

<��

��

,

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

�

,��

=�

>�

=�

,

�

�

<��

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

�

,��


Type MK1-22P-Ex0/24VDC MK1-22N-Ex0/24VDCIdent-no. 7505643 7505642

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDC 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 % ≤ 10 %Current consumption approx. 50 mA approx. 50 mAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit


test voltage 2.5 kVrms test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe according to EN 50020

Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mA 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mA 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mA typ. 0.2 mA

Output circuits 2 pnp transistor outputs 2 npn transistor outputsVoltage drop ≤ 1.7 V ≤ 1.7 VSwitching current per output ≤ 50 mA, short-circuit protected ≤ 50 mA, short-circuit protectedSwitching frequency ≤ 3 kHz ≤ 3 kHz

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 03 ATEX 2235 /TÜV 05 ATEX 2924 X TÜV 03 ATEX 2235 / TÜV 05 ATEX 2924 XMaximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 9.9 V ≤ 9.9 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 24 mA ≤ 24 mA– Power P0 ≤ 60 mW ≤ 60 mWMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 2/10/20 mH / 4.9/3.5/3 µF 2/10/20 mH / 4.9/3.5/3 µF– [EEx ia] IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.74/0.64 µF 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.74/0.64 µF– EEx nL IIB 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6/5.3 µF 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6/5.3 µF– EEx nL IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1 µF 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1 µFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

II 3 G EEx nA [nL] IIC/IIB T4 II 3 G EEx nA [nL] IIC/IIB T4







Isolating Switching Amplifier MK1-22P-Ex0/MK1-22N-Ex0

,�

�,

��

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMK13-P-Ex0/24VDCMK13-N-Ex0/24VDC1-channel


• Intrinsically safe input circuitEEx ia





• 2 complementary short-circuitprotected transistor outputs:– pnp (MK13-P-Ex0)– npn (MK13-N-Ex0)

The MK13-P-Ex0 and the MK13-N-Ex0are single channel devices with an intrinsi-cally safe input circuit. They can be used inconjunction with sensors conforming toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variable resistorsor potential-free contacts.

The devices have either two short-circuitprotected pnp or npn transistor outputswith complementary function.

The input circuit is monitored for short-circuit and wire-break. The input circuitmonitoring function can be disabled byjumpering terminals 3 and 4.

When using mechanical contacts as theinput device, the input circuit monitoringfunction must be turned off, or shuntresistors must be connected to thecontacts (II).

The dual colour LED indicates theswitching status (yellow) of the output.With an input circuit fault, the input circuitchanges – with activated input circuitmonitoring – the colour of the dual colourLED to red. Then the outputs are disabled.An external exclusive OR circuit monitoringmay be used to evaluate faults in the inputcircuit.

MK13-N-Ex0/...

MK13-P-Ex0/...

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�

�

�#*��'�%��.

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�

�

�#*��'�%�)��.

;�� !��

<��

=�?"#

>�,

�

�

��

��

�$

�%

�

�

�

�

��

��<��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

&&&& &&

��

�

=�?"#

>�,

�

�

��

�� %

�$

�

�

�

�

��

��<��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

&&&& &&

��

�


�3��


Type MK13-P-Ex0/24VDC MK13-N-Ex0/24VDCIdent-no. 7542116 7542117


and supply voltage for 250 Vrms, and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,test voltage 2.5 kVrms test voltage 2.5 kVrms


Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mA 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mA 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.4 mA typ. 0.4 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mA ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA ≥ 6 mA



Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 03 ATEX 2235 / TÜV 05 ATEX 2924 X TÜV 03 ATEX 2235 / TÜV 05 ATEX 2924 XMaximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 9.9 V ≤ 9.9 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 12 mA ≤ 12 mA– Power P0 ≤ 30 mW ≤ 30 mWMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 2/10/20 mH / 5/3.6/3.2 µF 2/10/20 mH / 5/3.6/3.2 µF– [EEx ia] IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.79/0.7 µF 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.79/0.7 µF– EEx nL IIB 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6.2/5.5 µF 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6.2/5.5 µF– EEx nL IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1.2 µF 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1.2 µFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC








Isolating Switching Amplifier MK13-P-Ex0/MK13-N-Ex0

,�

�,

��

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMK13-PF-Ex0/24VDCMK13-NF-Ex0/24VDC1-channel







• 2 short-circuit protectedtransistor outputs, functionprogrammable:– pnp (MK13-PF-Ex0)– npn (MK13-NF-Ex0)

• Optional separate output forerror indications


The MK13-PF-Ex0 and MK13-NF-Ex0switching amplifiers are single channeldevices with intrinsically safe input circuit.They can be used in conjunction withsensors conforming to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts.

The devices have two short-circuitprotected pnp or npn transistor outputs.Front panel switches select the function ofthe output (normally open mode = NO/or normally closed mode = NC andcomplementary function).The input circuit is monitored for short-circuit and wire-break. The input circuitmonitoring function can be disabled onfront side switches or by jumperingterminals 3 and 4.

If the input monitoring function is active,error indications are provided by terminal 6.Switch position V represents complemen-tary outputs. An external exclusive ORcircuit monitoring may be used to evaluatefaults in the input circuit.

The dual colour LED indicates the switchingstatus (yellow) of the output. With an inputcircuit fault, the input circuit changes – withactivated input circuit monitoring – thecolour of the dual colour LED to red. Thenthe outputs are disabled.

When using mechanical contacts as theinput device, the input circuit monitoringfunction must be disabled, or shuntresistors must be connected to thecontacts (II).

=�?"#

>�

�

�

��

��

��

�� ,

�

�

�

�

<��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

&&&& &&

�

��

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�#*��'�%�)/��.

)�0

�

��

��

��

<��

%��'�!'B� ��

;�� !��

��(!��)��(!��)��

MK13-PF-Ex0/24VDC

=�?"#

>�

�

�

��

��

��

�� ,

�

�

�

�

<��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

&&&& &&

�

��

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�#*��'�%�/��.

)�0

�

��

��

��

MK13-NF-Ex0/24VDC


�3��


Type MK13-PF-Ex0/24VDC MK13-NF-Ex0/24VDCIdent-no. 7542112 7542113









– [EEx ia] IIB 2/10/20 mH / 5/3.6/3.2 µF 2/10/20 mH / 5/3.6/3.2 µF– [EEx ia] IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.79/0.7 µF 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.79/0.7 µF– EEx nL IIB 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6.2/5.5 µF 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6.2/5.5 µF– EEx nL IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1.2 µF 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1.2 µFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


LED indications– Power green– Switching status/fault indication yellow/red (2-colour LED) yellow/red (2-colour LED)






Isolating Switching Amplifier MK13-PF-Ex0/MK13-NF-Ex0

,�

�,

��

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMK13-PN-Ex0/24VDC1-channel

The MK13-PN-Ex0 is a single channelswitching amplifier with an intrinsically safeinput circuit. It can be used in conjunctionwith sensors conforming to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts.

The device is equipped with one short-circuit protected pnp transistor output andone short-circuit protected npn transistoroutput. The output function is selected bya switch located on the front cover.Positions A and R represent normally open(NO) and normally closed (NC) modes,respectively. Both outputs are either acti-vated or de-activated at the same time.

The input circuit is monitored for short-circuit and wire-break. The input circuitmonitoring function can be disabled onfront side switches or by jumperingterminals 3 and 4. When using mechanicalcontacts as the input device, the inputcircuit monitoring function must bedisabled, or shunt resistors must beconnected to the contacts (II).

The dual colour LED indicates theswitching status (yellow) of the output.With an input circuit fault, the input circuitchanges – with activated input circuitmonitoring – the colour of the dual colourLED to red. Then the outputs are disabled.







• 1 npn and 1 pnp short-circuitprotected transistor output

• Selectable NO/NC outputfunction

=�?"#

>�

��

��

�

�

��

�� ,

�

�

�

�

<��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

&&&& &&

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�#*��'�%�)��.

��

)�0

�

��

;�� !��

<��

%��'�!'B� ��(!��)��


�3��


Type MK13-PN-Ex0/24VDCIdent-no. 7542114

Supply voltage UB 10...30 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption approx. 20 mAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms, test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.4 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA


Output circuits 2 pnp transistor outputsVoltage drop ≤ 2.5 VSwitching current output ( 5 ) ≤ 100 mA, short-circuit protected, pnpSwitching current output ( 6 ) ≤ 100 mA, short-circuit protected, npnSwitching frequency ≤ 3 kHz

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 03 ATEX 2235 / TÜV 05 ATEX 2924 XMaximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 9.9 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 12 mA– Power P0 ≤ 30 mWMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 2/10/20 mH / 5/3.6/3.2 µF– [EEx ia] IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.79/0.7 µF– EEx nL IIB 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6.2/5.5 µF– EEx nL IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1.2 µFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

II 3 G EEx nA [nL] IIC/IIB T4

LED indications– Power green– Switching status yellow/red (dual-colour LED)






Isolating Switching Amplifier MK13-PN-Ex0

,�

�,

��

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMK13-R-Ex01-channel


• Intrinsically safe input circuit EEX ia





• Relay output with oneNO contact



The MK13-R-Ex0 is a single channelswitching amplifier with an intrinsically safeinput circuit. It can be used in conjunctionwith sensors conforming to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. The device is provided witha relay output with one NO contact.

A switch enables selection of the outputfunction (normally open or normally closedmode).

The input circuit is monitored for short-circuit and wire-break. The input circuitmonitoring function can be disabled onfront side switches or by jumperingterminals 3 and 4.


The green LED indicates that the device ispowered. The dual colour LED indicatesthe switching status (yellow) of the output.With an input circuit fault, the input circuitchanges – with activated input circuitmonitoring – the colour of the dual colourLED to red. Then the relay output is de-energised.

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�

)�0

�#*��'�%��.

��

��

;�� !��

<��

%��'�!'B� ��(!��)��

=�?"#

>�

�

�

�

��

��<��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

&&&& &&

�� $?��#$�� ?��@��

,

�

�

<��,��


�3��


Type MK13-R-Ex0Ident-no. 7542123

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input and output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms





Output circuits relay output (1 NO contact)Switching voltage 250 VAC/125 VDCSwitching current ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/120 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 04 ATEX 2621Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 9,6 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 11 mA– Power P0 ≤ 26 mWMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/1,1 µF / 5 mH/0,83 µF / 10 mH/0,74 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 2 mH/5,2 µF / 10 mH/3,8 µF / 20 mH/3,4 µFMarking of device II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

LED indications– Power green– Switching status/Fault indication yellow/red (dual-colour LED)






Isolating Switching Amplifier MK13-R-Ex0

,�

�,

��

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMK13-11AEx0-R/24VDCMK13-11AEx0-R/230VAC1-channel



• Area of application according toATEX: II (1) G



• Relay output with oneSPDT contact


The MK13-11AEx0-R type switchingamplifiers are single channel devicesfeaturing an intrinsically safe input circuit.They can be connected to sensors accor-ding to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variableresistors or potential-free contacts.The device is provided with a relay outputwith one SPDT contact.

Three front panel progamming switchesenable selection of the output function(normally open or normally closed mode)and separate activation and de-activationof wire-break (switch position DB) andshort-circuit monitoring (switch position K).Switch positions A and R representnormally open mode (NO) and normallyclosed (NC) mode, respectively.


The green LED indicates that the device ispowered. The dual colour LED indicatesthe switching status (yellow) as well as faultconditions (red). When the input circuitmonitoring feature is activated, red illumi-nates to indicate a fault condition in theinput circuit and the output relay is de-energised.

>�<��

��*��+

� ��*�+

��,��

��

��

�� $?��#$

�� ?��@

�=�?"#

�

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

�� !"# $$�

��%��

<��

;�� !��

;�)�� @��./��!0��;��.��


�3��


Type MK13-11AEx0-R/230VAC MK13-11AEx0-R/24VDCIdent-no. 7541241 7541242

Supply voltage UB 196...253 VAC 10...30 VDCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48...62 Hz ≤ 10 %Power/current consumption ≤ 30 mArms ≤ 1,0 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit



Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V 8 V– Current 8 mA 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mA 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mA typ. 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mA ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6.0 mA ≥ 6.0 mA


Output circuits 1 relay output (SPDT) 1 relay output (SPDT)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDC ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity PTB 99 ATEX 2083 PTB 99 ATEX 2083Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 11.9 V ≤ 11.9 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 36 mA ≤ 36 mAMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 87 mH/9.4 µF 87 mH/9.4 µF– [EEx ia] IIC 23 mH/1.45 µF 23 mH/1.45 µFMarking of devices II (1) G [EEx ia] IIC II (1) G [EEx ia] IIC

LED indications– Power green green– Switching status/fault indication yellow/red (2-colour LED) yellow/red (2-colour LED)






Isolating Switching Amplifier MK13-11AEx0-R

15

�� &�

1



The MK13-12AEx0-R type switching ampli-fiers are single channel devices featuringan intrinsically safe input circuit. They canbe connected to sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variable resistorsor potential-free contacts.

The output circuit is equipped with tworelays operating in parallel, each with oneSPDT contact.

Three front panel progamming switchesenable selection of the output function(normally open or normally closed mode)and separate activation and de-activationof wire-break (switch position DB) andshort-circuit monitoring (switch position K).Switch positions A and R represent

normally open mode (NO) and normallyclosed (NC) mode, respectively.


The green LED indicates that the device ispowered. The dual colour LED indicatesthe switching status (yellow) as well as faultconditions (red). When the input circuitmonitoring feature is activated, redilluminates to indicate a fault condition inthe input circuit and the output relays arede-energised.





• Input circuit monitoring forwire-break and short circuit(can be disabled)

• 2 relay outputs, each withoneSPDT contact


�

�

�� $?��#$

�� ?��@

>�<��

��*��+

� ��*�+

��,��

��

�

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

�=�?"#

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

�� !"# $$�

��%��

�

<��

;�� !��

;�)�� @��./��!0��;��.��


�3��



Supply voltage UB 196...253 VAC 10...30 VDCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48...62 Hz ≤ 10 %Power/current consumption ≤ 30 mArms ≤ 1.3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit





Output circuits 2 relay outputs (SPDT) 2 relay outputs (SPDT)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDC ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au silver-alloy + 3 µm Au










15

�� &�

1



• 1-channel isolating switchingamplifier with common alarmoutput





• 1 switching and 1 alarm output


The MK13-121AEx0-R type switchingamplifiers are single channel devicesfeaturing an intrinsically safe input circuit.They can be connected to sensorsaccording to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),variable resistors or potential-freecontacts. The switching output and thecommon alarm output each feature a relaywith an SPDT contact.

Three front panel programming switchesenable selection of the output function(normally open or normally closed mode)and separate activation and de-activationof wire-break (switch position DB) andshort-circuit monitoring (switch position K).Switch positions A and R representnormally open mode (NO) and normallyclosed (NC) mode, respectively.


The green LED indicates that the deviceis powered. The dual colour LED indicatesthe switching status (yellow) as well as faultconditions (red). When the input circuitmonitoring feature is activated, red illumi-nates to indicate a fault condition with awire break or short circuit in the inputcircuit and the output and alarmrelay are de-energised.

�

�� $�� ?��@

>�<��

��*��+

� ��*�+

��,��

��

�

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

�=�?"#

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

�� !"# $$�

��%��

�

<��

;�� !��

;�)�� @��./��!0��;��.��


�3��






Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V 8 V– Current 7 mA 7 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mA 1.55 mAHysteresis typ. 0.2 mA typ. 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mA ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA ≥ 6 mA


Output circuits 2 relay outputs (SPDT) 2 relay outputs (SPDT)Switching voltage ≤ 250 V ≤ 250 VSwitching current per output ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au silver-alloy + 3 µm Au










15

�� &�

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMK13-22P-Ex0/24VDCMK13-22N-Ex0/24VDC2-channel






• Input circuit monitoring forwire-break and short-circuit(cannot be disabled)

• 2 short-circuit protectedtransistor outputs:– pnp

(MK13-22P-Ex0)– npn

(MK13-22N-Ex0)


The MK13-22P-Ex0 and the MK13-22N-Ex0 are dual channel devices featuringintrinsically safe input circuits.They can be connected to sensors con-forming to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),variable resistors or potential-free contacts.Both transistor outputs are short-circuitprotected and available in eitherpnp (MK13-22P-Ex0) ornpn (MK13-22N-Ex0) versions.The output function (normally open mode =switch position NO / or normally closedmode = switch position NC) of bothchannels is selected by a selector switchlocated on the front cover.The input circuits are monitored for short-circuit and wire-break. Monitoring can bedeactivated using the front side switch.

If input circuit monitoring is not required,the switching amplifiers MK1-22P-Ex0or MK1-22N-Ex0 should be usedalternatively.

When using mechanical contacts as inputdevices, shunt resistors must be connec-ted to the contacts (see next page forcontact configuration).

The green LED indicates that the deviceis powered. Both dual colour LEDs indicatethe switching status (yellow) of therespective output. When the input circuitmonitoring feature is activated, red illumi-nates to indicate a fault condition in theinput circuit and the transistor output isdisabled.

MK13-22N-Ex0/...

MK13-22P-Ex0/...

,

�

�

�

�

<��

�

�=�?"#

>�

=�?"#��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

�

��

,��

�

<��

�

�=�?"#

>�

=�?"#��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

,

�

��

,��

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�

�

�

��

��

��

�#*��'�%��)��.

<��

;�)��

;�� !��

��

��

��

�

�+��,-��

�

�

�

��

��

��

�#*��'�%��.


�3��


Type MK13-22P-Ex0/24VDC MK13-22N-Ex0/24VDCIdent-no. 7542111 7542110






Output circuits pnp transistor outputs npn transistor outputsVoltage drop ≤ 1.7 V ≤ 1.7 VSwitching current output ≤ 50 mA, short-circuit protected ≤ 50 mA, short-circuit protectedSwitching frequency ≤ 3 kHz ≤ 3 kHz


– [EEx ia] IIB 2/10/20 mH / 4.9/3.5/3 µF 2/10/20 mH / 4.9/3.5/3 µF– [EEx ia] IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.74/0.64 µF 1/5/10 mH / 1.1/0.74/0.64 µF– EEx nL IIB 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6/5.3 µF 2/10/20 mH / 8.6/6/5.3 µF– EEx nL IIC 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1 µF 1/5/10 mH / 1.8/1.3/1 µFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


LED indications– Power green green– Switching status/fault indication 2 x yellow/red (2-colour LED) 2 x yellow/red (2-colour LED)






Isolating Switching Amplifier MK13-22P-Ex0/MK13-22N-Ex0

,�

�,

��

1








• 2 relay outputs, each with oneSPDT contact


The MK13-22AEx0-R type switchingamplifiers are dual channel devicesfeaturing intrinsically safe input circuits.They can be connected to sensorsaccording to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),variable resistors or potential-freecontacts. The output cicuits each feature arelay output with SPDT contact.

Six front panel programming switchesselect the output function of each channel(normally open mode = switch position A/or normally closed mode = switch positionR) and enable separate activation and de-activation of wire-break (switch positionDB) and short-circuit (switch position K)monitoring of each channel.When using mechanical contacts as the

input device, wire-break and short-circuitmonitoring must be disabled or shuntresistors must be connected to thecontacts (II). (See next page for contactconfiguration).

The green LED indicates that the device ispowered. The two dual colour LEDsindicate the switching status (yellow) aswell as fault conditions (red). When theinput circuit monitoring feature is activated,red illuminates to indicate a fault conditionin the input circuit and the respectiveoutput relay is de-energised.

�

�

�� $?��#$

�� ?��@

>�<��

��*��+

� ��*�+

��

��

�

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

�

�

��,-"

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��,�� =�?"#

=�?"#

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

�� !"# $$�

��%��%��

�

�

� �

<��

;�� !��

;�)�� @��./��!0��;��.��

�'B� ��!��)��


�3��








Output circuits 2 relay outputs (SPDT) 2 relay outputs (SPDT)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDC ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity per output ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz ≤ 10 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au silver-alloy + 3 µm Au



LED indications– Power green green– Switching status/fault indication 2 x yellow/red (2-colour LED) 2 x yellow/red (2-colour LED)







15

�� &�

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMK15-12Ex0-PN/24VDC1-channel

The MK15-12Ex0-PN/... is a single channeltype special switching amplifier, particularlysuited for transfer of high pulse frequencies(e. g. when used in scanning turbinerotation).

They can be connected to sensorsaccording to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),variable resistors or potential-freecontacts.

The device is equipped with one short-circuit protected pnp transistor output andone short-circuit protected npn outputtransistor.

Three front panel programming switchesset the channel function (normally openmode (NO) and normally closed (NC)mode), pulse expansion and the selectionof pulse processing for the input signal(static or dynamic).


• Intrinsically safe input circuitsEEx ia/ib

• Area of application according toATEX: II (1/2) GD


• Static and dynamic pulseprocessing

• Switching frequency up to 5 kHz

• Two transistor outputs, 1 npnand 1 pnp short-circuit protected


��

��

��

�

�

�

+��,1�2-��1��

�'�$��.�)�#*��

��&'"'�(�

��)*+

<�) ��

;�� !�� <��

$)� �'��?��'�� )��;�!��'2�!��'�

If pulse expansion is active, the outputpulse is extended by 10 ms.

With static pulse processing, the NAMURswitching thresholds are scanned in arange of 0...5 kHz.

Dynamic pulse processing is to be usedwith sine and square wave input signalswhose absolute value switching thresholdsdo not correspond to the NAMURstandard. A signal deviation (currentchange) of approx. 0.5 mA in an operatingrange of 1.5...3.5 mA switches the output.

The green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the devices are powered. The yellowLED indicates the switching status of theoutput (LED on – transistor conducting).

=�

>�,

�

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

<��

�

��

�


Isolating Switching Amplifier MK15-12Ex0-PN

Type MK15-12Ex0-PN/24VDCIdent-No. 7541316

Supply voltage UB 10...30 VDCLine frequency/ripple WPP ≤ 10 %Power/current consumption approx. 20 mAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8.2 V– Current 8.2 mASwitching threshold (static) 1.55 mAHysteresis (static) 0.2 mA (typ.)

Output circuits Two transistor outputsVoltage drop output ( 5 ) ≤ 2.5 VVoltage drop output ( 6 ) ≤ 2.5 VSwitching current output ( 5 ) ≤ 100 mA, short-circuit protected, pnpSwitching current output ( 6 ) ≤ 100 mA, short-circuit protected, npnSwitching frequency ≤ 5 kHz

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 03 ATEX 2121Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 11.3 V– Short-circuit current I0 14 mA– Power P0 39 mW– Internal resistance Ri 823 ΩCharacteristic linearMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 0.9 mH/710 nF / 1.9 mH/620 nF / 4.9 mH/530 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 4.9 mH/2,7 µFInternal inductance Li 120 µHAmbient temperature Tu -25...+70 °CMarking of device II (1/2) GD [EEx ia/ib] IIC/IIB

LED indications– Switching status yellow– Power green






,�

�,

��

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMS1-12Ex0-R1-channel

The MS1-12Ex0-R is a single channelswitching amplifier with an intrinsically safeinput circuit. It can be connected tosensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. The output circuit has tworelays with one SPDT contact each.

The output function is jumper program-mable by linking terminals 11/12 fornormally open mode (NO/A) or by leavingterminals 11/12 open for normally closedmode (NC/R).

� ��.�

� � � � � � ��,-

./� ��

��

�;�� !��



• Area of application according toATEX: II (1) GD, I (M1)


• 2 relay outputs, eachwith one SPDT contact



This unit does not have input circuit moni-toring. Therefore this device provides aninexpensive alternative in systems whichuse NAMUR sensors (I) or mechanicalcontacts (II).

The yellow LED indicates the status of theoutput.

<��

�

�=�

�

�

�

�

,

�� $?��#$

��?��@

��,-"�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

�,��

&&&

�

��

��

��

�?"


Type MS1-12Ex0-RIdent-no. 5311103

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mA

Output circuits 2 relay outputsContacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/60 VDCSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching capacity ≤ 1000 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz

Ex-Approval acc. to certificate of conformity DMT 01 ATEX E 119Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 11.0 V– Short-circuit current I0 55 mA– Power P0 150 mW– Safety voltage Um 250 VAC/125VDCMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/500 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 3 mH/2500 nF– [EEx ia] I 10 mH/10 µFMarking of device II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC I (M1) [EEx ia] I

LED indications– Switching status yellow

Housing 50 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSMounting panel mounting or snap-on clamps

for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)Connection 2 x 8 self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2


Isolating Switching Amplifier MS1-12Ex0-R

��

��

1








• Selectable NO/NC outputfunction of each channel


The MS1-22Ex0-R is a dual channelswitching amplifier with intrinsically safeinput circuits. They can be connected tosensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. Each output circuit has arelay with an SPDT contact.

The output function of each channel isprogrammable for normally open (NO/A)mode (link terminals) or normally closed(NC/R) mode (leave terminals open). Useterminals 11/12 to program channel 1and terminals 13/14 for channel 2.

� ��.�

� � � � �

./

� �

� �� . /

�,-

��

� �

��

;�� !��

This unit does not have input circuit moni-toring. Therefore, this device provides aninexpensive alternative in systems whichuse NAMUR sensors (I) or mechanicalcontacts (II).

The yellow LEDs indicates the status of theoutputs.

<��

�

�=�

�=�

�

�

�

�

,

�

�

�� $?��#$

��?��@

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

��

�

��

��

��,-"�

��

�

�?"

�?"

�,��







Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity DMT 01 ATEX E 119Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 11.0 V– Short-circuit current I0 55 mA– Power P0 150 mW– Safety voltage Um 250 VAC/125VDCMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0


LED indication– Switching status yellow





��

��

1



The MS1-33Ex0-R switching amplifier is a3-channel device with intrinsically safe inputcircuits. They can be connected to sensorsaccording to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),variable resistors or potential-freecontacts. All three output circuits haveindividual relays with one NO contact.

The selected output mode applies to allthree channels. Program for normallyclosed (NC/R) mode by leaving terminals15 and 16 open, or normally open (NO/A)mode by jumpering terminals 15 and 16 (I).

This unit does not have input circuit moni-toring. Therefore, this device provides aninexpensive alternative in systems whichuse NAMUR sensors or mechanicalcontacts.

The MS1-33Ex0-R switching amplifier hasan alternate configuration used to multiplyoutputs. This is achieved by connecting asingle input device to terminals 15 and 16(II). All three relay outputs will then operatein parallel according to the selected outputmode (each output is programmed bylinking the appropriate input channels).

The yellow LEDs indicate the switchingstatus of the outputs.





• 3 relay outputs, each withone NO contact



./

� ��%%��.�

� � � � �

� �� ./ . /

� ��,-

��

� � �;�� !��

�� $?��#$

��?��@

<��

�

�=�

�=�

�

�

�

�

�

�

,

��,-"�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�,��

��,-"

��,-"

�

�

�

�

&&&

�

��

��

��

� ?"�

� ?"�

� ?"��

��

�

��

��,-"� ?"

�=�

�



Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40…70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Input Circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mA

Output Circuits 3 relay outputsContacts 1 NO contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/60 VDCSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching capacity ≤ 1000 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz



LED Indications– Switching status 3 x yellow





��

��

1


Isolating SwitchingAmplifierMS1-33Ex0-T3-channel





• 3 isolated short-circuitprotected transistor outputs



The MS1-33Ex0-T switching amplifiers are3-channel devices with intrinsically safeinput circuits. They can be connected tosensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. All three output circuits areprovided with an isolated, short-circuitprotected transistor output.

The selected output mode applies to allthree channels. Program normally closedmode (NC/R) by leaving terminals 15 and16 open, or normally open mode (NO/A)by linking terminals 15 and 16 (I).

These units do not have input circuitmonitoring. Therefore these devices

provide an inexpensive alternative insystems which use NAMUR sensors ormechanical contacts.

The MS1-33Ex0-T switching amplifier hasan alternate configuration used to multiplyoutputs. This is achieved by connecting asingle input device to terminals 15 and16 (II). All three transistor outputs will thenoperate in parallel according to theselected output mode (each output isprogrammed by linking the appropriateinput channels).

The yellow LEDs indicate the switchingstatus of the outputs.

./

� ��%%��.�"

� �� ./ . /

� ��,-

� � �

� � � � �

��

�� ;�� !��

<��

�

�=�

�=�

�

,

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

��#$��

�=�

�

�

�

�

�

�,��

�

�

�

��,-"�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��,-"

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

�

��

��,-"�?"

�?"

�?"

�?"


Type MS1-33Ex0-TIdent-no. 5413103




Output circuits 3 transistor outputs,potential-free, short-circuit protected

Switching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 50 mAVoltage drop ≤ 2.5 VSwitching frequency ≤ 2 kHz







Isolating Switching Amplifier MS1-33Ex0-T

��

��

1







• Input circuit monitoringfor wire-break and short-circuit(can be disabled)

• Isolated output transistor,short-circuit and reverse polarityprotected



The MS13-11-Ex0-T switching amplifiersare single channel devices with anintrinsically safe input circuit. It can beconnected to sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), variable resistorsor potential-free contacts.The outputcircuit is provided with an isolated, short-circuit and reverse polarity protectedtransistor output.

The output is programmable for normallyopen mode (NO/A) or normally closedmode (NC/R). Install a jumper betweenterminals 11 and 12 for NO mode. Leaveterminals 11 and 12 open for NC mode.The input circuit is monitored for short-circuit and wire-break. Should an input faultoccur, the output is disabled and the greenLED turns off.

The input circuit monitoring function can bedisabled by linking terminals 13 and 14.

The green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the devices are powered. The yellowLEDs indicate the switching status of theoutputs.

If mechanical contacts are used for input,shunt resistors must be connected to thecontacts (II) or input circuit monitoringmust be disabled (III).This will prevent the switching amplifierfrom recognising the contacts as a wire-break or short-circuit.

� �%��.�"

� ��,-

./� ��

./��

!!

� � �

�

�;�� !��

<��

<��

�

�

�

�

�

,

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�=� ��#$

��

�

�

�,��

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

��

� ?"

�

��

��

��

��

��

&&&

�

�

�

<��>�


�3��





Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold Ra approx. 200 Ω

Output circuits transistor output, potential-free,short-circuit and reverse polarity protected

Switching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current per ooutput ≤ 50 mAVoltage drop ≤ 2.5 VSwitching frequency ≤ 2 kHz




LED indications– Power green– Switching status yellow





��

��

1







• Input circuit monitoringfor short-circuit and wire-break(can be disabled)


• Selectable common alarm output



Linking terminals 15 and 16 changes thefunction of one relay (terminals 8, 7, 6) toprovide a common output fault alarm (II).

The green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the devices are powered.

During an input fault, the alarm output isdisabled (relay de-energised, green LEDoff). When no faults are in any of the inputcircuits and the power is on, the alarmoutput is enabled (relay energised, greenLED on). The yellow LEDs indicate theswitching status of the outputs.

When using mechanical contacts as theinput device, the input circuit monitoringfunction must be disabled (IV), or shuntresistors (II) connected to the contacts.This will prevent the switching amplifierfrom recognising the contacts as a wire-break or a fault.

The MS13-12Ex0-R switching amplifier isa single channel device with an intrinsicallysafe input circuit. It can be connected tosensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. The output circuit has twoindependent relays, each one with anSPDT contact.

The output is programmable for normallyopen mode (NO/A) or normally closedmode (NC/R). Select NO mode byinstalling a jumper between terminals 11and 12. Leave terminals 11 and 12 openfor NC mode.

This unit provides optional wire-break andshort-circuit monitoring of the input circuit.The input circuit monitoring function isdisabled by jumpering terminals 13/14.

� ��,-

./� ��

� �%��.�

� � � � �

�� ,00

�;�� !��

<��

<��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

�,��

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

��

� ?"

�

��

��

��

��

��

&� &&&

�

��

�

��

>�

�

�

�

�

,

�

�

�� $?��#$

��?��@

=�










LED Indications– Power green– Switching status yellow





��

��

�3��


1







• Input circuit monitoring forshort-circuit and wire-break(can be disabled)

• 2 isolated, short-circuitand reverse polarity protectedtransistor outputs

• Selectable common alarm output



The MS13-12Ex0-T switching amplifier isa single channel device with an intrinsicallysafe input circuit. It can be connected tosensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. The output circuit has twoisolated, short-circuit and reverse polarityprotected transistor outputs.

The output is programmable for normallyopen mode (NO/A) or normally closedmode (NC/R). Select NO mode byinstalling a jumper between terminals 11and 12. Leave terminals 11 and 12 openfor NC mode.

This unit features wire-break and short-circuit monitoring of the input circuit.The input circuit monitoring function canbe disabled by linking terminals 13 and 14.

Linking terminals 15 and 16 changes thefunction of one relay (terminals 8, 7, 6) toprovide a common output fault alarm (II).

The green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the devices are powered. The yellowLEDs indicate the switching status of theoutputs.During an input fault, the alarm output isdisabled (transistor not conducting, greenLED off). When no faults are in any of theinput circuits and the power is on, thealarm output is enabled (transistor con-ducting, green LED on).

When using mechanical contacts as theinput device, the input circuit monitoringfunction must be disabled (IV), or shuntresistors (III) connected to the contacts.This will prevent the switching amplifierfrom recognising the contacts as a wire-break or a fault.

� ��,-

./� ��

� �%��.�"

� � � � �

�� ,00

�;�� !��

<��

<��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

�,��

��,-"

&&&

�

��

��

��

� ?"

�

��

��

��

��

��

&� &&&

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

� �

�

�

�

,

��#$��

� �

>�

&&&

�

=�







Output circuits 2 pnp transistor outputs, potential-free,short-circuit and reverse polarity protected

Switching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current per output ≤ 50 mAVoltage drop ≤ 2.5 VSwitching frequency ≤ 2 kHz



LED Indications– Power green– Switching status yellow





��

��

�3��


1







• Input circuit monitoring forshort-circuit and wire-break




The MS13-22Ex0-R is a dual channeldevice with intrinsically safe input circuits.They can be connected to sensorsaccording to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),variable resistors or potential-freecontacts. Each output circuit has one relayoutput with an SPDT contact.

The output of each channel is program-mable for normally open mode (withjumper) or normally closed mode (withoutjumper). Program channel 1 for NO/Amode with a jumper between terminals 11and 12. Leave terminals 11 and 12 openfor NC/R mode. Terminals 13 and 14perform the same functions for channel 2.


The input circuits are monitored for wire-break and short-circuit conditions. Therespective output de-energises during aninput fault condition and its correspondinggreen LED turns off.

If mechanical contacts are used as inputs,resistors must be added (II) to thecontacts. This will prevent the monitoringcircuit from recognising the mechanicalcontacts as a wire-break or short-circuit.

./

� �%��.�

� � � � � � �

� �� . /

�,-

� ��

� �;�� !��

<��

<��

�

�=�

�

�

�

�

,

�

�

�� $?��#$

��?��@

�

�

�

�

�,��

��,-"�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��,-"

�

�

� ?"

� ?"

&&&

�

��

��

��

��

��

� ?"

� ?"

�

��

� �

�=�

>� >�


�3��





Input circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020– Voltage 8 V– Current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold Ra approx. 200 Ω


Output circuits 2 relay outputs,Contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/60 VDCSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching capacity ≤ 1000 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz








��

��

1







• 2 isolated transistor outputs,short-circuit and reverse polarityprotected




The MS13-22Ex0-T switching amplifiersare dual channel devices with intrinsicallysafe input circuits. They can be connectedto sensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. Each output circuit has oneisolated, short-circuit and reverse polarityprotected transistor output.

The output of each channel is program-mable for normally open mode (withjumper) or normally closed mode (withoutjumper). Program channel 1 for NO/Amode with a jumper between terminals11 and 12. Leave terminals 11 and 12open for NC/R mode. Terminals 13 and 14perform the same functions for channel 2.


The input circuits are monitored for wire-break and short-circuit conditions. Therespective output is disabled during aninput fault condition and its correspondinggreen LED turns off.

When using mechanical contacts as theinput device, shunt resistors (II) must beconnected to the contacts. This will pre-vent the switching amplifier from recog-nising the contacts as a wire-break or fault.

./� ��

. /� �

� �%��.�"

� � � � � � ��,-

��

� �;�� !��

<��

<��

�

�

�

�

�

�,��

��,-"�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��,-"

�

�

� ?"

� ?"

&&&

�

��

��

��

��

��

� ?"

� ?"

�

��

�=�

�

�

�

�

�

� �

�

�

�

,

��#$��

�

�

�=�

� �>� >�


�3��


Type MS13-22Ex0-TIdent-no. 54 22302



Input circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold Ra approx. 200 Ω


Output circuits 2 potential-free transistor outputs,short-circuit and reverse polarity protected

Switching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current ≤ 50 mA per channelVoltage drop ≤ 2.5 VSwitching frequency ≤ 2 kHz








��

��

1



• 2-channel isolating switchingamplifier with common alarmoutput




• Input circuit monitoring forshort-circuit and wire-break(can be disabled)

• 2 relay outputs, eachwith one NO contact

• Additional common alarm output

• Selectable NO/NC outputfunction of each channel


The MS13-231Ex0-R switching amplifiersare dual channel devices with intrinsicallysafe input circuits. They can be connectedto sensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. Each channel has a relayoutput with one NO contact.

The output of each channel is program-mable for normally open mode (NO/A) ornormally closed mode (NC/R). Select NOmode by installing a jumper betweenterminals 11 and 12. Leave terminals11 and 12 open for NC mode. Terminals13 and 14 perform the same function forchannel 2.


The input circuits are monitored for wire-break and short-circuit conditions. If ashort-circuit or a wire-break occurs in oneof the input circuits, the affected output de-energises and the green LED turns off.The MS13-231Ex0-R features an addi-tional relay output for common alarmindications. If a fault occurs in one or bothinput circuits, the alarm output de-ener-gises and the green LED turns off. Thealarm output is enabled (relay energised,green LED on) if there is no fault in any ofthe input circuits and power is on.

When mechanical contacts are used asinput devices, resistors (II) must be addedto the contacts. This will prevent the moni-toring control circuit from recognising themechanical contacts as a wire-break orshort-circuit.

� �%��%��.�

./

� �

� �� . /

�,-

� �

� � � � �

��

� �;�� !��

<��

<��

�

�

�

�

�

�,��

��,-"�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��,-"

�

�

� ?"

� ?"

&&&

�

��

��

��

��

��

� ?"

� ?"

�

��

�

�

�

�

,

�

�� $?��#$

��?��@

�=�

�=�

>�


�3��



Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Input circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold Ra approx. 200 Ω


Output circuits 3 relay outputsContacts 1 NO contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/60 VDCSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching capacity ≤ 1000 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz








��

��

1








• 3 relay outputs, each withone NO contact



The MS13-33Ex0-R switching amplifieris a 3-channel device with intrinsically safeinput circuits. They can be connected tosensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. Each output circuit featuresa relay with one NO contact.

The selected output mode applies to allthree channels. Program for normallyclosed mode (NC/R) by leaving terminals15/16 open or for normally open mode(NO/A) by linking terminals 15/16.

The input circuits are individually moni-tored for wire-break and short-circuit.

The green LED on the front cover indicatesthat the devices are powered. The yellowLEDs indicate the switching status of theoutputs. The respective output turns off ina fault condition (green LED off).

When using mechanical contacts as inputdevices, resistors (II) must be added tothe contacts. This will prevent the inputmonitoring circuit from recognising themechanical contacts as a wire-break orshort-circuit.

� �%�%%��.�

� � � � � � ��,-

./� ��

./ . /� � � ��

�� ;�� !�� <��

<��

�

�=�

�=�

>�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��,-"�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��,-"

��,-"

�

�

�

� ?"

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

� ?"

&& &

�,��

�

�

�

,

�

�

�

�� $?��#$

��?��@

�=�


�3��





Input circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 4.5 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold Ra approx. 200 Ω


Output circuits 3 relay outputsContacts 1 NO contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/60 VDCSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching capacity ≤ 1000 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz








��

��

1







• 3 isolated transistor outputs,short-circuit and reversepolarity protected

• Input circuit monitoring forwire-break and short-circuit


• Universal supply voltage(20..250 VAC/20...125 VDC)

The MS13-33Ex0-T switching amplifieris a 3-channel device with intrinsicallysafe input circuits. They can be connectedto sensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR), variable resistors or potential-free contacts. Each output circuit isprovided with one isolated, short-circuitand reverse polarity protected transistoroutput.

The selected output mode applies to allthree channels. Program for normallyclosed mode (NC/R) by leaving terminals15/16 open and for normally open mode(NO/A) by linking terminals 15/16.


The input circuits are individually monito-red for wire-break and short-circuit. Theaffected output turns off during an inputfault (green LED off).

When mechanical contacts are used asinput devices, resistors (II) must be addedto the contacts. This will prevent themonitoring control circuit from recogni-sing the mechanical contacts as a wire-break or short-circuit.

� �%�%%��.�"

� � � � � � ��,-

./� ��

./ . /� � � ��

�� ;�� !��

<��

<��

�

>�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��,-"�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��,-"

��,-"

�

�

�

� ?"

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

� ?"

&& &

�,��

�=�

�=� �

�

�

�

,

�

�

�

�

��

� ��#$��

��=�


�3��





Input circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 4.5 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mAWire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mAShort-circuit threshold Ra approx. 200 Ω


Output circuits 3 transistor outputs, potential-free,short-circuit and reverse polarity protected

Switching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current ≤ 50 mAVoltage drop ≤ 2.5 VSwitching frequency ≤ 2 kHz








��

��

22


ROTATIONAL SPEEDMONITORS/MOTION

CONTROLS

ROTATIONAL SPEEDMONITORS/MOTION

CONTROLS


Rotational Speed Monitorsand Motion ControlsSelection Guide


multicart®

FunctionsRotational speed meterRotational speed monitorSlip monitorDirection discriminatorRotational speed monitor with pulse scalerPC interface cardOperating modeAnalogueDigitalFunctionUnderspeedOverspeedUnder- and overspeedSpeed range

1:5 … 3 000 min–1

1:5 … 10 000 min–1

5 … 25 000 min–1

0.06 …100 000 min–1

0.6 …100 000 min–1

0.06 …120 000 min–1

0.06 …150 000 min–1

0.06 …600 000 min–1

Galvanic isolationInput to outputOutput to supplyInput to supplyFull galvanic isolationInput circuitIntrinsically safe according to DIN 50020NAMUR sensors (EN 60947-5-6)24 VDC, pnp (non-intrinsically safe)Sensor inputInput circuit monitoringOutput CircuitRelay, SPDT per channelTransistor, pnpPulse output, pnpAlarm outputCurrent output 0/4…20 mAVoltage output 0…10 VSupply voltage 24 VDC115 VAC230 VACUniversal power supply

(20...250 VUC)(20...250 VAC/20...125 VDC)

Approved for installation in zone 2Data sheet – see page

Hou

sing

Type

MS

27-R

MS

24-1

12-R

MS

24-R

MS

22-R

i

MC

25-1

44E

x0-L

RP

MK

21-1

22E

x0-R

MK

21-1

22-R

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

2 2 1 1 2

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

7 9 11 13 15

MS

28-R

Cataloguemulticart®

MS

23-R

MS

25-U

i

MK

21-1

22E

x0-R

i

MK

21-1

22-R

i

MK

26-2

2-R

MS

21-1

2Ex0

-R

MS

23-2

2Ex0

-R

●

●

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●●●●●

2

●●●●●

●

17

●

●

●

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●●●●●

●

19

●

●

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●●●●●

●

25

●

●

●

●

●

●●●●●

●

●

●

1

●●●●●

●●●●●

27

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●●●●●

●

29

●

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

●

2

●●●●●

●

21

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

2

●●●●●

●

23

●

●

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

2

●

●●●●●

●

31

●

●

●●●●●

●

●●●●●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

●

2

●●●●●

●

33

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●●●●●

●

●

●

22●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

MC

25-1

44-L

RP

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●

●

●

22●●●●●

●●●●●

●

●●●●●

●●●●●

22


Fig. 1 Pulse-width measurement

��

��

�

Applications

In the process control industry there aremany applications requiring measurementof rotation and oscillating movements.From simple functions such as monitoringspeed of rotating shafts and gears, orsensing of turbine rotors, to entireproduction lines, rotational speed andmotion controls provide the answer.

A wide range of devices with variousfunctions are used to cover the complexityof rotational speed and motion control:

– rotational speed meters(conversion of rotational speed valuesinto proportional current or voltagesignals)

– rotational speed monitors (overspeedand underspeed detection)

– combined devices (rotational speedmonitors with analogue output forautomatic control and indicatorfunctions)

– direction discriminators(detection of motion direction)

– slip monitors(monitoring of two shafts forsynchronous operation)

Rotational speed monitors are available inmodular housings type multimodul,multisafe® or multicart®. Several deviceswith intrinsically safe input circuits areavailable for use in hazardous areas.

Principle of operation

Overspeed and underspeed monitorsoperate on a pulse-width measurement.The digital system measures the timebetween two consecutive pulses andcompares it to a defined setpoint(reference value). This enables the deviceto detect a deviation and activate theoutput after two pulse indication.

The response of devices based upon thedigital pulse principle is inherently very fast.An increase in the number of pulses perrevolution (more targets) allows for aquicker response, because the preset(pulses per minute) can be increased.

In devices with analogue output, thecalculated time between two pulseindication is directly converted into ananalogue signal. This method providesvery fast response times. If only the shaftkey is monitored and the rotation is slowbut varies, the resulting analogue signalcan have sudden changes. TURCK'srotational speed monitors use anarithmetic signal steadying method toreduce this effect.

The digital pulse-width measurement is notsuited for monitoring input frequencieswhich are close to zero speed.Nevertheless, the digital pulse-widthmeasurement is the only monitoringprinciple which provides acceptableresponse times in applications with lowspeeds.

Input sources

Non-contact proximity sensors are themost commonly used input source fordevices in this field. It is also possible touse 3-wire pnp sensors. Mechanicalcontacts should not be used due tocontact bounce and wear.

NAMUR proximity sensors (EN 60947-5-6) feature a rugged and simple 2-wiredesign with speeds up to 5 kHz. They arevery reliable and have an excellent price-performance ratio. NAMUR sensors mayalso be installed in hazardous areas whenused with an approved amplifier.

Unlike tacho-generators and conventionalrotational pulse generators, non-contactsensors require no physical connectionto the driving element in order to performmotion detection. In most cases, thespeed of a rotating machine part (i.e. shafts,gears, or cams) is monitored directly sothat special or additional control elementsor relays are not necessary.

Response time

The response time of rotational speedmonitors operating on the pulse principleis an inherent delay time, which consistsof the internal processing time of the de-vice and the pulse period duration. Deviceswith relay output have a typical responsetime of 20 ms to detect a speed deviationand activate the output. Devices withanalogue output have a typical responsetime of 100 ms to detect a speed devia-tion and provide the output signal if nosteadying method is used. The pulseperiod duration of two Pulse indication hasto be added to the a.m. time value toobtain the total response time.

If the number of targets is increased, thepulse period duration (measuring time) isshortened and thus it is possible toachieve relatively short response times inapplications with low speed.


Rotational Speed Meters/Rotational Speed Monitors

Rotational speed meters

Rotational speed meters convert themeasured speed value into a proportionaland standardised analogue current orvoltage value of 0/4...20 mA or 0...10 V.�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

!

"��#��

� �

Operation modes

If the rotational speed is within the per-missible speed range, the output isactivated (relay energised, transistorconducting). If an unacceptable deviationoccurs, the output de-activates (relay de-energised, transistor disabled).An input fault (detected by the input circuitmonitoring function) and missing supplyvoltage also lead to a shut down of theoutput.

The rotational speed monitors provide twomonitoring modes: underspeed andoverspeed monitoring. The respectivemode is either fixed or jumperprogrammable or can be adjusted whenassigning the device's parameters.

A limit value (flimit value) must be defined andset to distinguish between admissible andunacceptable speeds. A switchinghysteresis is needed to cause the rotationalspeed monitor to switch exactly at thedefined speed. Setting of the limit value andof the switching hysteresis differs betweenthe three different basic designs and can betaken from the respective data sheets.The following settings are available: speedlimit value with a fixed switching hysteresis,speed limit value and switching hysteresis(as a percentage of the limit value), switch-on and switch-off time of the output at adefined speed.

Underspeed monitoring

If the input frequency exceeds the limitvalue the system is operating correctly.

Overspeed monitoring

If the input frequency is below the presetlimit value, the system is operatingcorrectly.

�

��

��

��

��

��$

Underspeed and overspeed detection

Slip monitoring

These devices are designed to comparetwo pulse sequences (e.g. from tworotating parts on motors, gears, turbinesetc.) for slip/synchronous operation ofbelt-driven systems by means of sensorson both shafts. Slip monitors evaluate thedeviation (in percent) of both rotationalspeeds. If the deviation (slip) exceeds thedefined limit value, the output changesstate.

�

��

��

��

��

��

�� %��

Direction discriminators

Direction discriminators are used to detectforward or reverse motion of a shaft. Forthis two sensors are needed which have tobe attenuated in a pre-defined order: firstone of the sensors is damped, then bothare damped simultaneously for at least1 ms and finally the remaining sensor isattenuated.

�

�

�

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

This can be achieved by an especiallyshaped target. If the motion direction isdetected, the respective relay is energised.Further specifications can be taken fromthe data sheets.

(window function)

This mode is a combination of underspeedand overspeed monitoring. If the inputfrequency is within the defined range(window) of the setpoint, the system isoperating correctly. This mode enablesselection of several parameters which areexplained in the respective data sheets.

22


Overrange protection

Speed monitors for overrange indicationhave an integrating filter incorporated intothe input circuitry to protect against signalinterference. Any input frequencies inexcess of the upper threshold cannot beprocessed by the speed monitoring deviceand the device indicates faulty systemoperation.

Input frequencies which exceed theoperation range but are below thethreshold frequency do not generate anerror indication. Input rates in excess ofthe threshold value are not detected.

For safety reasons a speed monitor shouldonly be operated within the specifiedoperation range.

D = diameter of proximity sensorsm = tooth/gap widthd = disc diametersn = nominal sensing rangesn = recommended mounting

distanceh = tooth depth

h ≥ m withaxial mounting of sensorh ≥ 2 x sn withradial mounting of sensor

2

Fig. 3 Radial and axial mounting of a sensor

�

��

�

��

��

&

�

�'��

��

�

��%��

��(��

��

��)��%��

��%��

��

��

Signal attenuation factor (AVR)

For overspeed monitoring, some speedmonitors can be pre-programmed tosteady the signal by forming a floatingaverage from a preset adjustment factor.The floating average is formed over theadjusted number of pulses and used tocalculate the rotational speed.This signal steadying function is especiallyuseful when operating devices withanalogue output (current or voltage). Theadjusted factor should match the numberof targets per rotation.


Many rotational speed monitors featureinput circuit monitoring. If a short-circuit orwire-break condition occurs in the sensorline of the connected NAMUR sensor, therelay output of the device de-energisesand thus generates an error indication.If a 3-wire sensor is connected, it is onlypossible to monitor the current consump-tion of the sensor. If this value drops below0.2 mA, the relay is de-energised.

Start-up delay

In units designed for underspeed monito-ring, it is possible to adjust a start-updelay time during which the output relaysare forced to remain energised. Thisprevents underspeed indications andsystem shut-down during the start-upphase.The start-up time delay is triggered by apotential-free contact (auxiliary contact ofthe motor starter) or by applying powerto the device.

Start-up alarm

A start-up alarm is required in drivesystems where an increase in speed couldcause a faulty operation (e.g. variablefrequency based motors and D.C. drives).

In units designed for underspeed monito-ring, it is not critical if input signals are nottransmitted due to faulty control elements(wire-break, short-circuit or incorrectlyaligned sensors etc.). In this case theoutput relays automatically de-energise.

In units designed for overspeed monito-ring, the alarm will not be activated if thepulse indication are missing. This isespecially critical in cases of missing pulseindication as the monitoring device is notable to react and this condition wouldremain undetected for some time.

For overspeed monitoring the start-uptime delay is not required. Therefore, thestart-up time delay function of the MS24-Rdevice has been designed as a start-upalarm. This alarm is activated by means ofan auxiliary contact on the motor starter;it monitors the pulse indication andactivates the alarm relay when no pulseindication are detected.


Modification of rotational speedmonitors according to customerapplications

To achieve fast response times of themonitoring devices usually several pulsesper shaft revolution are transferred to thedevice. This method is not compatible withdevices equipped with a display for actualspeed indications. There are severalpossibilities to achieve accordance bysetting a certain factor in the multimoduland multicart® devices. Indication andadjustment of limit values will then corres-pond to the number of revolutions pershaft. When using multisafe® devices theuser must set the number of revolutionsmultiplied by the number or pulses perrotation.

Quite often display and measuring unitsother than Hz are required (e.g. min-1,a converted speed value or l/h) when usinga flow rate monitor. multimodul and multi-cart® devices with display enable pro-gramming of a conversion factor. Thusthe display and settings can be adaptedperfectly to the application.

Guidelines for rotational speedmonitoring via inductive sensors

When inductive proximity sensors are usedas input devices, the following pointsshould be observed (contact TURCK formore specific examples):

– When using mild steel targets, thesensors must be positioned at half ofthe nominal sensing range.

– The correction factors for non-ferroustargets must also be considered (seesensors catalogue).

– The target surface and the distancebetween two surfaces should not besmaller than the sensor diameter.

– In high speed applications, it isadvisable to use a larger target and toincrease the distance between thetargets (see EN 50010). The closer thesensor operates to its limit frequency,the larger the safety distance betweenthe targets and the larger the targetshould be.

– Flush and non-flush mounted sensorsrequire different targets due to theirdiffering oscillating fields. Non embed-dable (unshielded) units require largermetal-free areas around the sensingface (see sensors catalogue).

– The targets should be positionedsymmetrically to enable the speedmeter to provide a steady outputsignal. Subsequent signal steadyingmay reduce sudden signal variationsof the analogue output, but cannotcompensate this effect completely.

– Despite the shaft's bearing it canhappen that shaft play impairs rotationalspeed monitoring. Therefore it isnecessary to consider shaft play whenmounting the sensors in their twodifferent positions. (see page 2-5, fig. 3)

– In case of axial play in conjunction withan axially mounted sensor, it must beensured that the shaft cannot damagethe sensor. On the other hand caremust be taken not to increase thedistance between sensor and shaft tosuch an extent that detection isimpossible. When using a radiallymounted sensor it must be ensuredthat the target is broad enough toattenuate the sensor sufficiently inspiteof axial play. In case of radial play thesame considerations should be takeninto account, even though radial play islesser than axial play.

– When installing inductive sensors, caremust be taken that metal parts, whichare not part of the target, do not reachinto the detection range. Differentmounting distances for radially andaxially mounted sensors must beobserved.


The sensor-specific installation requirementsare listed in the according sensor catalogues(switching distance, ambient conditions etc).It is essential to meet these requirements toensure correct operation.

When laying sensor cables, it is requested toobserve the following guidelines:– the sensor cable should be routed

separately from the power cable– prevent electro-magnetic interferences– if long cables are needed, it is

recommended to use shieldedand earthed cables

– the line resistance may not exceed50 Ω (EN 60947-5-6); the maximumcable length is determined by thecable's cross-section:

R x S R = line resistance [Ω]l = S = cable cross-section

δ [mm2]

δ = resistivity[Ω x mm2/m]

l = cable length [m]

Rotational Speed MetersRotational Speed Monitors

22


Rotational SpeedMonitor MK21-122-R1-channel

• 1-channel rotational speed monitor

• Overspeed and underspeeddetection plus window function

• For use with sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),3-wire sensors and external signalsources with pulse levels 5...30 VDC

• Line monitoring of NAMURsensors

• Potential-free pulse output

• Detection range 1 mHz...10 kHz(0.06...600 000 pulses/min-1)

• Simple menu-guidedparameterisation

• Full galvanic isolation

• 2 relay outputs, each withone SPDT contact

• Universal supply voltage(20...250 VUC)

To provide fast response times for appli-cations with relatively low speed, thedevice operates on a digital pulse principle.High speed monitoring is based on a timewindow. In low-speed applications, theresponse time depends on the pulseperiod.

Device parameterisation is accomplishedwith two push buttons. The settings areindicated via the display. Both relayoutputs can be programmed separatelyfor either overspeed or underspeeddetection or a window function as acombination of both. The switchinghysteresis is defined by the adjustableswitch ON and OFF points. Further it ispossible to adjust a separate switch-offtime for each output to prevent the devicefrom shutting down due to sudden short-term changes of the frequency.

The MK21-122-R is a rotational speedmonitor designed to monitor pulse se-quences from rotating shafts on motors,gears, turbines etc., for overspeed andunderspeed conditions. A display locatedon the front cover indicates the actualspeed.

Sensors per EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),3-wire sensors or external signal sourcesmay be used for signal detection. Whenusing NAMUR sensors, line monitoring forshort-circuit and/or wire-break conditionsmaybe adjusted. If there is an error in theinput circuit, the relays de-energise and theyellow pulse LED changes to red. 3-wirepnp sensors can be powered with 12 V(≤ 20 mA) by the rotational speed monitor.External signal sources must have a signalrange from 5...30 VDC. The potential-freepulse output provides the input signal foradditional processors.

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

��

� � �

��

��

��

*�� *�� +��+�� *��

*��

,+

-

.

��/

�0

��

��

1�2�3

�

41

*� *�

�-

�.

3� 56

*��

��56

��56

7

8

+�

�

9��

��:��;��

��<�-��

�

�

0

9�8��

=

=

��

9

=

9

=�> =

��0��

>�

>1� �

>1��9

>?

>��= .@@@0��A

9

=

9��

�-��+��

� �.��AB��A

� �� .��B-��C

�

�

7

�

�


An adjustable latching function preventsthe output relay from re-energizing.

The relays operate in the normally openmode; i.e. the relay is energised if thespeed is within the acceptable range.

Output 2 may also be used exclusively asan alarm output. The relay will then onlyde-energise if there is an input circuit erroror a power failure.

In the underspeed monitoring mode, it isfurther possible to adjust a start-up timedelay (AU-time) during which the outputrelay is constantly energised.Consequently underspeed indications areinhibited during system start-up. There aretwo options: either the start-up time delayis immediately disabled upon an overrangeof the set-point or the adjusted start-uptime delay is simply a time value without asetpoint. The start-up time delay isactivated by linking terminals 7 and 8 orby applying power to the device after theterminals have been linked.

The actual speed and the limit valuesettings are displayed in Hz. By adjustinga time basis and programming the numberof pulses per rotation, it is possible toadjust all settings and the display to therequired measuring unit. Suppose, thedisplay should be in min-1 instead of Hz,the time-based factor adjustment wouldbe 60.

For low speed conditions, it is possible toadjust an input delay during whichunwanted signals (e.g. due to contactbouncing) are not evaluated.

Type MK21-122-RIdent-no. 7543055

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 2.5 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and

supply voltage for 250 Vrms,test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Rotational speed monitoring overspeed/underspeedMonitoring range/adjustable range 0.06...600 000 min-1 (digitally adjustable)Input frequency ≤ 1 200 000 min-1 (20 kHz)Pulse duration ≥ 0.02 msPulse pause ≥ 0.02 msStart-up time delay 0…1000 s (adjustable)

Input circuitsNAMUR input to EN 60947-5-6, (NAMUR)– Operating values U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching threshold 1.55 mA– Switching hysteresis 0.2 mA– Wire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mA– Short-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA3-wire sensor– Voltage 12 V– Current (sensor no-load current) ≤ 20 mAExternal signal source– 0-Signal 0...3 V– 1-Signal 5...30 V– Input resistance 26 kΩ

Output circuits two relaysRelay output 2 SPDT contacts– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Switching frequency ≤ 5 Hz– Contact material Ag-alloy + 3 µm AuPulse output– External voltage < 30 V– Current ≤ 10 mA

LED indicationsPower greenSwitching status 2 x yellowPulse indication (dual colour LED) yellow – error: redDisplay LCD-Display (four digits)


Mounting panel mounting or snap-on clampsfor top-hat rail (DIN 50022)

Connection screw terminals with self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2

with wire sleevesProtection degree (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Temperature range -25…+60 °C

Rotational Speed Monitor MK21-122-R

��

��

22


Rotational SpeedMonitorMK21-122Ex0-R1-channel






• For use with intrinsically safesensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

• Line monitoring of NAMRURsensors

• Detection range 1 mHz...10 kHz(0.06...600 000 pulses/min-1)



• 2 relay outputs, each withone SPDT contact


The MK21-122-Ex0-R is a rotationalspeed monitor designed to monitor pulsesequences from rotating shafts on motors,gears, turbines etc., for overspeed andunderspeed conditions. A display locatedon the front cover indicates the actualspeed.

Intrinsically safe sensors per EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) may be user for signaldetection. The input circuit features intrinsicsafety. Line monitoring for short-circuitand/or wire-break conditions can beadjusted.

If there is an error in the input circuit, therelays de-energise and the yellow pulseLED changes to red.

To provide fast response times for appli-cations with relatively low speed, the

device operates on a digital pulse principle.High speed monitoring is based on a time window. In low-speed applications, theresponse time depends on the pulseperiod.

Device parameterisation is accomplishedwith two push buttons. The settings areindicated via the display.

Both relay outputs can be programmedseparately for either overspeed orunderspeed detection or a windowfunction as a combination of both. Theswitching hysteresis is defined by theadjustable switch ON and OFF points.Further it is possible to adjust a separateswitch-off time for each output to preventthe device from shutting down due tosudden short-term changes of thefrequency.

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

� � �

��

��

��

* ��* ��+� ��+��*��*��

-

.

1�2�3

*��

7

8

9��

9�8��

=

=>�

>1

,+

��/

�0

��

��

�

41

*� *�

�-

�.

3� 56

��56

��56

+ �

�

��:��;��

��<�-�� +� ��

��.��AB��A

��.��B-��C


Type MK21-122Ex0-RIdent-no. 7543054

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC / 20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 2.5 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and


Rotational speed monitoring underspeed/overspeedMonitoring range/adjustable range 0.06...600 000 min-1 (digitally adjustable)– Input frequency ≤ 1 200 000 min-1 (20 kHz)Pulse duration ≥ 0.02 msPulse pause ≥ 0.02 msStart-up time delay 0…1000 s (adjustable)

Input circuitsNAMUR input to EN 60947-5-6, (NAMUR)– Operating values U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching threshold 1.55 mA– Switching hysteresis 0.2 mA– Wire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mA– Short-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA

Ex approval acc. to certificate of conformity/ PTB 97 ATEX 2240 /Statement of conformity TURCK Ex-06006M XMax. values– No-load voltage U0 13 V– Short-circuit current I0 30 mA– Safety voltage Um 250 VAC/125 VDCMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 40 mH/1 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 150 mH/6.2 µF– Ex nL IIC 80 mH/6 µF– Ex nL IIB 300 mH/52 µFMarking of the device II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Output circuits two relaysRelay output 2 SPDT contacts– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Swichting capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Switching frequency ≤ 5 Hz– Contact material Ag-alloy + 3 µm Au






An adjustable latching function preventsthe output relay from re-energising.

The relays operate in the normally openmode; i.e. the relay is energised if thespeed is within the acceptable range.

Additionally, output 2 may be usedexclusively as an alarm output. The relaywill then only de-energise if there is aninput circuit error or a power failure.

It is further possible to adjust a start-uptime delay (AU-time) during which theoutput relay is constantly energised.Consequently underspeed indications areinhibited during system start-up. There aretwo options: either the start-up time delayis immediately disabled upon an overrangeof the set-point or the adjusted start-uptime delay is simply a time value without asetpoint. The start-up time delay is acti-vated by linking intrinsically safe terminals7 and 8 or by applying power to thedevice after the terminals have been linked.


For low speed conditions, it is possible toadjust an input delay during whichunwanted signals (e.g. due to contactbouncing) are not evaluated.

Rotational Speed Monitor MK21-122Ex0-R

!

��

22


• 1-channel rotational speed monitorwith frequency-current converter


• For use with sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), 3-wiresensors and external signal sourceswith a pulse level 5...30 VDC

• Line monitoring of NAMRURsensors

• Detection range 1 mHz...10 kHz(0.06...600 000 pulses/min1)



• Relay output withone SPDT contact

• Analogue current output:0...20 mA / 4...20 mA

• Potential-free pulse output


The MK21-122-Ri is a rotational speedmonitor designed to monitor pulsesequences from rotating shafts on motors,gears, turbines etc., for overspeed andunderspeed conditions relative to pre-adjusted limit values. The analogue outputprovides a current signal proportional tothe rotational speed for further processing.A display located on the front coverindicates the actual speed.

Sensors per EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),3-wire sensors or external signal sourcesmay be used for signal detection. Linemonitoring for short-circuit and/or wire-break conditions can be adjusted whenusing NAMUR sensors. If there is an errorin the input circuit, the relay de-energises,the analogue outputs goes to either 0 mAor 24 mA (depending on setting) and theyellow pulse LED changes to red. 3-wirepnp sensors can be powered with 12 V

(≤ 20 mA) by the rotational speed monitor.External signal sources must have a signalrange from 5...30 VDC. The potential-freepulse output provides the input signal foradditional processors.

To provide fast response times for appli-cations with relatively low speed, thedevice operates on a digital pulse principle.High speed monitoring is based on a timewindow. In low-speed applications, theresponse time depends on the pulseperiod.

Device parameterisation is accomplishedwith two push buttons. The settings areindicated via the display. The relay outputcan be programmed for overspeed orunderspeed detection, or a windowfunction, or a combination of both. Theswitching hysteresis is defined by theadjustable switch ON and OFF points.

Rotational SpeedMonitor withFrequency-CurrentConverterMK21-122-Ri1-channel

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

��

� � �

��

��

��

* ��+� ��+��

>��*�

>��*�

,+

-

.

��

��

1�2�3

41

*� *�

�-

�.

3� 56

*��

��56

7

8

+ �

9��

��:��;��

��<�-��

�

�

0

9�8��

=

=

��

9

=

9

=�> =

>�

>1�

>1��9

>?

>��= .@@@0��A

9

=

�-��

=��0

9�/

9��

+� ��

��.��AB��A

��.��B-��C

�

�

�

�

�

�

7

�B�@@@��3D��.��

��0��


The relay operates in the normally openmode; i.e. the relay is energised if thespeed is within the acceptable range.The relay may also be used as an alarmoutput. The relay will then de-energise ifthere is an input circuit error or a powerfailure.

In the underspeed monitoring mode, it ispossible to adjust a start-up time delay(AU-time) during which the output relay isconstantly energised. Consequentlyunderspeed indications are inhibited duringsystem start-up. The start-up time delay isactivated by linking terminals 7 and 8 orby applying power to the device after theterminals have been linked.

The upper und lower range value can befreely adjusted. Within the measuringrange (selectable ranges 0...20 mA or4...20 mA), the frequency is convertedlinearly into a current value. A dampingtime, during which the current outputfollows a change of frequency with adefined delay, is adjustable.

The actual speed and the limit valuesettings are displayed in Hz. By adjustinga time basis and programming the numberof pulses per rotation, it is possible toadjust all settings and the display to therequired measuirng unit. Suppose, thedisplay should be in min-1 instead of Hz,the time-based factor adjustment wouldbe 60.

Type MK21-122-RiIdent-no. 7543056

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 2.5 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and


Rotational speed monitoring underspeed/overspeedMonitoring range/adjustable range 0.06...600 000 min-1 (digitally adjustable)– Input frequency ≤ 1 200 000 min-1 (20 kHz)Pulse duration ≥ 0.02 msPulse pause ≥ 0.02 msStart-up time delay 0…1000 s (adjustable)

Input circuitsNAMUR input to EN 60947-5-6, (NAMUR)– Operating values U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching threshold 1.55 mA– Switching hysteresis 0.2 mA– Wire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mA– Short-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA3-wire sensor– Voltage 12 V– Current (sensor no-load current) ≤ 20 mAExternal signal source– 0-Signal 0...3 V– 1-Signal 5...30 V– Input resistance 26 kΩ

Output circuits 1 relayRelay output 1 SPDT contact– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Switching frequency ≤ 5 Hz– Contact material Ag-alloy + 3 µm AuAnalogue output– Current source 0/4...20 mA– Load ≤ 500 ΩPulse output– External voltage < 30 V– Current ≤ 10 mA






Rotational Speed Monitor MK21-122-Ri

!

��

22


• 1-channel rotational speed monitorwith frequency-current converter





• For use with intrinsicallysensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

• Line monitoring of NAMURsensors

• Detection range 1 mHz...10 kHz(0.06...600 000 pulses/min1)



• Relay output withone SPDT contact

• Analogue current output:0...20 mA / 4...20 mA


The MK21-122Ex0-Ri is a rotational speedmonitor designed to monitor pulsesequences from rotating shafts on motors,gears, turbines etc., for overspeed andunderspeed conditions relative to pre-adjusted limit values. The analogue outputprovides a current signal proportional tothe rotational speed for further processing.A display located on the front coverindicates the actual speed.

Intrinsically safe sensors per EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) may be used for signaldetection. The input circuit features intrinsicsafety. Line monitoring for short-circuitand/or wire-break conditions can beadjusted. If there is an error in the inputcircuit, the relay de-energises, the analogueoutputs changes to either 0 mA or 24 mA(depending on setting) and the yellowpulse LED changes to red.

To provide fast response times for appli-cations with relatively low speed, thedevice operates on a digital pulse principle.High speed monitoring is based on a timewindow. In low-speed applications, theresponse time depends fully on the pulseperiod.

Device parameterisation is accomplishedwith two push buttons. The settings areindicated via the display.

The relay output can be programmedeither for overspeed or underspeeddetection or a window function as acombination of both. The switchinghysteresis is defined by the adjustableswitch ON and switch OFF points.

Rotational SpeedMonitor withFrequency-CurrentConverterMK21-122Ex0-Ri1-channel

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

� � �

��

��

��

* ��+��+� ��

>��*�>��*�

-

.

1�2�3

*��

7

8

9

9�8��

=

=>�

>1

,+ ��

��

41

*� *�

�-

�.

3� 56

��56

+ �

��:��;��

��<�-��

=��0

9�/

��.��AB��A

��.��B-��C

+� ��

�

�

�B�@@@��3D��.��


The relay operates in the normally openmode; i.e. the relay is energised if thespeed is within the acceptable range.The relay may also be used as an alarmoutput. The relay will then de-energise ifthere is an input circuit error or a powerfailure.

In the underspeed monitoring mode, it ispossible to adjust a start-up time delay(AU-time) during which the output relay isconstantly energised. Consequentlyunderspeed indications are inhibited duringsystem start-up. The start-up time delay isactivated by linking intrinsically safeterminals 7 and 8 or by applying power tothe device after the terminals have beenlinked.

The upper und lower range value can befreely adjusted. Within the measuringrange (selectable ranges 0...20 mA or4...20 mA), the frequency is convertedlinearly into a current value. A dampingtime, during which the current outputfollows a change of frequency with adefined delay, is adjustable.


Type MK21-122Ex0-RiIdent-no. 7543053

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC / 20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 2.5 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply

voltage for 250 Vrms, test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Rotational speed monitoring underspeed/overspeedMonitoring range/adjustable range 0.06...600 000 min-1 (digitally adjustable)Input frequency ≤ 1 200 000 min-1 (20 kHz)Pulse duration ≥ 0.02 msPulse pause ≥ 0.02 msStart-up time delay 0…1000 s (adjustable)

Input circuitsNAMUR input to EN 60947-5-6, (NAMUR)– Operating values U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching threshold 1.55 mA– Switching hysteresis 0.2 mA– Wire-break threshold ≤ 0.1 mA– Short-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA

Ex approval acc. to certificate of conformity/ PTB 97 ATEX 2240 /Statement of conformity TURCK Ex-06006M XMax. values– No-load voltage U0 13 V– Short-circuit current I0 30 mA– Safety voltage Um 250 VAC/125 VDCMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 40 mH/1 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 150 mH/6.2 µF– Ex nL IIC 80 mH/6 µF– Ex nL IIB 300 mH/52 µFMarking of the device II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Output circuitsRelay output 1 SPDT contact– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Switching frequency ≤ 5 Hz– Contact material Ag-alloy + 3 µm AuAnalogue output– Current source 0/4...20 mA– Load ≤ 500 W






Rotational Speed Monitor MK21-122Ex0-Ri

!

��

22


Slip MonitorMK26-22-R/24VDCMK26-22-R/230VAC1-channel

• 1-channel slip monitor

• Rotational speed monitoringof two rotating parts for slip/synchronous operation

• For use with sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

• Operating range up to 150 000 min-1

• Detection range 3...30 % slip

• Simple parameterisation:– Two independent switch

points (limit values)– Setting of limit values in %– Selectable NO/NC relay

output functions– Start-up time delay– Signal steadying (average

forming)


• 2 relay outputs, each with oneSPDT contact

The MK26-22-R is a rotational speedmonitor designed to compare two pulsesequences (e.g. from two rotating partson motors, gears, turbines etc.) and tomonitor these sequences for slip/synchro-nous operation. This makes the deviceespecially suitable for belt-drive and con-veyor belt monitoring.To monitor slip, i.e the difference betweenthe two rotational speeds, two indepen-

Both limit value relays S1 and S2 are moni-tored by a separate dual colour LED.An illuminated yellow LED indicates thatthe respective relay is energised.The two NAMUR inputs are monitored forwire-break and short-circuit. If the NCmode has been selected and a fault in theinput circuit occurs, both limit value relaysde-energise; in the NO mode both relaysenergise for approx. 20 ms. Insufficientsupply voltage during operation is alsoindicated by a short activation of the relaysfor 20 ms.

A fault in the input circuit (I) is indicated bythe illuminated red LED of limit value relayS1; a fault in the input circuit (II) by the redLED of relay S2.

dent limit values can be adjusted.Thus onerelay output can be used for alarm indica-tions and the other relay output for shut-down functions.Each limit value can be adjusted separatelyvia a rotary switch in a range of 3...30 % inten steps.

The device provides selectable outputfunctions of the limit value relays to matchthe individual application. The limit valuerelays can be programmed for normallyopen mode (system working correctly:relays de-energised) or for normally closedmode (system working correctly: relaysenergised). Linking terminals 4/8 selectsthe NO mode while leaving them openprovides the NC mode. The green LEDindicates that the devices are powered.

� ��

��

��

� ��

� ��

�

��

��

98��

:��;�.��<�-��

:��;�.��<�-��

�+

/

��

�0

��

��

��

�

.

�

-

0

7

�

8

�.

�-

98��A

�AE�AF

*�

*�

9BG=BG

+� ��

�

��

��

3

��

��

56

56

41

3�

3�

�

��.��AB��A

��.��B-��C

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

�!�"�

��#$%

�

��

� ��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

� � ��

��

�

��

��

��

� +��6�+��6��"��#��

D��"��

D��"��

*��$��

+� ��


Type Ident-no. Supply voltage UB Line frequency Ripple WPP Power consumption

MK26-22-R/230VAC 7543501 184 ... 264 VAC 48…62 Hz – ≤ 5 VAMK26-22-R/24VDC 7543503 19.2 ... 28.8 VDC – ≤ 10 % ≤ 5 W

Slip monitoringMonitoring range 0.06...150 000 min-1

– Input frequency ≤ 300 000 min-1 (5 kHz)Pause duration ≥ 0.1 msPulse duration ≥ 0.1 msStart-up time delay 0.1…30 s (adjustable)

Input circuitsNAMUR input according to EN 60947-5-6, terminals 5/6– Operating characteristics U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching threshold 1.55 mA– Switching hysteresis 0.2 mA– Wire-break trip point ≤ 0.1 mA– Short-circuit trip point ≥ 6 mA

Galvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit andsupply voltage for 250 Vrms,test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Output circuits 2 relay outputsRelay output 2 SPDT contacts– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Contact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

LED indications– Power green– Status indication/fault indication yellow/red (two 2-colour LEDs)





multimodul Slip Monitor MK26-22-R

A green LED indicates that the device ispowered.

A floating average can be formed tosteady the input signals of both inputs.This is especially important if more thanone target per revolution is to be moni-tored. Via the rotary switch AVR up to tencycles can be adjusted to form theaverage.

For the start-up phase of the drive astart-up time delay between 0.3...30 s canbe selected in ten steps using theaccording rotary switch. In the NC modethe output relays are energised during theselected start-up delay time to preventsystem shut-down due to an underspeedindication.

The start-up time delay can be activatedby a potential-free NO contact or byapplying supply voltage (terminals 3 and7 linked).

In the NO mode, the relays remain de-energised during system start-up.

During normal operation, the frequency ofthe pulse sequences of the sensors mustbe identical. If shafts with differentrotational speeds are monitored, it isrequired to use an appropriate number oftargets to generate an identical frequency.

!

��

Slip Monitor MK26-22-R

22



• Overspeed or underspeeddetection



• For use with NAMUR sensors(EN 60947-5-6)

• Detection range from5…25 000 min-1

(six overlapping ranges)

• Adjustable start-up time delay

• Overrange of up to 60 000 min-1

• Galvanic isolation betweeninput circuit, output circuitand power supply

• Relay output with twoSPDT contacts


The MS21-12Ex0-R is a single channelrotational speed monitor with an intrinsi-cally safe input circuit. It has one relayoutput with two SPDT contacts.

The device monitors for overspeed whenterminals 11 and 12 are jumpered; itmonitors for underspeed when terminals11 and 12 are open.

The device has six overlapping measuringranges. The range selection is the productof the front panel switch and potentio-meter settings.

The unit operates on the digital pulseprinciple. This method provides a fastresponse and is ideal for applications withrelatively low speed. A yellow LEDindicates the status of the output relay.

Start-up time delay (AU time) from 0...60seconds may be adjusted via a poten-tiometer which is accesible after removingthe black front cover. The time delayinhibits speed monitoring and alarmindications during system start-up.The start-up time delay is enabled undertwo conditions:

● when using a potential-free N.C.contact between terminals 15 and 16.

● if terminals 15 and 16 are open whenpower is applied to terminals 1 and 2.

During the start-up time delay, the outputrelays will be energised if terminals 13/14are open and de-energised if they arelinked.

The switching hysteresis and the start-uptime delay are adjusted by means of apotentiometer inside the device which isaccessed by removal of the front cover.

Rotational SpeedMonitorMS21-12Ex0-R1-channel

� � � � � �

�� &'

�

�

��

�

(�#)�*+,�� '�

�

&' &'& '

��

�

� �, %�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

* ��

2��

D��"��

�

�

98��

0

�

.

-

7

8

��

��

�0

��

�.

�-

E=F

H

98��

��%��

�

�

�

�.�..��.�.��.��

&&&&&&I��@�$��J

� ��

H

-

/

��

1�2�3

+� ��

��

/

��

��

��

�.

�-

�0

��

� �

H

56

��.��AB-��A

��B0��CK��

*��





Function overspeed/underspeedSpeed range 5…25 000 pulses/min-1 (6 subranges)– Range 1 5…50 pulses/min-1

– Range 2 25…250 pulses/min-1

– Range 3 50…500 pulses/min-1

– Range 4 250…2 500 pulses/min-1

– Range 5 500…5 000 pulses/min-1

– Range 6 2 500…25 000 pulses/min-1

Minimum pulse duration ≥ 0.5 msMinimum pause duration ≥ 0.5 msHysteresis 2…20 % (adjustable, preset at 5 %)Start-up time delay 0…60 s (adjustable, preset at 15 s)Repeatability ≤ 1 % (Ta constant temperature)

Input circuits EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according EN 50020Operating characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mA

Output circuits relay outputNumber of contacts 2 SPDT contacts, AgCdOSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/60 VDCSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching capacity ≤ 1000 VA/30 W






with wire sleevesProtection type (IEC 529/DIN 40050-9) IP 20Operating temperature -25…+60 °C

Rotational Speed Monitor MS21-12Ex0-R

'(

��(�

22


In addition to the relay output, the rota-tional speed monitor MS22-Ri features ananalogue output of 0/4 to 20 mA.3-wire pnp sensors, sensors according toEN 60947-5-6 or signals between 10 and30 VDC may be connected.If connected to NAMUR sensors, the inputcontrol circuit is monitored for both wire-break and short-circuit conditions. When afault occurs, the dual colour LED, indicatingoperational readiness, changes from greento red and the output relay de-energisesindependently of the programmedmonitoring mode.

Rotational SpeedMonitor MS22-Riwith Analogue Output1-channel

• 1-channel rotational speed monitorwith analogue output


• For use with sensors conformingto EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) withinput circuit monitoring, 3-wire pnpsensors and signal sources withpulse levels from 10...30 VDC

• Additional analogue output0…20 mA or 4…20 mA

• Detection range from0.01...1 660 Hz(0.6...100 000 pulses/min-1)

• Digitally adjustable setpointsin Hz or pulses/min-1

• Excellent temperaturestability and linearity

• Optional start-up time delay

• Relay output with one SPDTcontact

• Sealed relay with hardgold-plated contacts


The yellow input LED enables distinctionbetween wire-break and short-circuit(wire-break: LED off). In case of an error,the output current will go to 0. Thus faultconditions can be detected in subsequentprocessing or display devices.

If 3-wire sensors are used, wire-breakdetection applies only to the supply line.Wire-break or short-circuit on the outputline of the sensor are not detected.If external sources are connected,terminals 11 and 9 should be used.Supression of fault signals can be

�0��=�9

9�7=�8

��E1AF�.1�2�3

2?�0$+$6&�

��=��9/

E9F��E$F��

0�

2*�@@@

�-�.��0

-.

78

>�>1

I�)��

6&��#��"��#��)��

��

� � � � � �

��

��

��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

� ��

��

��

� � ��

��

��"�

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

)�*+,�� !�

�"

��

�-�

� &� �

&

� �, %�

+� ��+��

* ��

*��$�$��

��*��#��

2��D��"��

�

�

0

�

.

-

7�=

8�9

9��.��

9��.��

�

56

E=F

��:��;��

��:��;�.��<�-��

+� ��

/

��

��

��

�0

��

�-

�.�L

1�2�3>��/=

>1��9

��

>��

�>?�/

>1��

��

�0

��

�0

��

��

,+

D�"��)��

�

41

3�+ �

56

��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

� ��

��

��

� � ��

��

��"�

��

�

��

��

��

��

)�*+,�� !�

��

�-�

� �

�B�@@@��

��.��A��.��B-��C��

L+��Overspeed


accomplished with a 1...10 kΩ resistorbetween terminals 10 and 11.Leaving terminals 12/13 open activatesthe underspeed monitoring mode: whenthe limit value is underranged, the relay de-energises.

Linking terminals 12/13 selects the over-speed monitoring mode; when the limitvalue is exceeded the relay de-energises.

The device operates on the digital pulsemethod which shortens reaction times inapplications where pulses occur infrequen-tly. A standard analogue output signal,which is proportional to the measuredrotational speed, is provided additionallyfor control and monitoring purposes.By linking terminals 13/14, the analoguesignal can be changed from 0…20 mA to4…20 mA.

The upper end value of the measuringrange is adjusted digitally using threerotary switches on the device front andassigned to an analogue output value of20 mA. Below 0.6 min-1 the output currentadopts the value 0/4 mA. Within theselected measuring range, the switch pointis adjustable as a percentage between10 and 100 % of the upper end value bymeans of an additional rotary switch. Theoutput relay status is indicated by a yellowLED.

In the underspeed monitoring mode, afixed start-up time delay (AU-time) of15 s is provided. The output relay is ener-gised during the start-up time delay.Consequently underspeed indications areinhibited during system start-up.The time delay is activated by a potential-free contact between terminals 15/16when the device is on, or by linkingterminals 15/16 and then applying powerto the device.

Type MS22-RiIdent-no. 0508010

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation input circuit to output circuit and

supply voltage for 250 Vrms

test voltage 2,5 kVrms

Rotational speed monitoring overspeed/underspeedMeasuring range 0.01...1660 Hz or 0.6...100 000 min-1

Switch point adjustment range 10…100 %Input frequency ≤ 150 000 min-1

Pause duration ≥ 0.2 msPulse duration ≥ 0.2 msHysteresis approx. 10 %Start-up time delay 0.5…30 s (adjustable, 10 positions)Temperature drift frequency ≤ 0.005 %/KTemperature drift analogue output ≤ 0.005 %/KLinearity error ≤ 0.1 % v.E.

Clearences and creepage distances– Input and output circuit to power supply ≥ 4 mm– Input circuit to power supply ≥ 4 mm

Input circuits NAMUR/3-wire, pnpNAMUR input according to EN 60947-5-6, terminals 9/10– Operating characteristics U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching thresholds 1.4 mA ≤ Ie ≤ 1.8 mA– Wire-break trip point ≤ 0.15 mA– Short-circuit trip point ≥ 6 mA3-wire input pnp, terminals 9…11– Operating characteristics U ≤ 15 V; I ≤ 30 mA– "OFF"signal 0…5 VDC– "ON" signal 10…30 VDC

Output circuits 1 relay output and 1 analogue outputRelay output 1 SPDT contact– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Contact material silver-alloy + 3 µm AuAnalogue output– Current source 0/4…20 mA (load ≤ 600 Ω)

LED indications– Power/Fault indication green/red (2-colour LED)– Switching status yellow– Pulse monitoring yellow




Rotational Speed Monitor MS22-Ri

'(

��(�

22


Direction DiscriminatorMS23-R1-channel

• 1-channel direction discriminator

• Underspeed monitoring

• For use with sensors conformingto EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR),3-wire pnp sensors and signalsources with pulse levels from10...30 VDC

• Adjustable switch-off delay


• 2 sealed relays with hardgold plated contacts


The MS23-R direction discriminatorsaccommodates NAMUR sensorsaccording to EN 60947-5-6, 3-wire pnpsensors or other voltage sources withpulse levels between 10 and 30 VDC.The device is used to determine forward orreverse rotation of a system.

A potentiometer (AV) located on the frontcover of the housing serves to adjust theswitch-off time delay (0.1...30 s).The output relay energised last will staypermanently energised during the adjustedtime delay. If the pulse indication cease, therelays will de-energise after the time delay.The adjustable switch off delay also allowsto blank out short periods of suddenlymissing Pulse indication.

If terminals 12/13 are linked (Mem.), theswitch-off delay is disabled. In this mode,the relays retain their switching status untilthe direction of rotation changes.

This device should not be used in safetyapplications where accurate zero speeddetection is required.

�

�

0

�

.

-

7

8

9��.��

9��.��

56

E=F+� ��/

��

�0

>1�.9

��

1�2�3>��/=

>1��9

��

>��

�>?�/

>1��

��

�A

��

41

56

+ �

�� 1�2�3

>?��-

�>��

>1�.

�-

56

56

�

��"�

��

��

��

��

2��@

>��-=

��.��AB��A

��.��B-��C

��

�

��"�

��

��

��

��

� � � � �

�� & &

�� , %�

��

�#!�

+� ��

+��

��

* ��$�##��

The direction of rotation is obtained byevaluating the attenuation sequence andthe overlap from the two sensor signals.The target used must be suitable for simul-taneous damping of both sensors for aperiod of at least 1 ms.

One output relay with SPDT contacts willenergise in the forward direction; the otherrelay will energise in the reverse direction.Each output has a yellow LED for statusindications.

Leaving terminals 12/13 (Mem.) openactivates the switch-off delay. The adjus-table switch off delay function enablesmonitoring of the time interval betweenthe pulse indication and detection of anunder-speed condition.


Type MS23-RIdent-no. 0508112

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Clearences and creepage distances– Input circuit to output circuit ≥ 4 mm– Input circuit to power supply ≥ 4 mm

Rotational speed monitoring forward and reverse directions, underspeedInput frequency ≤ 150 000 min-1

Pause duration ≥ 0.2 msPulse duration ≥ 0.2 msHysteresis approx. 10 %Switch off delay 0.1…30 s (adjustable)Repeat accuracy ± 0.5 %Temperature drift ≤ 0.020 %/K

Input circuits NAMUR/3-wire, pnpNAMUR input according to EN 60947-5-6, terminals 9/10; 15/16– Operating characteristics

Voltage 8.2 VCurrent 8.2 mA

– Switching threshold 1.4 mA ≤ Ie ≤ 1.8 mA3-wire input pnp, terminals 9…11;14...16– Operating characteristics

Voltage 15 VDCCurrent ≤ 15 mA

– "ON" signal 0…5 VDC– "OFF" signal 10...30 VDC

Output circuits 2 relay outputsRelay output– Number of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W

LED indications– Power green– Direction indication (forward or reverse motion) yellow– Pulse indication yellow




Direction Discriminator MS23-R

'(

��(�

22


• 1-channel direction discriminator

• Intrinsically-safe input circuitEEx ia


• For use with sensors conformingto EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)


• Direction detection in eitherdirection

• Input circuit monitoring forwire-break and short-circuit



Direction DiscriminatorMS23-22Ex0-R1-channel

�8��

1�2�3

�

0

�

.

-

7

8

/

��

��

��

9

=

9

= E=F

1�2�3

98��9

=

� �.�

�

�

�

�

�:�;��<-��

H

MA

?

MA

?3

H

�:�;��<-��

��

+� ��

�

�

56

56

�

��.��AB-��A

��B0��C

�

The MS23-22Ex0-R direction discrimi-nator features an intrinsically safe inputcircuit. It provides two relay outputs, eachwith one SPDT contact.

The MS23-22Ex0-R uses two sensors todetermine forward or reverse direction of asystem. One output relay will energize inthe forward direction; the other relay willenergize in the reverse direction. Eachoutput has a yellow LED that turns onwhen the output is energised. At zerospeed both relays are de-energised.

The direction discriminator receives inputpulses from sensors according to EN60947-5-6 (NAMUR). Both input circuitsare monitored for wire-break and short-circuit. In case of a fault condition, bothoutput relays de-energize automatically.

The direction of rotation is obtained byevaluating the sequence and the overlapfrom the two sensor signals. The targetused must be suitable for simultaneousdamping of both sensors for a period of atleast 1 ms.

A potentiometer located on the front coverof the housing serves to adjust the timedelay (1...15 s) between consecutiveinputs pulse sequences.

��

� ��

��

�

�

��+

��

�"�

& ' &'

�, %�

* ��

N��


Direction Discriminator MS23-22Ex0-R




Direction discrimination both directionsInput pulse overlap ≥ 1 msTime limit for input pulse sequence 1...15 s (adjustable)

Input circuits accor. to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe per EN 50020Operating charcteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 8 mASwitching threshold 1,55 mAHysteresis 0,2 mA

Output circuits 2 relais outputsNumber of contacts 1 SPDT contact, AgCdOSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/60 VDCSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching caoacity ≤ 1000 VA/30 W






with wire sleevesProtection type (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature -25…+60 °C

'(

��(�

22


Rotational SpeedMonitor MS24-R1-channel

short-circuit conditions. During a mal-function the dual colour „Power“ LEDchanges from green to red and the outputrelay (3...5) as well as the limit value relay(6...8) de-energise independently of theselected monitoring mode.

The yellow LED for the Pulse indicationenables distinction between a wire-breakand a short-circuit condition (wire-break:LED turns off).




• Detection range from0.01...1 660 Hz or0.6...100 000 min-1

• Digital adjustment ofsetpoints in Hz or min-1


• Adjustable start-up time delay inthe underspeed monitoring mode

• Optional dynamic input alarm inthe overspeed monitoring mode

• 1 setpoint relay, 1 alarm relay

• Sealed relays with hard goldplated contacts


The MS24-R are rotational underspeed/overspeed monitors designed to monitorpulse sequences for overspeed andunderspeed. Limit value adjustments are

determined via four rotary switches on thefront of the device. To provide optimumresponse times for applications withrelatively low speeds the device operateson the digital pulse principle.

The device accommodates NAMUR sen-sors according to EN 60947-5-6, 3-wirepnp sensors or other voltage sources withpulse levels between 10 and 30 VDC. Ifconnected to NAMUR (I) sensors, the inputcircuit is monitored for wire-break and

�0��=�9

9�7=�8

��E1AF�.1�2�3

2?�0$+$6&�

��=��9/

E9F��E$F��

0�

2*�@@@

�-�.��0

-.

78

>�>1

I�)��

6&��#��"��#��)��

� � � � � � �

��

��

��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

��

&

��"�

��

��

�"

��

��

��

��

�

)�*+,�� !�

�� , %�

+��+� ��

��*��+��#��* ��

*��

*��$��*��$��

�

�

!

!

"

#

8

,��!��

,��!��

-.

/01

/,1

/01

"2� 3��#

"2� 3��#4�"��#

�5

�

�

��

��

�!

��

��#�

�#��

��

""""""

��

��

��

��

��

�!

��

�!

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

$�� %

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

� �� #�� &�

� �#� � ��#��

�� Overspeed



Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzCurrent consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply


Rotational speed monitoring overspeed/underspeedSpeed range 0.01...1660 Hz or 0.6...100 000 min-1

Input frequency ≤ 150 000 min-1

Pause duration ≥ 0.2 msPulse duration ≥ 0.2 msHysteresis approx. 10 %Start-up time delay/dyn. input alarm 0.5…30 s (in 10 increments)Temperature drift ≤ 0.005 %/KRepeat accuracy ≤ 0.1 %


Input circuits NAMUR/3-wire, pnpNAMUR input according to EN 60947-5-6, terminals 9/10– Operating characteristics U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching thresholds 1.4 mA ≤ Ie ≤ 1.8 mA– Wire-break trip point ≤ 0.15 mA– Short-circuit trip point ≥ 6 mA3-wire input pnp, terminals 9…11– Operating characteristics U ≤ 15 V; I ≤ 30 mA– "ON" signal 0…5 VDC– "OFF" signal 10…30 VDC

Output circuits 2 relay outputs and pulse outputRelay outputs each with 1 SPDT contact– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Contact material silver-alloy + 3 µm AuPulse output (terminal 12) 14 V/10 mA, short-circuit protected

LED indications– Power/Fault indication green/red (2-colour LED)– Status indication yellow– Pulse indication yellow




With 3-wire sensors as input devices, thepower supply lines are monitored for wire-break only. Wire-break or short-circuitconditions on the output of the sensorare not detected.

Terminals 11 and 9 are the inputs forexternal signal sources (III). A 1...10 kΩresistor must be connected betweenterminals 10 and 11 to disable wire-breakmonitoring.

Overspeed detection is selected whenterminals 13/14 are linked. If the speed isbelow the limit value, the limit value relayde-energises. The device is programmedfor underspeed when terminals 13 and 14are left open. If the speed exceeds the limitvalue, the limit value relay de-energises.A yellow LED indicates the status of theoutput relay.

For underspeed monitoring, a built-in start-up time delay (AU) is available. During thestart-up time delay, the output relay will beenergised to prevent that the system isbrought to a stop when the input rate isless than the preset limit value. The start-up time delay is triggered under twoconditions: upon connection of a potential-free contact between terminals 15 and 16while the device is powered; or by linkingterminals 15 and 16 first and then applyingpower to the device.

For overspeed monitoring, a dynamic inputalarm is available that reacts immediatelywhen pulse indication are missing. Avariable time delay is set that activateswith every incoming pulse. If no pulses arereceived during the preset time, the limitvalue and alarm relays de-energise. Thereare two ways of activating the dynamicinput monitoring feature: upon connectionof a potential-free contact betweenterminals 15 and 16 while the device ispowered; or by linking terminals 15 and 16first and then applying power to thedevice.

Rotational Speed Monitor MS24-R

�(

��(�

22


Rotational SpeedMonitor MS24-112-R1-channel


• Overspeed or underspeed detection


• Relay output with one SPDT contact

• Monitoring ranges from1.5...3000 min-1 (3 ranges)

• Optional start-up time delay

• Sealed relay with hard goldplated contacts


The rotational speed monitor MS24-112-Rmay be connected to 3-wire pnp sensors,sensors according to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR) or voltage sources with a signallevel between 10 and 30 VDC.

Linking terminals 7/8 selects theoverspeed monitoring mode. If the presetlimit value is exceeded, the relay is de-energised. Leaving terminals 7/8 openactivates the underspeed monitoringmode. If the speed is below the preset limitvalue, the relay is de-energised.

The device features three overlappingmeasuring ranges and can be easilyadapted to the application. A 3-positionswitch serves to adjust the requiredmeasuring range. Then the switch pointis adjusted by means of the front panelpotentiometer.

The test button enables adjustment of theswitch point during installation withoutdisabling the output relay. When the test

button is pressed, the output relay remainsenergised.

The unit operates on the digital pulseprinciple. This method provides a fastresponse and is ideal for applications withrelatively low speed.

For underspeed monitoring, a built-in start-up time delay (AU) is available. During thestart-up time delay, the output relay will be

�0��=�9

9�7=�8

��E1AF�.1�2�3

2?�0�+�6��

��=��9/

E9F��E�F��

0�

2*�@@@

�-�.��0

-.

78

>�>1

I�� !"#$� %�

6��&'(%�)" �$*+,�(%-�(#�.*",�) "&�./%/�� !"#$�� %�

��

�

� � � � � �

��

��

�"

)�*+,�

��

��

��"�

��

��

��

��

��.%"+

��

&&

(�#��

��

��

��

��

� �, %�

+"0%

+#($%�*,!*1�.*",*0*.1/*,+�$.�.#$D*&*.�-�(#%�)�1."

N%$.�2#..",

D*&*.�-�(#%*.� .�#'�.*&%�!%(�3

�

9�.�4

>�

>1

>?

1�2�3

','

�

0

�

.

-

7

8

>�

>1

/

��

��

��

�0

��

�-

�.

9

��

9�.�4

E=F

9

=

41

+0 ,+

.%"+

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

)�*+,� ��"�(�#��

O-% $'%%!

+"0%

��

�0

555

��.��4�AB��46A

��.��4�B-��C


Type MS24-112-RIdent-no. 0518003

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply


Rotational speed monitoring overspeed/underspeedSpeed range 1.5...3000 min-1 (3 ranges)– Range 1 1.5...30 min-1

– Range 2 15...300 min-1

– Range 3 150...3000 min-1

Input frequency ≤ 60 000 min-1

Pause duration ≥ 0.2 msPulse duration ≥ 0.2 msHysteresis approx. 10 %Start-up time delay 0.1…30 s (front panel potentiometer)Repeat accuracy ≤ 0.1 %Temperature drift ≤ 0.005 %/K


Input circuits NAMUR or (3-wire, pnp)NAMUR input according to EN 60947-5-6, terminals 9/10– Operating characteristics U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching threshold 1.4 mA ≤ Ie ≤ 1.8 mA3-wire input pnp, terminals 11…13– Operating characteristics U ≤ 15 VDC; I ≤ 30 mA– "ON" signal 0…5 VDC– "OFF" signal 10...30 VDC

Output circuitsRelay output 1 relay output– Number of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W

LED indications– Power green– Switching status yellow– Pulse indication yellow




Rotational Speed Monitor MS24-112-R

�(

��(�

energised to prevent that the system isbrought to a stop when the input rate isless than the preset limit value. The start-up time delay is triggered under twoconditions: upon connection of a potential-free contact between terminals 15 and 16while the device is powered; or by linkingterminals 15 and 16 first and then applyingpower to the device.

The switching state of the output relay isindicated by the yellow LED; the deviceoperation is indicated by a green LED. If aninput pulse is present, the respectiveyellow LED lights.

22


The MS25-Ui is a digital-to-analogueconverter that converts an input frequencyinto an analogue current or voltage rela-tive to the adjusted measuring range.The device can accommodate NAMURsensors, 3-wire pnp sensors or othervoltage sources with pulse levels between9 and 30 VDC.

To adjust the speed range an end valuebetween 0.6...100 000 min-1 or0.01...1660 Hz is set using four multi-position switches. An output signal of10 V or 20 mA accords to the end value.

If the speed rate is below 0.6 min-1/0.01Hzan output signal of 0/4 mA or 0 V will begenerated.

The voltage output supplies 0...10 V andthe current output supplies 0/4...20 mA.

The current output may be programmedfor 4...20 mA operation by linking terminals13 and 14.If connected to NAMUR sensors, the inputcircuit is monitored for wire-break andshort-circuit conditions. If a fault conditionoccurs, the dual colour LED turns fromgreen to red and the output current dropsto 0 mA (also in live-zero operation) or 0 V,respectively. The two conditions can bedistinguished by the yellow LED; wire-break causes it to turn off.

Rotational SpeedMeter MS25-Ui1-channel

• 1-channel rotational speed meterwith voltage and current output


• Digitally adjustable detectionrange from0.01...1 660 Hzor 0.6...100 000 min-1

• Stepwise adjustment of themeasuring range to the application


• Adjustable floating averageto steady the signal

• Pulse output


��

��

� � ��

��

��

��

��

��

)�*+,�� !�

��

� � �

��

�

��

��

� � �

��

��

��

� � �

��

�

�

0

�

.�=

-�9

7�=

8�9

9��.�4

9��.�4

5�

E��F

5%:��;��&�

5%:��;�.�&�<�-�&�

+"0%

��

��

/

��

�0

��

�.

�-

1�2�3>��=

>1��9

555555

>��/

','>?��

>1��

/

�0

��

�0

��

�+

D*-%��% "

�

5

41

36+0

56

�B�@@@��&��-��

�@@@��4��3D��7�

��

� � � � � �

��

��

��

��

� � ��

&

��

��

�

��

��

��

)�*+,�� !�

�& &

��

� � �

��

��

��

�

��

��

� � �

��

��

��

� � �

��

� �, %�

+"0%

+#($%�*,!*1�.*",�!8#$.&%,.�)�1."

2%�$# *,+� �,+%

�-% �+%�)" &*,+

�0��=�9

9�7=�8

��E1AF�.1�2�3

2?�0�+�6��

��=��9/

E9F��E�F��

0�

2*�@@@

�-�.��0

-.

78

>�>1

I�� !"#$� %�

6��&'(%�)" �$*+,�(%-�(#�.*",�) "&�./%/�� !"#$�� %�


When 3-wire pnp sensors are used, thepower supply lines are monitored for wire-break only.

Wire-break and short-circuit conditions onthe output side of the sensor are not de-tected.

When external signal sources are connec-ted, terminals 11 and 9 must be used. Inorder to suppress error indications, a1...10 kΩ resistor must be connectedbetween terminals 10 and 11.

To steady the input signal, an attenuationfactor can be set between 1 and 10.When the factor is set to 1 (1 pulsesequence), there is no signal attenuation.The attenuation principle is based upon thefloating average formed over the adjustednumber of measurements.

Speed monitors used in connection withsensors from the hazardous area requirea remote amplifier for operation.

Type MS25-UiIdent-no. 0508220

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and



FunctionMeasuring range 0.01...1660 Hz or 0.6...100 000 min-1

(digitally adjustable)Input frequency ≤ 150 000 min-1

Pause duration ≥ 0.2 msPulse duration ≥ 0.2 msTemperature drift ≤ 0.005 %/K v.E. (50 ppm)Linearity error ≤ 0.1 % v.E.

Clearences and creepage distances– Input and output circuit to power supply ≥ 4 mm– Input circuit to power supply ≥ 4 mm

Input circuits NAMUR/3-wire, pnpNAMUR input according to EN 60947-5-6, terminals 9/10– Operating characteristics U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching thresholds 1.4 mA ≤ Ie ≤ 1.8 mA– Wire-break trip point ≤ 0.15 mA– Short-circuit trip point ≥ 6 mA3-wire input pnp, terminals 9…11– Operating characteristics U ≤ 15 V; I ≤ 30 mA– "ON" signal 0…5 VDC– "OFF" signal 10…30 VDC

Output circuits current, voltage and pulse outputCurrent output 0/4…20 mA (load ≤ 600 Ω)Voltage output 0…10 V (RL ≥ 2 kΩ), short-circuit protected– Linearity error ≤ 0.1 % of final valuePulse output (terminal 12) 14 V/10 mA, short-circuit protectedTemperature drift typ. ≤ 0.005 %/°C of final value

max. 0.01 %/°C of final value

LED indications– Power/Fault indication green/red (2-colour LED)– Pulse indication yellow




Rotational Speed Meter MS25-Ui

�(

��(�

22


Rotational SpeedMonitorMS27-R1-channel


• Underspeed detection


• Detection range from1.5…10000 min-1

(six subranges)


• Adjustable off-delay


• 2 sealed relays with hard goldplated contacts

• Pulse output


The MS27-R rotational speed monitorsaccommodate NAMUR sensors accordingto EN 60947-5-6 (II), 3-wire pnp sensors(I) or signal sources with pulse levels from10...30 VDC (III). These devices featuretwo relay outputs, each with one SPDTcontact.

This rotational speed monitor is firmlyprogrammed for underspeed detectionand provides six adjustable, overlappingspeed ranges. Adjustment of the speedrange is determined by a subrange settingand a range factor. The subrange setting isprogrammed using terminals 13/14.The range factor is set with the „Factor“switch located in the front. Fine adjustmentof the switch point is done with thepotentiometer „min-1“.

The unit operates on the digital pulseprinciple. This method provides a fastresponse and is ideal for applications withrelatively low speed.

Operational readiness is signalled by agreen LED.

An input pulse is indicated by a yellow LED.A yellow LED indicates the status of theoutput relay.

A start-up time delay can be set from0.1...30 s using the front potentiometer(AU). During the start-up time delay, theoutput relay will be energised to preventthat the system is brought to a stop whenthe input rate is less than the preset limitvalue. The start-up time delay is triggeredunder two conditions: by connecting apotential-free contact between terminals15 and 16 while the device is powered, orby applying power to the device after theterminals have been linked.

In addition, an off-delay timer is providedfor filtering out short duration speed dips.The off-delay is variable from 0.1...30 sand is set with the AV potentiometer.

This device is not suitable for safety appli-cations where accurate zero speed detec-tion is required.

��

� �

� � � � � �

��

��

�"&

)�*+,� ��"�

��

��

��"�

&��

�� &'�&��

(�#��

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� �, %�

+"0% +#($%�*,!*1�.*",*0*.1/*,+�$.�.#$

*.� .�#'�.*&%�!%(�3

*0*.1/�"))�!%(�3

D*&*.�-�(#%

�!8#$.&%,.�)�1."

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

! �"��

��

�

�

�#

$�

�

%�

�

� �

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

$�

��

��#&��'#

��&��(



Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/DCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation input circuit to output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,

test voltage 2,5 kVrms


Rotational speed monitoring underspeedMounting range 1.5…10 000 min-1 (six subranges)Input frequency ≤ 150 000 min-1

Pause duration ≥ 0.2 msPulse duration ≥ 0.2 msHysteresis approx. 10 %Start-up time delay 0.1…30 s (adjustable)Switch off delay 0.1…30 s (adjustable)Repeat accuracy ± 0.5 %Temperature drift ≤ 0.020 %/K

Input circuits NAMUR/3-wire, pnpNAMUR input according to EN 60947-5-6, terminals 9/10– Operating characteristics

Voltage 8.2 VCurrent 8.2 mA

– Switching threshold 1.4 mA ≤ Ie ≤ 1.8 mA3-wire input pnp, terminals 9…11– Operating characteristics

Voltage 15 VDCCurrent ≤ 30 mA

– "ON" signal 0…5 VDC– "OFF" signal 10...30 VDC

Output circuitsRelay outputs 2 relay outputs/pulse output– Number of contacts each with 1 SPDT contact,

silver alloy + 3 µm Au– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 WPulse output (terminal 12) 14 VDC/10 mA, short-circuit protected

LED indications– Power green– Switching status yellow– Pulse indication yellow




Rotational Speed Monitor MS27-R

��

��

22


Window DiscriminatorMS28-R1-channel

• 1-channel window discriminator

• Overspeed and underspeedmonitoring


• Digital adjustment of setpointswithin the range from:0.01...100 Hzor 1...10 000 min-1

• Adjustable window range:± 3...30 % of setpoint

• Excellent temperaturestability and repeatability


• 1 relay for overspeeddetection and 1 relay forunderspeed detection

• Sealed relays with hard goldplated contacts


to EN 60947-5-6, 3-wire pnp sensors orother voltage sources with pulse levelsfrom 10...30 VDC.If a NAMUR sensor is used, the inputcircuit is monitored for wire-break andshort-circuit conditions. During a faultcondition, the output relays de-energiseand the green LED turns to red. The twoconditions can be distinguished by theyellow input pulse LED; wire-break causesit to turn off.If a 3-wire sensor is used as input device,the power supply lines are monitored for

The MS28-R rotational speed monitorsare used for underspeed or overspeeddetection of a speed range. The devicehas two relay outputs, one for overspeedand one for underspeed detection. Thedevice accommodates sensors according

wire-break only. Wire-break and short-circuit conditions on the output of thesensor are not detected.Terminals 9 and 11 are the inputs forexternal signal sources. A 1...10 kΩresistor must be connected betweenterminals 10 and 11 to suppress faultindications.The parameters (Hz or min-1) for the speedrange as well as the range factor arejumper programmable using terminals 12,13 and 14.

��

��

� � � � � �

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��&

��"�

�

�

�

��

��/�

�

��

��

� � �

'

� �, %�

��+)*+%�,,-,./0,",+"0%

*0,0.1,,2�+0/0)+

C,,-"0� /,2%�,,�J

*%0'",,0

*0/ 03)'�0,4%�-%*/5

3/,2%�' "2 /44,,2

,+

�"()

��

� � ��

�

��

��

��

��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

�

*'�'+

��

� � ��

��

�

��

�

��

56

56

�

�

0

�

.

-

7

8

9��.�4

9��.�4

E��F

5%:��;��4�

5%:��;�.�4�<�-�4�

+"0%

��

��

�0

��

�-

�.�L

1�2�3>��/=

>1��9

555

>��

','>?�/

>1��

�0

��

��

55

5

56

41

36+0 /

��

555

��

�0

��

��

�

��.��4�AB��46A

��.��4�B-��C

�0��=�9

9�7=�8

��E1AF�.1�2�3

2?�03+36��

��=��9/

E9F��E3F��

0�

2*�@@@

�-�.��0

-.

78

>�>1

I/6/ -")+/ %/

6�/4'*%�7" �+,2,/*%8/*)/0,",�7 "4�01%1/6/ -")+�/ %/



Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and



Rotational speed monitoring overspeed and underspeed monitoringMeasuring range 1...10 000 min-1 or 0.01...100 HzSetpoint window range ± 3...30 %

(with reference to the nominal speed range)Input frequency ≤ 150 000 min-1

Pause duration ≥ 0.2 msPulse duration ≥ 0.2 msHysteresis 1. 2 or 3 % (depending on the preset window)Start-up time delay 0.5…30 s (adjustable)Repeat accuracy ≤ 0.1 %Temperature drift ≤ 0.005 %/K


Input circuits NAMUR/3-wire, pnpNAMUR input according to EN 60947-5-6, terminals 9/10– Operating characteristics U0 = 8.2 V; Ik = 8.2 mA– Switching threshold 1.4 mA ≤ Ie ≤ 1.8 mA– Wire-break threshold ≤ 0.15 mA– Short-circuit threshold ≥ 6 mA3-wire input pnp, terminals 9…11– Operating characteristics U ≤ 15 V; I ≤ 30 mA– "ON" signal 0…5 VDC– "OFF" signal 10…30 VDC

Output circuits two relay outputsRelay output 1 SPDT contact– Switching voltage ≤ 250 V– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Contact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

LED indications– Power/Fault indication green/red (2-colour LED)– Switching status yellow– Pulse indication yellow




There are four possibilities:12 13 14 Factor Range

1x 1...1000 min-1

10x 10...10000 min-1

0.01x 0.01...10 Hz0.1x 0.1...100 Hz

The unit uses the digital pulse principle todetect underspeed and overspeed con-ditions. This method works well in appli-cations with infrequent pulse indication andprovides relatively short response times.The smallest measurable frequency is10 mHz.

The nominal speed rate is set digitallyusing three switches on the front of thedevice. In addition, the device has anadjustable window range from 3...30 %in each direction which is programmedusing a 10-position selector switch. Duringunderspeed setpoint relay 1 is de-energised; during overspeed setpointrelay 2 is de-energised. A yellow LEDindicates the status of each output relay.

The switching hysteresis of the outputrelays (as a percentage) relative to thenominal speed rate depends on the widthof the adjusted sensing window:

Sensing window Hysteresis

– 3, 6 and 9 % 1 %– 12, 15, 18 and 21 % 2 %– 24, 27 and 30 % 3 %

During drive system start-up, a built-instart-up time is available. The time delay isset with the front cover AU potentiometer.The output relay (setpoint 1) is energisedduring the start-up time delay to preventthat the system is brought to a stop whenthe input rate is less than the preset limitvalue. The start-up time delay is triggeredunder two conditions: by connecting apotential-free contact between terminals15 and 16 while the device is powered, orby applying power to the device after theterminals have been linked.

Window Discriminator MS28-R

��

��

3


ANALOGUE DATATRANSMITTERS/

TRANSDUCERS

ANALOGUE DATATRANSMITTERS/

TRANSDUCERS


Analogue Data Trans-mitters/TransducersSelection Guide

Housing Styleinterfacemodul

FunctionsAnalogue data transmitter2-wire loop isolatorHART® 2-wire loop isolatorHART® analogue data transmitterPotentiometer transducerPt100 transducerThermocouple transducerCurrent driverVoltage/current-to-frequency conv.Processor card with PC interface

Galvanic isolationInput circuit to output circuitInput circuit to power supplyOutput circuit to power supplyNumber of channels

Inputs (optional)Intrinsically safe acc. to EN 50014/20Current input passiveCurrent input 0/4…20 mA, activeVoltage inputVoltage input 2…10 VVariable current input ΔI ≥ 2 mAVariable voltage input 0/1…10 VPotentiometer supply 10 VPt100 RTDs, 2-3-4 wirePt/Ni100/Cu25…1000Voltage input -160...+160 mVThermocouple inputResistor inputOutput Circuits (parallel)Intrinsically safe per EN 50020Current outputCurrent output 0/4…20 mAVoltage outputPt100Alarm outputNo. of setpoint controls/alarm outputsRelay, 1 SPDTTransistor, pnpSupply Voltage


Universal power supply(20...250 VAC/20...125 VDC)

Functional safety up to SIL 2Approved for installation in zone 2Data sheet – see page

Hou

sing

Type

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

43

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

45

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

47

IM33

-11E

x-H

i*)

IM33

-22E

x-H

i*)

IM33

-FS

D-E

x/L

IM31

-11E

x-i*

)IM

31-1

1Ex-

U

IM31

-12E

x-i*

)IM

31-1

2Ex-

U

IM31

-22E

x-i*

)IM

31-2

2Ex-

U

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

15

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

17

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

21

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

23

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

27

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

29

IM31

-11-

i

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

13

IM31

-12-

i●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

19

IM31

-22-

i

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

25

3


IM34

-11E

x-i

IM34

-11E

x-C

i

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

53

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

87

IM34

-12E

x-C

Ri*

)

IM36

-11E

x-i

IM36

-11E

x-U

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

59

IM34

-12-

Ex-

Ri

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

53

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

59

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

87

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

79

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

81

IM35

-11E

x-H

i*)

IM35

-22E

x-H

i*)

IM34

-11E

x-C

i/K

60

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

65

IM34

-14E

x-C

DR

i

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

71

*) Devices also available withcage-clamps:Type designation Ident-no.IM31-11Ex-i/CC 7506330IM31-12Ex-i/CC 7506331IM31-22Ex-i/CC 7506332IM33-11Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC 7506448IM33-22Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC 7506450IM34-12Ex-CRi-CC 7506640IM35-11Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC 7506520IM35-22Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC 7506521


Analogue Data Trans-mitters/TransducersSelection Guide


multicart®

FunctionsAnalogue data transmitter2-wire loop isolatorHART® 2-wire loop isolatorHART® analogue data transmitterPotentiometer transducerPt100 transducerThermocouple transducerCurrent driverVoltage/current-to-frequency conv.TransducerProcessor card with PC interfaceGalvanic isolationInput circuit to output circuitInput circuit to power supplyOutput circuit to power supplyNumber of channelsInputs (optional)Intrinsically safe acc. to EN 50014/20Current input passiveCurrent input 4…20 mA, activeVoltage inputVoltage input 2…10 VVariable current input ΔI ≥ 2 mAVariable voltage input 0/1…10 VPotentiometer supply 10 VPt100 RTDs, 2-3-4 wirePt/Ni100/Cu…1000Voltage input 0...60 mVThermocouple inputResistor input

Output Circuits (parallel)Intrinsically safe per EN 50020Current outputCurrent output 0/4…20 mAVoltage outputPt100Alarm outputNo. of setpoint controls/alarm outputsRelay, 1 SPDTTransistor, pnp

Supply Voltage24 VDC

115 VAC230 VAC


MS

31-L

iU

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

37

Hou

sing

Type

MK

31-.

..Ex0

-Li

MK

31-.

..-Li

MK

31-.

..Ex0

-LU

MK

31-.

..-LU

MK

33-1

1Ex0

-Li

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

31

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

31

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

33

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

33

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

49

MK

35-1

1Ex0

-Li

MK

35-1

1Ex0

-LU

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

83

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

85

MK

32-1

1Ex0

-Li

●

●

●

●

1

●

3/4

●

●

●

39

MK

31-1

14E

x0-L

U

MK

33-1

1Ex0

-PLi

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

35

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

51

MK

32-1

1-Li

●

●

●

●

1

3/4

●

●

●

41

3


MC

32-1

2Ex0

-LR

P

MC

31-2

2AE

x0-i

MC

31-1

21E

x0-L

RP

MC

30-2

8-Li

MC

34-1

21E

x0-L

RP

MC

33-2

2AE

x0-i

MC

33-1

21E

x0-L

RP

MC

32-1

1Ex0

-Ri

MC

32-1

21E

x0-R

P

MC

32-1

21E

x0-L

RP

MC

35-2

2Ex0

-i

MC

33-1

2AE

x0-i

●

●

●

2

●

4

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

1●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

2●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

2●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

1●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

2●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

2●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●


KM

P-E

x0-L

iK

MU

-Ex0

-Li

KM

U-E

x0-H

Li

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

TemperatureTransducers

MC

33-2

2Ex0

-Hi

MC

33-1

2Ex0

-Hi

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

seechapter 9,

Accessories

MC

35-1

1Ex0

-Hi

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

MC

35-2

2Ex0

-Hi

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●


Fig. 1 Analogue signal processing – pulse-width modulation

Analogue Data Transmitters/Transducers

Summary of topicsPage 6: Analogue data transmittersPage 7: Isolating transducersPage 8: Temperature control via

thermocouples or Pt100 RTDsPage 10: Glossary of terms

Advanced process control requires up-to-date process information and precise dataavailable at all times. No longer is it enoughto know that a preset temperature (limitvalue) has been reached or that somecontrol closed or opened a valve. Today'sapplications require instruments to perma-nently measure, monitor and controltemperatures and continuously adjust/correct e. g. valve positions to the actualprocess situation.

Simple switching devices do not meetthese demands. Advanced devices areneeded:

– sensors with analogue output thatdetect changes in physical variables andconvert these into signals which can beread by the control system

– interface devices with analogue outputto drive final controlling elements anddisplay units.

Often, processing of analogue signals inhazardous environments is part of theapplication. For this purpose, measure-ment and control technology generallyintegrates electrical equipment that isapproved for the hazardous area (”i”).This type of equipment is considered asparticularly user-friendly. It is designed tolimit the thermal and electrical energy toa point that ignition through sparks orthermal effects is not possible (page A-9).

Requirements - Flexibility andprecision

There is no such thing as an universalinterface to handle the variety of tasksperformed by the different sensors andactuators. TURCK’s goal is therefore toprovide a wide range of user-friendlydevices that meet the majority ofrequirements for high precision andflexibility.

TURCK offers interface devices with:

– standardised input and output circuits– complete galvanic isolation– intrinsically safe input and output circuits– Hart communication

The function group of analogue datatransmitters includes all devices whichtransmit or process any kind of analoguesignals:

– modules for galvanic isolation of signals– isolating transducers– thermo-element amplifiers– potentiometer amplifiers– gradient monitors– setpoint devices

Analogue data transmitters

Analogue data transmitters are used toisolate and convert standard signals andto transfer these between the explosionhazardous area and the safe area.

If devices are needed for galvanic isolationor signal conditioning, TURCK offers anextensive product range including devices,which can be distinguished by their typecodes starting with MK31-..., MS31-...and MC31-... . There are devices withintrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safeinputs available.

If signals have to be transferred from thenon-hazardous area to the hazardousarea, devices with the type codes MK35-...and MC35-... should be used.

Methods of transmission and isolationof analogue signals

Analogue signals are generally isolated andtransferred using the following methods.– voltage-to-frequency conversion

(and vice-versa)– transformer transmission– pulse-width modulation

Each of these three methods has specificdisadvantages and advantages. Generally,the pulse-width modulation method hasthe best transfer characteristics.

Pulse-width modulation is considered tobe a safe transmission method. A pulse-width modulated signal is generated bycomparing the input voltage with a deltavoltage of constant amplitude. The pulse-width is proportional to the input voltagelevel. The modulated signal is isolatedthrough an optocoupler. The output signalis generated by integration in a low-passfilter (fig. 1).

The pulse-width modulation mode onlyevaluates the pulse duty cycle of thetransferred signal and not the signalfrequency, as is the case with voltage-to-frequency and frequency-to-voltageconversion. Faults due to drifting offrequency critical components areeliminated. TURCK’s analogue datatransmitters and transducers operate onthe pulse-width modulation principle.

��

3


When using a combination of HART®

compatible field transducers and isolatingtransducers, it is possible to determine theanalogue measuring value by using ahandheld device or an input of a controlsystem. In addition, digital data can betransmitted, e.g. pressure values, mediumtemperature and diagnosis data of a trans-ducer for differential pressure measure-ment. Another advantage is the adjustmentof the measuring range to the process viathe control system.

Isolating transducers

Isolating transducers feature a transducerin the input circuit which detects a physicalvariable such flow, temperature, or differen-tial pressure signals. It converts theseinput signals into an electrical value.Analogue data transmitters can processsignals from 2-, 3- or 4-wire devices (fig.2).

In most cases, the transducer interface isintegrated into the field device. For signalprocessing in Ex-applications an isolatingtransducer is used to power the trans-ducer, to isolate and convert the signal andto provide a standard current or voltagesignal at the output. This method requiresthe use of transducers, which match themeasuring range, and convert the changeof a physical variable at the transducerinput into a standard signal of 0/4...20 mA.

This signal processing method has theadvantage that standard transducers canbe used, e.g. for temperature evaluation orflow rate monitoring, and that standardfield signals, even intrinsically safe signals,can be processed.

The processor (isolating transducer) usedis the same for all applications. The use oftwo devices is generally required for thistype of measurement:

– field transducer, type and versiondepend on the measuring task

– isolating transducer suited for2-, 3- or 4-wire technology.

This type of measurement excludes a directdisplay of a physical input variable in thesignal processor, because only the nominalsignal (and not the measured signal) isavailable. If new measuring applications areneeded, then the field transducer must bereplaced or modified.

Isolating transducers with display

The Eurocard style isolating transducer isprovided with an adjustable display.A value pair between -999...9999 isassigned to the standard 4...20 mA inputsignal to show a physical variable. Thedisplay changes with every change in theinput signal.

Isolating transducers for transfer ofHART® signals

Technical progress has lead to thedevelopment of new digital devices withinternal processors, enhancing thepossibilities of analogue field devices.These new devices provide moreconvenient measurement and operatingtechniques. Advanced digital field trans-ducers incorporate a defined digitalinterface. Special isolating transducersare needed for this interface.

An interface, which has achieved standardi-sation, is the HART® protocol. Thisprotocol enables connection of exisiting2-wire transducers. The analogue signal onthe connection cable is superimposed by afrequency signal. The frequency signalcontains coded digital data. Standardisolating transducers are not able totransfer the frequency signal due to thehight frequency level. Therefore specialdevices had to be designed to transfersignals from and into the hazardous areaaccording to HART® standard.

Fig. 2 Connection of transducers

��

��

��

��

�

� ��

��

�

��

��



Temperature control via thermo-couples or Pt100 RTDs

Thermocouples

When two different metals are joined andthe two metals are subjected to differenttemperatures, a dependent contact voltage(thermo-electric force/Seebeck effect) isgenerated.

The amount of voltage generated dependson the metal types and on the tempera-ture. This thermo-electric force is used formeasurements, utilizing the connectedends of the wire as a measuring point andbringing the open ends of the wires to aconstant or measurable temperature(reference junction). The thermo-electricforce directly reflects the difference intemperature between measuring point andreference point. Therefore, temperaturecontrol with thermocouples does notprovide an absolute but a relative tempe-rature indication.

To avoid mistakes, the cables from thethermocouple (measuring point) to thereference junction must have the samethermo-electric characteristics as the ther-mocouple itself. These cables are calledequalizing conductors. They are colourcoded for easy match up with the res-pective thermocouple.

For price reasons, compensatingconductors are not made of the samematerial as the thermocouple itself. Thereference junction can also be locatedclose to the measuring point. In that case,the reference temperature must be mea-sured (external reference junction) orknown (thermostat). The temperaturedifference between reference andmeasuring point should be kept as smallas possible. If it is not possible to use anexternal reference junction, it must beensured that the measuring point and theinternal reference junction have the sametemperature.

��

��

��

��

Temperature measurement

In today's industry, the transition betweenthe standard concepts used to measuretemperature is very smooth. Applicationand price considerations are usually thedividing line separating the differentprocesses. Independent from the abovecriteria, the following measurementsystems are available for a variety ofapplications and temperature ranges:

0...800 °C: fluid-gases or pressurespring-thermometers

-100...+600 °C: Pt100 resistancetemperature detectors(RTDs)

-270...1800 °C: thermo-elements 200...3400 °C: total or narrow band

pyrometers

Two operation principles have gainedmajor importance in the context ofindustrial temperature control.

Fluid-gases or pressure spring-thermo-meters operate on the principle of expan-sion through thermal effect. In most gasesthey have a switching contact that produ-ces a signal when a preset temperaturehas been reached.

The most common methods are thosethat use a temperature sensing probe inconjunction with either Pt100 resistorsor thermo-elements.

The particular differences between the twomethods are explained on the next page.

The most commonly used thermocouplesaccording to DIN IEC 584-1 are:

Type Code Thermo-voltageMeasuring range

Cu-CuNi T -6.26 ... 20.87 mV-270 – 400 °C

NiCr-CuNi E -9.84 ... 76.36 mV-270 – 1000 °C

Fe-CuNi J -8.1 ... 69.54 mV-210 – 1200 °C

NiCr-Ni K -6.46 ... 54.88 mV-270 – 1372 °C

PtRh13-Pt R -0.23 ... 21.10 mV-50 – 1769 °C

PtRh10-Pt S -0.24 ... 18.69 mV-50 – 1769 °C

PtRh30-PtRh6 B 0 ... 13.81 mV0 – 1820 °C

Temperature-isolating transducerswith PACTware™, FDT/DTM softwaresupport

Some isolating transducers can beconfigured or parameterised using DTM(Device Type Manager). More detailedinformation can be found on page A – 22or on the Internet at www.pactware.de.

3


Comparison:Thermocouples and resistancetemperature detectors (RTDs)

• Thermocouples:– non-linear characteristic curve– fast response times– line compensation / reference point

required– different couples needed for different

applications– active element subject to wear, such as

corrosion, oxydation and aging– variations in measured value are due to

reference drift and corrosion– line monitoring for short-circuits is

difficult (a short-circuit may result innew thermocouples)

• Resistance Temperature Detectors(RTDs):

– nearly linear characteristic curve– passive operation, therefore particularly

well suited for intrinsically safeapplications

– standard devices for a wide variety ofapplications

– line can be monitored for wire-breakand short-circuit conditions

– absolute temperature indication

Possible applications withthermocouples and RTDs

1. Option: A field transducer is located inthe terminal housing of the measuringdevice; the signal is processed via theisolating transducer.

This method requires an initial transducertuned to the range of the measuringelement that converts the change in theresistance of the Pt100 or the thermo-electric force of the thermocouples intoa standard 4...20 mA current signal.

��

– 3-wire circuit:With this type of connection, the thirdline is used to compensate for tem-perature fluctuations. The compen-sation circuitry results in a measuringerror of typically 0.1 %. The disadvan-tage here, when compared to the 2-wire configuration, is the additionalcable.

– 4-wire circuit:A 4-wire connection does not produceany additional measuring errors. Theadditional line compensation is notrequired. The only disadvantage iswiring of 4 connections.

Line compensation for 2-wire circuits

RTDs in 2-wire configuration require astabilising resistor in order to compensatethe resistance of the connecting cable.With TURCK transducers, line compen-sation can be carried out via the trans-ducer. If the transducer operates with ameasuring probe in a 3-wire or 4-wireconfiguration, line compensation is carriedout automatically.

Inputs:The input circuit used may be intrinsicallysafe and enable signal processing from2-, 3-, or 4-wire Pt100 RTDs. When2-, 3-, or 4-wire RTDs are connected, thecircuit is monitored for wire-break andshort-circuit conditions.

Outputs:The following outputs are available (someversions feature outputs operating inparallel):

– current output 0/4...20 mA– voltage output 0...10 V– limit value outputs:

relay and transistor, pnp– alarm outputs

��

Pt100 Measuring amplifiers

The Pt100 resistor is made of platinum.It changes its value with the temperature.2-, 3- or 4-wire Pt100 resistors may beconnected to the measuring transducer.

2-wire circuit

3-wire circuit

4-wire circuit

Fig. 3 2-, 3- or 4-wire connection

Due to their precision and repeatability,platinum resistance elements (Pt100) arekey elements in standard industrialtemperature control applications. Thefundamental value ranges for platinumresistance elements can be found inIEC 751. Operating ranges are from-200...+850 °C; the most common rangeis from -100...+600 °C for standardtransducers with no additional protectivemeasures or special housings.

Depending on the type of Pt100 RTDsconnected, different faults can result:

– 2 wire circuit:The resistance of the cable to thePt100 must be considered prior tooperation as it may alter the measure-ments. Fluctuations in temperature cancontribute to variances in the line resis-tance and deviate the final measure-ments.

� ��


Glossary of Terms

Standard analogue current signal

In process control, the analogue currentsignal (standard signal) is a current signalthat is used to transmit measuring values.The most common levels are 0...20 mAand 4...20 mA. Analogue data trans-mitters for input signals from 0/1...5 mAand a signal output of 0/4...20 mA arealso available.

Standard analogue voltage signal

In process control, the analogue voltagesignal (standard signal) is a signal used totransmit measuring values. The mostcommon are 0...10 VDC, 2...10 VDC, or0...5 VDC, 1...5 VDC signals. The specificrequirements are described in the respec-tive standards.

Load

This is the sum of all electrical impedancesconnected to the current output of adevice. The load determines the maximumpower that will be consumed by the outputcircuit.

Load resistance

The sum of all electrical resistancesconnected to the voltage output of a unitis defined as load resistance. The loadresistance indicates the minimum imped-ance which can be connected to thevoltage output without affecting theperformance of the unit.

Input resistance

The input resistance refers to the totalresistance in the input circuit of a signalisolator. The input resistance representsthe load for the input circuit.


This signal is then picked up and processedby a standard 2-wire isolating transducer.Here, the advantage is that standardisolating transducers can be used for tem-perature control. They can also be used inthe field with 4...20 mA current signals forintrinsically safe applications.

When monitoring the same temperatureranges throughout the entire plant, all initialtransducers can be set up in the same way.If the temperature ranges vary, transducerssuitable for the specific requirements, orsignal conditioners must be used.

The signal processor or isolating trans-ducer stays the same. The following threemain components of these measurementsystems are:

– sensing element (Pt100 RTD/thermocouple)

– initial transducer, adjusted to themeasuring element or range

– isolating transducer

With this measuring system, the signalprocessor does not give a direct tempe-rature indication as only the standard signalis available and not a measuring signal.Modern isolating transducers have anadjustable display that can be set to showthe 4...20 mA signal as a temperaturereading. New measuring ranges can berealised only by exchanging or re-calibratingthe initial transducer.

2. Option: Without Conversion of Signalsin the Field.

The thermo-element or Pt100 is directlyconnected to the respective transducer.

An additional field device, which in thisexample is the initial transducer, is notrequired. Parameters necessary for themeasuring operation such as range, typeof thermocouple, reference point, 2-, 3-,or 4-wire Pt100 RTDs, are selectedduring programming.

This application generally requires thermo-couples or Pt100 RTDs that are compa-tible with the signal processor. It isimportant to use a freely adjustable signalprocessor. It is adapted to the specificapplication by setting the upper and lower

limit of the analogue range, the high andlow limit values, and by determining theoutput function in case of fault (wire-breakand short-circuit in the sensor circuit).

Not every transducer can provide all theseadjustments. The basic concepts are asfollows:

– Transducers with a fixed (pre-deter-mined) measuring range. These areused when the measuring task is clearlydefined and only one distinctive range isrequired. Any changes in the range canbe quite costly (new device) and timeconsuming (order and delivery time).

– Transducers with the option to selecta measuring range by means of additio-nal components. These transducershave a so called measuring module orrange module that allow replacementwith a different module without chan-ging the whole system when the appli-cation requires a different monitoringrange. As above, the measuring rangemust be known at the time of order.The advantage of this version is that ithas an adjustable operating range whichcan be modified subsequently withouthaving to replace the entire transducer.

– Transducers with freely selectablemonitoring range. These transducersprovide a wide operating range withthe upper and lower limits freelyselectable in increments. In mostcases, these transducers may beconnected to Pt100 RTDs in 2-, 3-and 4-wire configurations. Thesedevices are accurately programmablefor a specific application and measuringrange modifications can be carried outat any time.

3


Transmission functions

Measuring signals are classified accordingto their initial value:

- dead-zero signals- live-zero signals

Fig. 4 Conversion of an input signal -dead-zero-signal to live-zero-signal

Live-zero signals

Current signals of 4..20 mA and voltagesignals of 1...5 V and 2...10 V (those notstarting at 0) are called live-zero signals.Figure 4 shows the typical conversionfunction of an analogue data transmitterwhich converts an input signal of 0...20 mAinto a 4...20 mA live-zero signal.

2-wire transmitters typically require aminimum current to operate. Therefore,they always operate with live-zero signals.

During fault-free operation with live-zerosignals, the current in the control circuit isnever 0. Therefore, the control circuits canbe monitored for wire-break.

Dead-zero signals

Current signals of 0...20 mA and voltagesignals from 0...5 V and 0...10 V range(those starting at 0) are called dead-zerosignals.

Dead-zero signals are used in 3-wire or 4-wire transducers. In the 4-wire configura-tion, transducer power and output circuitare separated from each other. With most

3-wire transducers, power and outputcircuits have a common potential.


Monitoring for wire-break and short-circuitof the inputs circuits, as in switching ampli-fiers, is not as common for analogue datatransmitters and transducer. However, thisfeature can easily be provided.

Live-zero signals are inherently suited formonitoring the control circuit. Additionalelectronics monitor the current flow in thecontrol circuit. Typically, a fault exists whenthe current is less than 2 mA (wire-break),or greater than 22 mA (short-circuit). Analarm output is available for fault indication.

Isolating transducers (type MC33 onEurocard) have a relay and a transistoroutput to indicate faults in the input circuit.

In some cases, it is not sufficient to provideerror indications via a separate alarm out-put, but to provide mode-specific signalsto the control system. For this it isnecessary to cause the analogue signalto automatically adopt a clearly definedoutput signal state in case of an errorcondition:

– maximum value 22 mA– minimum value 0 mA– unchanged value, following the input

signal

Active current output

An active current output is an adjustablecurrent source providing current toconnected devices featuring a passiveinput.

Passive current output

A passive current output controls thecurrent flow of an external voltage source.Devices connected to this output mustbe equipped with a supply input.


The sensor-specific installation require-ments are listed in the according sensorcatalogues. It is essential to meet theserequirements to ensure correct operation.

When laying sensor cables, it is requestedto follow the guidelines mentioned below:

– the sensor cable should be routedseparately from the power cable

– prevent electro-magnetic interferences– if long cables are needed, it is

recommended to use shieldedand earthed cables

– when using thermocouple measuringamplifiers with internal reference pointcompensation, it must be ensured thatthe reference point and the connectionterminal are kept at the sametemperature.

�� !�� ! ��

��

��

!��

��!

��

��"#�$%

��"#�$%

� &�' �'(� ��)&��* (� ��

3


• 1-channel analogue datatransmitter with removableterminal blocks

• One input circuit 0/2...10 V oralternatively 0/4...20 mA

• One short-circuit protected outputcircuit 0/4...20 mA

• Outputs can be set to live-zerooperation

• Galvanic isolation between inputcircuit, output circuit andsupply voltage

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %

• Temperature drift ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.01 %/K

• EMC per NE 21


The single-channel analogue datatransmitter IM31-11-i is designed totransfer standard, galvanically isolatedactive voltage or current signals.

The device is equipped with an input circuitof 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA and oneshort-circuit protected output circuit of0/4...20 mA.

The input circuit, the output circuit and thevoltage supply are securely galvanicallyisolated from each other.

Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-11-i1-channel

In switch position ”1:1” the input signalsare transferred to the output using one-to-one transmission.

In switch position ”LZ” a dead-zero signal(0...10 V or 0...20 mA) at the input istransformed into a live-zero signal(4...20 mA) at the output.


��+++��$%

��

��

��

,��

-�. �

��/��$%01��

2�-.�

��

��3

��

�� +��+++��" ��4�

��

�

�

��

��

� �

��

��

-�. �

��+++��$%


Analogue Data Transmitter IM31-11-i

Type IM31-11-iIdent-no. 7506323

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...250 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 2.2 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Input circuitOperating values– Voltage 0...10 V (< 20 V)

Input resistance 50 kΩ– Current 0...20 mA (< 40 mA)

Input resistance 50 Ω

Output circuitCurrent output 0/4…20 mALoad ≤ 500 Ω

Transfer characteristicsLinearity error at limit value ≤ 0.1 % of final value.Measuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 %Long-term error ≤ 0.1 %/yearEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.02 % of final value.Effect of supply voltage impedance ≤ 0.05 % of final value.Ambient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/KRise time (10 %…90 %) < 50 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 50 ms

LED indications– Power green

Housing 12-poles, 18 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 per UL94





��5

��

��

3







• One short-circuit protected outputcircuit 0/4...20 mA



• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %


• EMV per NE 21


• Device also available withcage-clamps,Type designation: IM31-11Ex-i/CC,Ident-no.: 7506330

The single-channel analogue datatransmitter IM31-11Ex-i is designed totransfer standard, galvanically isolatedactive voltage or current signals from theexplosion hazardous area to the safe area.

The device is equipped with an input circuitof 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA and oneshort-circuit protected output circuit of0/4...20 mA.


Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-11Ex-i1-channel

In switch position ”1:1” the input signalsare transferred to the output in the non-explosion hazardous area using one-to-one transmission.

In switch position ”LZ” a dead-zero signal(0...10 V or 0...20 mA) at the input istransformed into a live-zero signal(4...20 mA) at the output.


��+++��$%

��

��

��

,��

-.�

��/��$%01��

2 -.�

��

��3

��

��+��+++��" ��4�

��

�

�

��

��

� �

��

��

��

-.�

��+++��$%


Analogue Data Transmitter IM31-11Ex-i

Type IM31-11Ex-iIdent-no. 7506320



Input circuit intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operating values– Voltage 0...10 V (< 20 V)



Output circuitCurrent output 0/4…20 mALoad ≤ 500 Ω

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 04 ATEX 2679 / TÜV 06 ATEX 553387 XMax. values– No-load voltage U0 7.2 V– Short-circuit current I0 1 mA– Power P0 2 mWMax. values of external active transmitter– Voltage Ui 40 V– Power Pi 0.65 WInternal Inductances/capacitances Li / Ci 480 µH / negligibleMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 1.5/9.5/20 mH / 9/6,7/6,1 µF– [EEx ia] IIC 0.5/4.5/9.5 mH / 2/1,5/1.3 µF– Ex nL IIC 0,5/4,5/9,5 mH / 3,9/2,5/2,2 µF– Ex nL IIB 1,5/9,5/20 mH / 17/12/10 µFTemperature range Tu -25...+70 °CMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Transfer characteristicsLinearity error at limit value ≤ 0.1 % of final value.Measuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 %Long-term error ≤ 0.1 %/yearEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.02 % of final value.Effect of supply voltage impedance ≤ 0.05 % of final value.Ambient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/KRise time (10 %…90 %) < 50 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 50 ms







��5

��

��

3







• One short-circuit protected outputcircuit 0/2...10 V

• Output can be set to live-zerooperation


• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %


• EMV per NE 21


The single-channel analogue datatransmitter IM31-11Ex-U is designed totransfer standard, galvanically isolatedactive voltage or current signals from theexplosion hazardous area to the safe area.

The device is equipped with an input circuitof 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA and oneshort-circuit protected output circuit of0/2...10 V.


Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-11Ex-U1-channel

In switch position 1:1 the input signals aretransferred to the output in the non-explosion hazardous area using one-to-one transmission.

In switch position ”LZ” a dead-zero signal(0...10 V or 0...20 mA) at the input istransformed into a live-zero signal(2...10 V) at the output.


��+++��$%

��

��

��

,��

-.�

��/��"01��

2 -.�

��

��3

��

��+��+++��" ��4�

��

�

�

��

��

� �

��

��

��

-.�

��+++��"


Analogue Data Transmitter IM31-11Ex-U

Type IM31-11Ex-UIdent-no. 7506327






Output circuitVoltage output 0/2…10 V, short-circuit protected– Load resistance ≥ 500 Ω




Transfer characteristicsLinearity error at limit value ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 %Long-term error ≤ 0.1 %/yearEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.02 % of final valueEffect of supply voltage impedance ≤ 0.05 % of final valueAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/KRise time (10 %…90 %) < 50 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 50 ms







��5

��

��

3


• 1-channel analogue data trans-mitter with two outputs andremovable terminal blocks


• Two short-circuit protected outputcircuits 0/4...20 mA



• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %


• EMC per NE 21


The single-channel analogue datatransmitter IM31-12-i is designed totransfer standard, galvanically isolatedactive voltage or current signals.

The signal is duplicated and is thusprovided twice at the outputs.

The device is equipped with an input circuitof 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA and twoshort-circuit protected output circuits of0/4...20 mA.

The input circuit, the output circuits and thevoltage supply are securely galvanicallyisolated from each other.

Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-12-i1-channel with twooutputs(Signal duplication)

In switch position ”1:1” the input signalsare transferred to the outputs using one-to-one transmission.

In switch position ”LZ” a dead-zero signal(0...10 V or 0...20 mA) at the input istransformed into a live-zero signal(4...20 mA) at the assigned output.


2 -.�

�

�

��

��

��

��

-.�

��/��$%01��

��

,��

��4�

��+++��$%

��

��3

��

��+��+++��"

�

��

��

� �

��

��

��

-.�

��+++��$%






Input circuitOperating values– Voltage 0...10 V (< 20 V)



Output circuitsCurrent output 0/4…20 mA, short-circuit protectedLoad ≤ 500 Ω








��5

��

��

3


• 1-channel analogue data trans-mitter with two outputs andremovable terminal blocks








• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %


• EMV per NE 21


• Device also available withcage-clamps,Type designation: IM31-12Ex-i/CC,Ident-no.: 7506331

The single-channel analogue datatransmitter IM31-12Ex-i is designed totransfer standard, galvanically isolatedactive voltage or current signals from theexplosion hazardous area to the safe area.

The signal is duplicated and is thusprovided twice at the outputs.

The device is equipped with an input circuitof 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA and twoshort-circuit protected output circuits of0/4...20 mA.

Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-12Ex-i1-channel with twooutputs(Signal duplication)

The input circuit, the output circuits and thevoltage supply are securely galvanicallyisolated from each other.

In switch position ”1:1” the input signalsare transferred to the outputs in the non-explosion hazardous area using one-to-one transmission.



2 -.�

�

�

��

��

��

��

-.�

��/��$%01��

��

,��

��4�

��+++��$%

��

��3

��

��+��+++��"

�

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

-.�

��+++��$%




















��5

��

��

3







• Two short-circuit protected outputcircuits 0/2...10 V



• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %


• EMV per NE 21


The single-channel analogue datatransmitter IM31-12Ex-U is designed totransfer standard, galvanically isolatedactive voltage or current signals from theexplosion hazardous area to the safe area.

The device is equipped with an input circuitof 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA and twoshort-circuit protected output circuits of0/2...10 V.


Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-12Ex-U1-channel with twooutputs(Signal duplication)

In switch position 1:1 the input signals aretransferred to the outputs in the non-explosion hazardous area using one-to-one transmission.

In switch position ”LZ” a dead-zero signal(0...10 V or 0...20 mA) at the input istransformed into a live-zero signal(2...10 V) at the assigned output.


2 -.�

��

��

��

��

-.�

��

,��

��4�

��+++��$%

��

��3

��

��+��+++��"

�

�

�

��/��"01��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

-.�

��+++��"



Type IM31-12Ex-UIdent-no. on request






Output circuitsVoltage output 0/2…10 V, short-circuit protected– Load resistance ≥ 500 Ω











��5

��

��

3


• 2-channel analogue data trans-mitter with removable terminalblocks

• Two input circuits 0/2...10 V oralternatively 0/4...20 mA




• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %


• EMC per NE 21


The dual-channel analogue datatransmitter IM31-22-i is designed totransfer standard, galvanically isolatedactive voltage or current signals.

The device is equipped with two inputcircuits of 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA andtwo short-circuit protected output circuitsof 0/4...20 mA.

The input circuits are galvanically isolatedfrom each other, from the output circuitsand the voltage supply.

Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-22-i2-channel

In switch position ”1:1” the input signalsare transferred to the outputs using one-to-one transmission.



�

�

��

��

��

��

-.�

��/��$%01��

��

,��

2 -.�

��

��!

��

��

��3

��

��4�

��

��4�

��

��+++��$%��+��+++��"

�

��+++��$%��+��+++��"

�

��

��

��

� �

��

��

-.�

��+++��$%






Input circuitsOperating values– Voltage 0...10 V (< 20 V)











��5

��

��

3










• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %


• EMV per NE 21


The dual-channel analogue data transmitterIM31-22Ex-i is designed to transferstandard, galvanically isolated activevoltage or current signals from theexplosion hazardous area to the safe area.

The device is equipped with two inputcircuits of 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA andtwo short-circuit protected output circuitsof 0/4...20 mA.


Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-22Ex-i2-channel

In switch position ”1:1” the input signalsare transferred to the outputs in the non-explosion hazardous area using one-to-one transmission.



�

�

��

��

��

��

-.�

��/��$%01��

��

,��

2 -.�

��

��!

��

��

��3

��

��4�

��

��4�

��

��+++��$%��+��+++��"

�

��+++��$%��+��+++��"

�

��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��+++��$%

-.�




















��5

��

��

3







• Two short-circuit protected outputcircuits 0/2...10 V



• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %


• EMV per NE 21


The dual-channel analogue data transmitterIM31-22Ex-U is designed to transferstandard, galvanically isolated activevoltage or current signals from theexplosion hazardous area to the safe area.

The device is equipped with two inputcircuits of 0/2...10 V or 0/4...20 mA andtwo short-circuit protected output circuitsof 0/2...10 V.


Analogue DataTransmitterIM31-22Ex-U2-channel

In switch position 1:1 the input signals aretransferred to the outputs in the non-explosion hazardous area using one-to-one transmission.

In switch position ”LZ” a dead-zero signal(0...10 V or 0...20 mA) at the input istransformed into a live-zero signal(2...10 V) at the assigned output.


2 -.�

��

��!

��

��

��3

��

�

��

��

��

��

-.�

��/��"01��

��

,��

��4�

��

��4�

��

��+++��$%��+��+++��"

�

��+++��$%��+��+++��"

�

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

-.�

��+++��"



Type IM31-22Ex-UIdent-no. 7506326






Output circuitsVoltage output 0/2…10 V, short-circuit protected– Load resistance ≥ 500 Ω











��5

��

��

3


• 1-channel current repeater/voltagerepeater

• Galvanic isolation of standardanalogue signals



• Input circuit: current or voltage

• Output circuit: current or voltage -depending on type

• Linearity ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 0.1 %

• Temperature drift ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.02 %/K offinal value

The MK31-…Ex0-Li and MK31-…Ex0-LUcurrent/voltage repeaters are designedto isolate and transmit standard analoguesignals from the explosion hazardous areato the non-hazardous area.The devices provide a current and avoltage input which may be used alter-natively. Depending on the type of device,

the output is either a current or a voltageoutput. The function truth table lists theavailable versions with the respectiveident-numbers and the transmissionmodes. The input circuits are galvanicallyisolated from the output circuits and frompower supply. A green LED indicates thatthe device is powered.

MK31-...Ex0-Li

MK31-...Ex0-LU

Input 0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0...10 V 2...10 V 0...5 V 1...5 V

0...20 mA / 0...10 V MK31-11Ex0-Li MK31-111Ex0-Li MK31-11Ex0-LU MK31-111Ex0-LU MK31-116Ex0-LU

7506005 7506010 7506205 7506210 7506222

4...20 mA / 2...10 V MK31-112Ex0-Li MK31-11Ex0-Li MK31-112Ex0-LU MK31-11Ex0-LU MK31-117Ex0-LU MK31-116Ex0-LU

7506015 7506005 7506215 7506205 7506223 7506222

0...10 mA / 0...5 V MK31-115Ex0-Li MK31-113Ex0-Li MK31-115Ex0-LU MK31-113Ex0-LU MK31-11Ex0-LU

7506017 7506016 7506221 7506216 7506205

2...10 mA / 1...5 V MK31-115Ex0-Li MK31-115Ex0-LU MK31-11Ex0-LU

7506017 7506221 7506205

0...5 mA / 0...2.5 V MK31-116Ex0-Li

7506020

Output

Types –Transmission characteristics

Current Repeater/Voltage RepeaterMK31-...Ex0-Li/24VDCMK31-...Ex0-LU/24VDC1-channel

*) see page 3 – 32

2

��

��

,��

!��

��

��3�

�

0��67

0��67 -.�

�

��*��

8

2

��

��

,��

!��

��

��3�

�

0��67

0��67 -.�

�

��*��

��

��

��

��

�� !

�"��#$��!

-.�


Type MK31-...Ex0-Li MK31-...Ex0-LUIdent-no. see table page 3 – 31 see table page 3 – 31




Input circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe per EN 50020Voltage input (3 and 4)– Operating characteristics/Input resistance Ru 0/2…10 V (< 39 V)/50 kΩ 0/2…10 V (< 39 V)/50 kΩ

0/1…5 V (< 39 V)/70 kΩ 0/1…5 V (< 39 V)/70 kΩ0...2.5 V (< 39 V)/90 kΩ

Current input (1 and 2)– Operating characteristics/Input resistance Ri 0/4…20 mA (< 40 mA)/100 Ω 0/4…20 mA (< 40 mA)/100 Ω

0/2…10 mA (< 40 mA)/175 Ω 0/2…10 mA (< 40 mA)/175 Ω0...5 mA (< 23 mA)/325 Ω

Output circuits current output voltage output, short-circuit protectedOutput current/load see table/≤ 500 ΩOutput voltage/load resistance see table/≥ 500 Ω

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity PTB 97 ATEX 2104 PTB 97 ATEX 2104Maximum nominal values from both inputs– No load voltage U0 7.2 V 7.2 V– Short-circuit current I0 1 mA 1 mAMaximum values (external intrinsically sensors)– No load voltage Ui 40 V 40 V– Power Pi 0.5 W 0.5 W– Short-circuit current Ik – –Max. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1 H/13.5 µF 1 H/13.5 µFMarking of devices É II (1) G [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) G [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance of setpoint adjustment ≤ 0.1 % of final value ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 % ≤ 0.2 %Long term error 0.1 %/year 0.1 %/yearAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.02 %/K of final value ≤ 0.02 %/K of final valuePulse rise time (10 %...90 %) ≤ 300 ms ≤ 300 msRelease time (90 %...10 %) ≤ 300 ms ≤ 300 ms

LED indications– Power green green


Mounting snap-on clamps for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)or srew terminals for panel mounting

Connection via flat terminals with self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2


Current Repeater/Voltage Repeater MK31-...Ex0-Li/MK31-...Ex0-LU

�

�

,�

3


The MK31-…-Li and MK31-…-LU arecurrent/voltage repeaters designedto isolate standard analogue signals.

The devices provide a current and a vol-tage input which may be used alternatively.Depending on the type of device, the out-put is either a current or a voltage output.The function truth table lists the available

versions with the respective ident-numbersand the transmission modes.The devices feature galvanic isolationbetween the input circuits, output circuitsand power supply.Further devices with modified transfercharacteristics on request. A green LEDindicates that the device is powered.

• 1-channel current repeater/voltagerepeater

• Galvanic isolation of standardanalogue signals

• Input circuits 0/2…10 V or0/4…20 mA (selectable)

• Output circuits 0/4…20 mAor 0/2...10 V

• Linearity ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 0.1 %

• Temperature drift ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.02 %/Kof final value

Current Repeater/Voltage RepeaterMK31-...-Li/24VDCMK31-...-LU/24VDC1-channel

MK31-...-LU

MK31-...-Li

2

��

��

,��

!��

��

��3��4�

-.��

��/��"

��/��$%

��/��"#��8

��*��

2

��

��

,��

!��

��

��3��4�

-.��

��/��"

��/��$%

��/��$%

��*��

0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0...10 V 2...10 V

0...20 mA MK31-11-Li MK31-111-Li MK31-11-LU MK31-111-LU0...10 V 7506102 7506103 7506202 7506203

4...20 mA MK31-112-Li MK31-11-Li MK31-112-LU MK31-11-LU2...10 V 7506104 7506102 7506204 7506202

I

O

��

��

��

��

��-.�

ç


Type MK31-...Li MK31-...LUIdent-no. see table page 3 – 33 see table page 3 – 33




Input circuitsVoltage input (3 and 4)– Input resistance 50 kΩ 50 kΩ– Operating characteristics 0/2…10 V (< 20 V) 0/2…10 V (< 20 V)Current input (1 and 2)– Input resistance 100 Ω 100 Ω– Operating characteristics 0/4…20 mA (< 40 mA) 0/4…20 mA (< 40 mA)

Output circuits current output voltage output, short-circuit protectedLoad impedance ≤ 500 ΩOutput current 0/4…20 mALoad resistance ≥ 500 ΩOutput voltage 0/2...10 V

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance of setpoint adjustment ≤ 0.1 % of final value ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 % ≤ 0.2 %Long term error 0.1 %/year 0.1 %/yearAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.02 %/K of final value ≤ 0.02 %/K of final valuePulse rise time ≤ 300 ms ≤ 300 msRelease time ≤ 300 ms ≤ 300 ms






Current Repeater/Voltage Repeater MK31-...-Li/MK31-...-LU

�

�

,�

3


Analogue Data RepeaterMK31-114Ex0-LU/24VDC1-channel

The analogue data repeaters, typeMK31-114Ex0-LU/24VDC, are designedto isolate and transfer analogue signals,e. g. from thermo-elements, from theexplosion hazardous area to the non-hazardous area.

The input and output circuits are suited forvoltage signals of 0…60 mV.

The devices feature galvanic isolationbetween the input circuits, output circuitsand power supply.

Bipolar signal transmission is not possible.If negative voltages are to be transferred,the polarity of the inputs and outputs mustbe changed. When used in conjunction withthermo-elements this implies that eitherpositive or negative temperature valuescan be transferred.


• 1-channel analogue data repeater

• Galvanic isolation of voltage signalsin the millivolt range



• Input circuit 0…60 mV

• Output circuits 0…60 mV

• Linearity ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 0.1 %

• Temperature drift ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.02 %/Kof final value

2

�

� ��

,��

!��

��

��3�+++!��$"��4�

-.�

�+++!��$"

��

��

"��#$��!

�� !

��

��-.�


Type MK31-114Ex0-LU/24VDCIdent-no. 7506220

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption approx. 50 mAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit

and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Input circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Voltage input (3 and 4)– Input resistance > 50 kΩ– Operating characteristics 0…60 mV (< 20 V)

Output circuits voltage output, short-circuit protectedLoad impedance –Output current –Load resistance ≥ 500 ΩOutput voltage 0…60 mV

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity PTB 97 ATEX 2104Maximum values– No load voltage U0 7.2 V– Short-circuit current I0 1 mAMaximum values (external sensors)– No load voltage UI 40 V– Power PI 0.5 W– Short-circuit current Ik –Max. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1000 mH/13.5 µFMarking of devices É II (1) G [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance of setpoint adjustment ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 %Long term error 0.1 %/yearAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.02 %/K of final valuePulse rise time ≤ 300 msRelease time ≤ 300 ms





with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Temperature range -25…+60 °C

Analogue Data Repeater MK31-114Ex0-LU

�

�

,�

3



• Isolation and conversion ofstandard analogue signals

• Galvanic isolation betweeninput circuit, output circuitand supply voltage

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %

• Temperature drift≤≤≤≤≤ 0.005 %/K of final value

• Voltage and current output,simultaneous operation

• Selectable current or voltage input

The dual channel MS31-LiU analogue datarepeater isolates, converts and repeatsstandard analogue signals, and passes theconverted signals to a user defined output.

The input circuit accepts a standardcurrent input (0/4...20 mA), a standardvoltage input (0/2...10 V) or a variablevoltage input (0...1 - 10 V).

The transfer characteristic of the analoguedata repeater is programmed with bridgeconnectors (refer to drawing on nextpage). By this method, dead-zero signalsare converted to live-zero signals (or vice-versa). In addition, current signals can beconverted to voltage signals and voltagesignals to current signals.

The analogue output signal can be passedto both outputs which may be usedsimultaneously.

The power supply is isolated from theinput circuit, output circuit and supplyvoltage.

A green LED indicates that power issupplied to the device.

Analogue DataRepeaterMS31-LiU/24VDCMS31-LiU/230VAC1-channel

�

�

�

�

��

��!

��,

��

��

��

��

��

��

�!

��

��+++��"901�:��4�7

�

�

�

�

� 9�7 9�7

9�7

9�7

-.�

)��;��;��

��;��;��

��+++��$%91�'��$�'��;<��7

��+++��$%

��+++��"

�+++�(��"

��

� � � � � �

� ��

��

%&�'&(�� !

� �

��)*��+��'#�'

�� ,*�)*��+�-*�'#�'

-.�


Type MS31-LiU/230VAC MS31-LiU/24VDCIdent-no. 05310 05317

Supply voltage UB 184...264 VAC 19.2...28.8 VDCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48…62 Hz ≤ 10 %Power consumption ≤ 5 VA ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply between input circuit, output circuit and supply

voltage for 250 Vrms, test voltage 2.5 kVrms voltage for 250 Vrms, test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Input circuitsVoltage input– Input resistance 50 kΩ 50 kΩ– Operating characteristics 0/2…10 V 0/2…10 VCurrent input– Input resistance 50 Ω 50 Ω– Operating characteristics 0/4…20 mA 0/4…20 mAVariable voltage input– Input resistance 5 kΩ/V 5 kΩ/V– Operating characteristics 0…1–10 V 0…1–10 V

Output circuitsVoltage output 0/2...10 V 0/2...10 V– Load resistance ≥ 1 kΩ ≥ 1 kΩCurrent output 0/4...20 mA 0/4...20 mA– Load impedance ≤ 500 Ω ≤ 500 Ω

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance ≤ 0.1 % of final value ≤ 0.1 % of final valueLoad impedance ≤ 0.01 % of final value ≤ 0.01 % of final valueEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.01 % of final value ≤ 0.01 % of final valueConversion error (U->I; I->U) ≤ 0.1 % of final value ≤ 0.1 % of final valueAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.005 %/K of final value ≤ 0.005 %/K of final valuePulse rise time (10 %…90 %) < 50 ms < 50 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 50 ms < 50 ms


Housing 50 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABS 50 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSMounting panel mounting or snap-on clamps panel mounting or snap-on clamps

for top-hat rail (DIN 50022) for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)Connection 2 x 8 self-lifting pressure plates 2 x 8 self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 with wire sleeves ≤ 2 x 2.5 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20 IP20Operating temperature -25...+60 °C -25...+60 °C

ProgrammingSelection of transfer functions– 1:1 transfer– Dead-zero conversion– Live-zero conversion– Current/voltage conversion– Voltage/current conversion

��

��

��= >��=��==� �?�� =

��= @��=��!

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

A

�

A

�

A

�

"�

��

Analogue Data Repeater MS31-LiU

3


Pt100 MeasuringAmplifierMK32-11Ex0-Li/24VDC1-channel

• 1-channel Pt100 measuringamplifier

• Intrinsically safe input circuits,EEx ia, with staticwire-break and short-circuitmonitoring


• Input for Pt100 RTDs (resistancetemperature detector)in 3- or 4-wire versions

• Operating range -50…+600 °C

• 4 adjustable measuring ranges

• Current output 0/4…20 mA


• Programmable outputperformance in case of faults inthe input circuit

The Pt100 measuring amplifierMK32-11Ex0-Li evaluates the tempera-ture dependent changes in resistance ofa Pt100 resistance temperature detector(IEC 751) and transmits them as linear0/4…20 mA current signals.


The input circuit can be operated withPt100 RTDs in 3- or 4-wire versions.The selection is carried out via a frontpanel switch.

The switch „Mon.“ activates input circuitmonitoring for wire-break and short-circuitconditions. The current output perfor-mance in case input circuit errors can beprogrammed with the switch „ “.If the input circuit monitoring function isactivated, a fault is indicated by either a

0 mA or a 22 mA signal and an illuminatedred error LED.

If input monitoring is de-activated, theoutput signal follows the direction of theinput signal (wire-break 0 mA, short-circuit22 mA).

The measuring range is adjusted using twoswitches. The operating range of-200…+800 °C provides a preset selec-tion of four measuring ranges:

T I = -50 ... +100 °CT II = 0 ... +200 °CT III = 0 ... +400 °CT IV = 0 ... +600 °C

TURCK offers the IM34... series for othermeasurement ranges and temperaturesensors (see from page 3 – 53 on).

��

��

��

�� !

��

�((��.��+� ��+�

�+��+��

��( ,//

0

�((��.

�"��#$��!

-�.�� ' ;� ��

��; �; �$�� $�;�

3��(. ��; �; ��+++��$%

B��

��

�

2�

0#

%#� )-�) #%�

3

�

�

�

,��

��

��

!�� +++��$%01��!��C�

-�.��

3(1� ��(��;D� 4-��

�(1� ��(��;D� 4-��

4-wirecircuitPt100

3-wirecircuitPt100


Type MK32-11Ex0-Li/24VDCIdent-no. 75 090 05

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption approx. 50 mAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Input circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Version Pt100 RTD (IEC 751), 3- and 4-wire versionsInput line resistance < 200 Ω/cableSensor current approx. 250 µA

Output circuitsCurrent output 0/4…20 mA (load impedance ≤ 600 Ω)

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity PTB 98 ATEX 2014Input circuitMaximum values– No-load current U0 6.6 V– Short-circuit current I0 2.5 mAMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1000 mH/22 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 1000 mH/500 µFMarking of device É II (1) G [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsOperating range -50…+600 °CMeasuring range 4 measuring ranges (selectable via DIP-switches):

T I = -50 ...+100 °CT II = 0 ...+200 °CT III = 0 ...+400 °CT IV = 0 ...+600 °C(other measuring ranges selectable ex factory)

Compensation error ≤ 0.1 % of measuring scale (ref. to -50...600 °C)Load impedance ≤ 0.005 % of final valueEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.005 % of final valueAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.005 %/K of final valuePulse rise time (10 %…90 %) < 1 sRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 1 s

LED indications– Power green– Fault indication red





Pt100 Measuring Amplifier MK32-11Ex0-Li

�

�

,�

3


Pt100 MeasuringAmplifierMK32-11-Li/24VDC1-channel��

��

��

�� !

��

�((��.��+� ��+�

�+��+��

��( ,//

0

�((��.

-�.�� ' ;� ��

��; �; �$�� $�;�

3��(. ��; �; ��+++��$%

B��

• 1-channel Pt100 measuringamplifier

• Input circuits with static wire-breakand short-circuit monitoring

• Input for Pt100 RTDs (resistancetemperature detector)in 3- or 4-wire versions

• Operating range -50…+600 °C

• 4 adjustable measuring ranges



• Programmable outputperformance in case of faults inthe input circuit

The Pt100 measuring amplifier MK32-11-Li evaluates the temperature dependentchanges in resistance of a Pt100resistance temperature detector (IEC 751)and transmits them as linear 0/4…20 mAcurrent signals.


The input circuit can be operated withPt100 RTDs in 3- or 4-wire versions.The selection is carried out via a frontpanel switch.

The switch „Mon.“ activates input circuitmonitoring for wire-break and short-circuitconditions. The current output perfor-mance in case input circuit errors can beprogrammed with the switch „ “.If the input circuit monitoring function isactivated, a fault is indicated by either a

0 mA or a 22 mA signal and an illuminatedred error LED.

If input monitoring is de-activated, theoutput signal follows the direction of theinput signal (wire-break 0 mA, short-circuit22 mA).

The measuring range is adjusted using twoswitches. The operating range of-200…+800 °C provides a preset selec-tion of four measuring ranges:

T I = -50 ... +100 °CT II = 0 ... +200 °CT III = 0 ... +400 °CT IV = 0 ... +600 °C

TURCK offers the IM34... series for othermeasurement ranges and temperaturesensors (see from page 3 – 53 on).

��

�

2�

0#

%#� )-�) #%�

3

�

�

�

,��

��

��

!�� +++��$%01��!��C�

-�.��

3(1� ��(��;D� 4-��

�(1� ��(��;D� 4-��

3-wirecircuitPt100

4-wirecircuitPt100


Type MK32-11-Li/24VDCIdent-no. 7509000



Input circuitsVersion Pt100 RTD (IEC 751), 3- and 4-wire versionsInput line resistance < 200 Ω/cableSensor current approx. 250 µA

Output circuitsCurrent output 0/4…20 mA (load impedance ≤ 600 Ω)

Transfer characteristicsOperating range -50…+600 °CMeasuring range 4 measuring ranges (selectable via DIP-switches):

T I = -50 ...+100 °CT II = 0 ...+200 °CT III = 0 ...+400 °CT IV = 0 ...+600 °C(other measuring ranges selectable ex factory)

Compensation error ≤ 0.1 % of measuring scale (ref. to -50...600 °C)Load impedance ≤ 0.005 % of final valueEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.005 % of final valueAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.005 %/K of final valuePulse rise time (10 %…90 %) < 1 sRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 1 s

LED indications– Power green– Fault indication red





Pt100 Measuring Amplifier MK32-11-Li

��

��

�5

3


��

� �

��

��1�� !

��

��

-�.��

The isolating transducer IM33-11Ex-Hi/24VDC is used to energise intrinsicallysafe 2-wire HART® transducers (III) in thehazardous area and to transmit themeasuring signals to the non-hazardousarea. In addition to analogue signals, digitalHART® communication signals can betransferred bidirectionally.

Further it is possible to connect passive2-wire (II) and active 3-wire (I) HART®

transmitters.

The device features one channel with0/4...20 mA input and output circuits.

A green LED indicates operational readi-ness.

HART® IsolatingTransducerIM33-11Ex-Hi/24VDC1-channel

The input circuit is galvanically isolatedfrom the output circuit, the supply voltageand from each other. The input signal istransferred without attenuation (1:1 trans-fer) to the output circuit in the non-hazar-dous area.

Due to the 1:1 transmission characteristic,wire-break or short-circuit conditions in thetransducer circuit are indicated by anoutput current of 0 mA or > 22.5 mA,respectively.

Further devices with other I.S. data areavailable on request.

The removable terminal blocks areequipped with test sockets (Ø 2 mm) forconnection of a HART® handheld.

• 1-channel HART® isolatingtransducer with removableterminal blocks




• Functional safety up to SIL 2(according to IEC 61508)

• Supply of intelligent 2-wire trans-ducers with HART® communication,connection to passive 2-wire trans-mitters and to active 3-wire trans-mitters with HART® communication

• Complete galvanic isolation,Short-circuit protectedtransducer circuit

• Input circuit 0/4...20 mA ,Output circuit 0/4...20 mA

• Linearity tolerance ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %,Temperature coefficient≤≤≤≤≤ 0.01 %/K of final value

• Constant voltage in transducer circuit,

• Device also available withcage-clamps,Type designation: IM33-11Ex-Hi-CC,Ident-no.: 7506331

��

��

��

,��

��

��

��+++��$%

� ��

3

E%0�F

2��

G

G

G

G

G

EE�

-�.��-.�

�

��

�

��3

��

��3

E%0�F

E%0�F

��


Type IM33-11Ex-Hi/24VDCIdent-no. 7506440

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Galvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Transducer circuit intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Input resistance 250 ΩOperating characteristics– Voltage 17 V at 20 mA– Current 0...22 mAShort-circuit current (short-term) 60 mA (for 50 ms)

Output circuitCurrent output 0/4…20 mA– Load impedance ≤ 500 Ω– Wire-break indication 0 mA– Short-circuit indication > 22.5 mA

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 00 ATEX 1595 / TÜV 06 ATEX 552977 XMaximum values– No load voltage U0 < 21.9 V– Short-circuit current I0 < 95 mA– Internal resistance Ri 331 ΩMaximum values of external input– Voltage UI ≤ 40 V– Power PI ≤ 0.65 WMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 14 mH/295 nF– [EEx ia] IIC 2.8 mH/57 nF– Ex nL IIC 3 mH/0,12 µF– Ex nL IIB 10 mH/0,81 µFTemperature range Tu -25...+70 °CMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance (o.f.v. = of final value) ≤ 0.1 % o.f.v.Measuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 %Long term error 0.1 %/yearLoad impedance ≤ 0.02 % o.f.v.Input voltage effect ≤ 0.05 % o.f.v.Temperature effect ≤ 0.01 %/K o.f.v.Pulse rise time (10 %…90 %) < 50 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 50 ms

LED indication– Power green



Connection removable terminal blocks, reverse-polarityprotected, screw connection, test sockets Ø 2 mm



HART® Isolating Transducer IM33-11Ex-Hi

��5

��

��

3


��

� �

��

��1�

��

��

-�.��

The isolating transducer IM33-22Ex-Hi/24VDC is used to energise intrinsicallysafe 2-wire HART® transducers (III) in thehazardous area and to transmit themeasuring signals to the non-hazardousarea. In addition to analogue signals, digitalHART® communication signals can betransferred bidirectionally.

Further it is possible to connect passive2-wire (II) and active 3-wire (I) HART®

transmitters.

The device features two channels with0/4...20 mA input and output circuits.

A green LED indicates operational readi-ness.

HART® IsolatingTransducerIM33-22Ex-Hi/24VDC2-channel

The input circuits are galvanically isolatedfrom the output circuits, the supply voltageand from each other. The input signals aretransferred without attenuation (1:1 trans-fer) to the output circuits in the non-hazar-dous area.

Due to the 1:1 transmission characteristic,wire-break or short-circuit conditions in thetransducer circuit are indicated by anoutput current of 0 mA or > 22.5 mA,respectively.

Further devices with other I.S. data areavailable on request.

The removable terminal blocks areequipped with test sockets (Ø 2 mm) forconnection of a HART® handheld.

• 2-channel HART® isolatingtransducer with removableterminal blocks





• Supply of intelligent 2-wire trans-ducers with HART® communication,connection to passive 2-wire trans-mitters and to active 3-wire trans-mitters with HART® communication

• Complete galvanic isolation,Short-circuit protectedtransducer circuit

• Two input circuits 0/4...20 mA ,Two output circuits 0/4...20 mA

• Linearity tolerance ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %,Temperature coefficient≤≤≤≤≤ 0.01 %/K of final value

• Constant voltage in transducer circuit,


��

��

��

,��

��

��

��+++��$%

� ��

3

��

��

! ��

��

E%0�F

2��

G

�G

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

�

�

E%0�F

��

��

�

�

��+++��$%9��;�701��

��+++��$%9��;�701��

EE�

EE�

-�.��-.�

��

�

��3

��

�

��!

��

��3

��

��!

E%0�F

E%0�F

E%0�F

E%0�F


Type IM33-22Ex-Hi/24VDCIdent-no. 7506441

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Galvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,


Transducer circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Input resistance 250 ΩOperating characteristics– Voltage 17 V at 20 mA– Current 0...22 mAShort-circuit current (short-term) 60 mA (for 50 ms)

Output circuitsCurrent output 0/4…20 mA– Load impedance ≤ 500 Ω– Wire-break indication 0 mA– Short-circuit indication > 22.5 mA

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 00 ATEX 1595 / TÜV 06 ATEX 552977 XMaximum values– No load voltage U0 < 21.9 V– Short-circuit current I0 < 95 mA– Internal resistance Ri 331 ΩMaximum values of external input– Voltage UI ≤ 30 V– Power PI ≤ 0.65 WMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 14 mH/295 nF– [EEx ia] IIC 2.8 mH/57 nF– Ex nL IIC 3 mH/0,12 µF– Ex nL IIB 10 mH/0,81 µFTemperature range Tu -25...+70 °CMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance (o.f.v. = of final value) ≤ 0.1 % o.f.v.Measuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 %Long term error 0.1 %/yearLoad impedance ≤ 0.02 % o.f.v.Input voltage effect ≤ 0.05 % o.f.v.Temperature effect ≤ 0.01 %/K o.f.v.Pulse rise time (10 %…90 %) < 50 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 50 ms




Connection removable terminal blocks, reverse-polarityprotected, screw connection, test sockets Ø 2 mm



HART® Isolating Transducer IM33-22Ex-Hi

��5

��

��

3


• 2-channel isolating transducer withremovable terminal blocks



• Isolating transducerwithout auxiliary power

• For supply of fire and smoke alarmdetectors

• Complete galvanic isolation

• Signal transfer 0...40 mA

The 2-channel isolating transducer IM33-FSD-Ex/L is designed for connection ofconventional fire and smoke alarmdetectors.

The detectors are supplied with energy;actuation of the detector results in anaccording current signal which is trans-ferred to the safe area. It is possible toconnect several detectors to each circuit.

The isolating transducer operates withoutauxiliary power (loop-powered) and must

be connected directly to the power-feeding inputs of processor devices.Unconditioned standard current signals of0...40 mA are transferred. Please observethe voltage drop of the device.

The device features galvanic isolationbetween the input and output circuits.The inputs of the isolating transducer arereverse polarity protected.

An external earth-fault indicator can beused to indicate an earthing error securely.

Isolating Transducerfor Fire and SmokeDetectorsIM33-FSD-Ex/L2-channel

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

5��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

��23��+�

� ��

��

� ��


Type IM33-FSD-Ex/LIdent-no. 7506433

Galvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms,test voltage 2,5 kVrms

Transducer circuit– Supply voltage UB – 1 V – 300 Ω × IA– Current 0...40 mA– Short-circuit current 100 mA– Input resistance 300 Ω

Output circuit– Voltage UB 6...35 VDC– Current IA 0...40 mA– Short-circuit current 100 mA

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 02 ATEX 1862Maximum values– No load voltage U0 27,3 V– Short-circuit current I0 90 mA– Power P0 615 mWMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 5 mH/300 nF– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/70 nFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance (o. f. v. = of final value) ≤ 1 % o. f. v.Measuring tolerance ≤ 2 %Long term error ≤ 0,5 %/yearTemperature effect ≤ 0,1 %/K o. f. v.Pulse rise time (10 %...90 %) ≤ 10 msRelease time (90 %...10 %) ≤ 10 ms




Connection profile ≤ 1 x 2,5 mm2 or 2 x 1,5 mm2 or 2 x 1,0 mm²


Isolating Transducer IM33-FSD-Ex/L

��5

��

�

3


• 1-channel loop isolator

• Intrinsically-safe input circuit EEx ia


• Input circuit 0/4…20 mA

• Supply of 2-wire loop poweredtransducers


• Defined current limitation in thetransducer circuit

• Output circuit 0/4…20 mA

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %

• Temperature drift ≤≤≤≤≤ 0,01 %/K offinal value

• Constant transducer voltage

The single channel MK33-11Ex0-Li... loopisolators are used to operate intrinsicallysafe 2-wire loop powered transducers inexplosion hazardous area and to transfersignals to the safe area.

The MK33-11Li-Ex0... types are singlechannel device with an input and outputcircuit of 0/4...20 mA. A green LEDindicates that the device is powered.

The input circuit is isolated from the outputcircuit and from the supply voltage. Inputsignals are passed (1:1) without attenua-tion to the output located in the non-hazardous area.

2-wire Loop IsolatorMK33-11Ex0-Li/24VDC1-channel

��

��

��

�"��#$��!

��

� �

�� !

-�.��

Due to this function it is possible toconnect this device to power supplyinginput circuits of a PLC and to install it insuch applications which previously usedZener barriers.

Due to the 1:1 transmission characteristicof the loop powered transducer circuit,wire-break or short-circuit faults are shownas 0 mA or > 22 mA respectively.

For applications with HART® transducers,there are loop-isolaters available which notonly transmit analogue signals but alsotransfer digital signals bidirectionally:

– IM33-11Ex-Hi/24VDC (page 3 – 43)– IM33-22Ex-Hi/24VDC (page 3 – 45)

2�

��

��

,��

!��

��+++��$%9��;�701��

�

3

��+++��$%-�.��

G

$%


Type MK33-11Ex0-Li/24VDCIdent-No. 7506402

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption ≤ 80 mAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms

test voltage 4 kVrms

Transducer circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Input resistance 50 ΩOperating characteristics– Voltage 15.2 V constant voltage (± 2 % at 20 mA)– Current 0/4...20 mA– Short-circuit current 24 mA

Output circuits active, current source modeCurrent output 0/4…20 mA– Load impedance ≤ 500 Ω– Output current with wire break 0 mA– Output current with short-circuit > 22 mA

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 03 ATEX 2312Input circuitMaximum values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 20 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 77 mA– Internal impedance Ri 408 Ω– Power P0 ≤ 560 mW– Characteristic trapezoidal curveMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/85 nF (alternatively 0.5 mH/110 nF)– [EEx ia] IIB 5 mH/680 nF (alternatively 0.5 mH/830 nF)Temperature range Tu -25...+60 °CMarking of the device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance of setpoint adjustment ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 %Long term error ≤ 0.05 %/yearLoad impedance ≤ 0.02 % of final valueEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.05 % of final valueAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/of final valuePulse rise time (10 %…90%) < 90 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 90 ms



Mounting snap-on clamps for top-hat rail (DIN 5002or screw terminals for panel mounting

Conection via flat terminals with self-liftingpressure plates



2-wire Loop Isolator MK33-11Ex0-Li

�

�

,�

3


2-wire Loop IsolatorMK33-11Ex0-PLi/24VDC1-channel

• 1-channel loop isolator



• Supply of 2-wire loop poweredtransducers


• Defined current limitation in thetransducer circuit

• Input circuit 0/4…20 mA

• Passive output circuit0/4…20 mA

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %

• Temperature drift ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.01 %/K offinal value

• Constant transducer voltage

The single channel MK33-11Ex0-PLi/...loop isolators are used to operateintrinsically safe 2-wire loop poweredtransducers in explosion hazardous areaand to transfer signals to the safe area.

The MK33-11Li-Ex0-PLi... types are singlechannel device with an input and outputcircuit of 0/4...20 mA. A green LEDindicates that the device is powered.

The input circuit is isolated from the outputcircuit and from the supply voltage. Inputsignals are passed (1:1) without attenua-tion to the output located in the non-hazardous area.

Due to this function it is possible toconnect this device to power supplyinginput circuits of a PLC and to install it insuch applications which previously usedZener barriers.

Due to the 1:1 transmission characteristicof the loop powered transducer circuit,wire-break or short-circuit faults are shownas 0 mA or > 22 mA respectively.

��

��

��

�"��#$��!

��%��

� �

�� !

-�.��

2�

��

��

,��

!��

��

��+++��$%9��47

�

3

��+++��$%-�.��

G

$%

��3��"


Type MK33-11Ex0-PLi/24VDCIdent-no. 7506436

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption ≤ 80 mAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Transducer circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Input resistance 50 ΩOperating characteristics– Voltage 15.2 V constant voltage (± 2 % at 20 mA)– Current 0/4...20 mA– Short-circuit current 24 mA

Output circuitsCurrent output 0/4…20 mA– Load impedance ≤ 500 Ω– Output voltage ≤ 30 VDC

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 03 ATEX 2312Input circuitMaximum values– No load voltage U0 ≤ 20 V– Short-circuit current I0 ≤ 80 mA– Internal impedance Ri 391 Ω– Power Pmax ≤ 581 mW– Characteristic trapezoidal curveMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/85 nF (alternatively 0.5 mH/110 nF)– [EEx ia] IIB 5 mH/680 nF (alternatively 0.5 mH/830 nF)Temperature range Tu -25...+60 °CMarking of the device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance of setpoint adjustment ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 %Long term error ≤ 0.05 %/yearLoad impedance ≤ 0.02 % of final valueEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.05 % of final valueAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/of final valuePulse rise time (10 %…90%) < 90 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 90 ms



Mounting snap-on clamps for top-hat rail (DIN 5002or screw terminals for panel mounting

Conection via flat terminals with self-liftingpressure plates



2-wire Loop Isolator MK33-11Ex0-PLi

�

�

,�

3


Temperature MeasuringAmplifierIM34-11Ex-iIM34-12Ex-Ri1-channel

The single-channel temperature measuringamplifier IM34-1.Ex-... is designed toevaluate the temperature-dependentvariations of Ni100/Pt100 resistancetemperature detectors, thermoelement

types B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S and T or lowvoltages in a range of -160...+160 mV andto reproduce these values as temperature-linear current signals of 0/4…20 mA. TheIM34-12Ex-Ri is equipped with an additio-nal relay output to monitor a limit value forunder- and overrrange conditions.The input circuit of the measuring amplifieris also suited for connection of 2, 3 or 4-wire Ni100/Pt100 resistors.The Ni100/Pt100 input may be used forexternal cold junction compensation for thethermoelements (2-wire types) or as anindependent measuring input.The measuring range and the devicefunctions are set via coded rotary switchesor slide switches (on the right side of thedevice).Version IM34-12Ex-Ri enables adjustmentof a limt value via the coded rotary switch.The following parameters may be set:– type of measuring device

• 1-channel temperature measuringamplifier with removable terminalblocks

• Intrinsically safe input circuit EEx iawith wire-break monitoring function



• Input for Ni100/Pt100 resistancetemperature detectors, thermo-elements and millivolt signals

• Lower and upper measuring rangevalue adjustable via coded rotaryswitches

• Current output 0/4…20 mA, limitvalue relay (IM34-12Ex-Ri only)


• Adjustable analogue output perfor-mance in case of errors in the inputcircuit


– connection of the Ni100/Pt100resistance temperature detector in2, 3 and 4-wire technology

– lower measuring range value-100...- 1°C in increments of 1 K0...990 °C in increments of 10 K

– upper measuring range value0...1990 °C in increments of 10 K

– limit value (IM34-12Ex-Ri only)– input circuit monitoring for

wire-break– current output performance in case

of errors in the input circuit:0 or > 22 mA

– internal or external cold junctioncompensation

The signals are transformed according toITS90 IEC 584 for thermoelements andIEC 751 for PT100 RTDs and provided astemperature-linear signals at the currentoutput.

��

%�&

��

��4�

��

�

��

-�.��

H.��;D�� !��

IM34-12Ex-Ri

IM34-11Ex-i ��

��

3

!

��

��2�� 0#

�

0"#

�3�

-.�

��

,��"#

-�.��

��+++��$%01��!��

$"

��

��

3

!

��

��

��

�

2��

0#� -.�

��

,��

I�

-�.��

��+++��$%01��!��

� ��"%#��"##� ��"%�!��J� �%

0"#

�3�

"#$"

��

%�&

��

��

��

��


Type IM34-11Ex-i IM34-12Ex-RiIdent.-no. 7506630 7506631

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input and output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms, test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Input circuit intrinsically safe according to EN 50020version Ni100 and Pt100 (IEC 751), 2, 3 and 4-wire technologymeasuring range -200...800 °C (Pt100), -60...250 °C (Ni100)thermoelements B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T (ITS 90/IEC 584), L (DIN 43710)extra-low voltages with a measuring span of -160 mV...+160 mV

Resistor current Pt100/Ni100 approx. 200 µA

Output circuitsCurrent output 0/4…20 mA (load ≤ 600 Ω) 0/4…20 mA (load ≤ 600 Ω)Relay output – 1 normally open contact– Switching voltage – ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDC– Switching current – ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity – ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Switching frequency – ≤ 10 Hz– Switching hysteresis – ≤ 5 K– Contact materials: – Ag alloy + 3 µm Au

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 02 ATEX 1898 / TÜV 06 ATEX 552978 X TÜV 02 ATEX 1898 / TÜV 06 ATEX 552978 XInput circuit– Max. values

No-load voltage U0 5 V 5 VShort-circuit current I0 2 mA 2 mAPower P0 2.6 mW 2.6 mW

Internal inductances/capacitances Li /Ci 0.2 mH/– 0.2 mH/–Max. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1000 mH/100 µF 1000 mH/100 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 1000 mH/1000 µF 1000 mH/1000 µF– Ex nL IIC 100 mH/3,6 µF 100 mH/3,6 µF– Ex nL IIB 100 mH/18 µF 100 mH/18 µFMarking of the Device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

II 3 G Ex nA nC [nL] IIC/IIB T4 II 3 G Ex nA nC [nL] IIC/IIB T4

Transfer characteristicsAccuracy see page 3 – 55Total error see from pages 3 – 56 onRise time (10 %…90 %) < 1 sRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 1 sResponse time < 1 s

LED indications– Power green green– Error red red– Switching status – yellow

Housing 12 poles, 18 mm wide, Polycarbonatet/ABS,flammability class V-0 per UL94





Temperature Measuring Amplifier IM34-11Ex-i/IM34-12Ex-Ri

��5

��

�

3


Accuracy Ratings

Accuracy – extra-low voltage input

Basic accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Long-term stabilityα = 10 µV => β = 1 µV/K => χ = 1 µV/p. a. =>31.25 ppm of measuring span/K (320 mV) 3.13 ppm of measuring span (320 mV) 3.13 ppm of measuring span (320 mV)

ΔmV = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)

For example: Assumption: TU = 50 °C, age = 5 years

ΔmV = ± (10 µV + 1 µV/K · |50 °C - 25 °C| + 1 µV/years · 5 years = ± 40 µV

Accuracy – RTD input

Basic accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Long-term stabilityα = 50 mΩ => β = 0.75 mΩ/K => χ = 1 mΩ/p. a. =>25 ppm of measuring span (2000 Ω) 0.38 ppm of measuring span (2000 Ω) 0.5 ppm of measuring span (2000 Ω)

ΔRTD = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)

For example: Assumption: TU = 35 °C, age = 1 year

ΔRTD = ± (50 mΩ + 0,75 mΩ/K · |35 °C - 25 °C| + 1 mΩ/year · 1 year = ± 58.5 mΩ

Accuracy – current output

Basic accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Long-term stabilityα = 5 µA => β = 0.5 µA/K => χ = 1 µA/p. a. =>250 ppm of measuring span (20 mA) 25 ppm of final value (20 mA) 50 ppm of final value (20 mA)

ΔI = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)


ΔI = ± (5 µA + 0.5 µA/K · |25 °C - 25 °C| + 1 µA/year · 1 year = ± 6 µA

Accuracy – thermoelement input with internal cold junction compensation

ΔKSI = ± 1.5 K


Total error –extra-low voltage input

Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔmV| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔmV| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

For example: Assumption: TU = 40 °C, age = 2 years, output: 4...20 mA,MBA = 0 mV, MBE = 100 mV

1) Accuracy calculation - extra-low voltage input (s. page 3 – 55) => ΔmV = ± 27 µV

2) Accuracy calculation - current output (s. page 3 – 55) => ΔI = ± 14.5 µA

3) Total error calculation - extra-low voltage input

⎛ |14.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |27 µV| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |0 - 100 mV| ⎠

= ± 117 µV

Total error –RTD input (4-wire operation)

Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Digital temperature Td:The digital temperature is the digitised value of the analogue sensor value of the Pt100/Ni100. The block diagram illustrates the measuring operation:

ΔΔΔΔΔTd ≤≤≤≤≤ ΔΔΔΔΔRTD / αααααT

Sensitivity αTmin (see note) For example: ΔRTD = ± 50 mΩ

Type αTmin ΔTdmax

Pt100 300 mΩ/K ± 0.16 K

Ni100 470 mΩ/K ± 0.1 K

Please note:The sensitivity rating αααααTmin is a „worst-case“ assessment and is generally better.The maximum digital temperature Td of afaulty Pt100/Ni100 RTD can be calculatedas follows:

For example: Assumption: Probe: Pt100, TU = 40 °C, MBA = 0 °C, MBE = 100 °C,age = 10 years, output: 0...20 mA

1) Accuracy calculation - RTD input (s. page 3 – 55) => ΔRTD = ± 71.25 mΩ


3) Total error calculation – RTD input

⎛ |22.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |0.24K| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |0 - 100 °C| ⎠

= ± 0.35 K

Total Error – Extra-low Voltage Input and RTD Input

Temperature measuring amplifier IM34-11-Ex-i/IM34-12-Ex-Ri

MBA = lower measuring range valueMBE = upper measuring range value

��

�

� �

�

Td

3


Total error –thermoelement input

Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

External cold junction point compensation: ΔΔΔΔΔTd = = = = = ΔΔΔΔΔmV / αααααTmin + + + + + ΔΔΔΔΔTdCJC 1)

Internal cold junction point compensation: ΔΔΔΔΔTd = = = = = ΔΔΔΔΔmV / αααααTmin + + + + + ΔΔΔΔΔKSI (ΔΔΔΔΔKSI = ± 1.5 K)

Sensitivity αTmin (see note) Example:ΔmV = ± 10 µV

Type αTmin ΔTdThermo

J 41 µV/K ± 0.24 K

B 4.0 µV/K ± 2.50 K

E 45 µV/K ± 0.22 K

K 30 µV/K ± 0.33 K

L 39 µV/K ± 0.25 K

N 21 µV/K ± 0.47 K

R 3.7 µV/K ± 2.70 K

S 3.9 µV/K ± 2.56 K

T 28 µV/K ± 0.36 K

Please note:The sensitivity rating αααααTmin is a „worst-case“ assessment and is generally better.The maximum digital temperature Td of afaulty thermovoltage can be calculated asfollows: when using, e.g., type B, thesensitivity rises from 4 µV/K at 400 °C upto 12 µV/K at 1600 °C. At 50 µV and400 °C the error is 12.5 K and at 1600 °Cit drops to 4 K. Thus it becomes clear thattype B is better suited for highertemperatures.

1) In case of external cold junctioncompensation via RTD the digitaltemperature also has to be considered.

Example for external cold junction compensation CJC: Assumption:Thermoelement type T, external cold junction compensation via Ni100 (2-wire operation),MBA = 500 °C, MBE = 1000 °C, TU = 60 °C, age = 3 years, output: 0...20 mA


2) Accuracy calculation - RTD input (s. page 3 – 55) => ΔRTD = ± 79 mΩ(in case of 2-wire operation multiply by 2 => ΔRTD = ± 158.5 mΩ

3) ΔTdCJC = 158.5 mΩ/300 mΩ/K = 0.52 K

4) ΔTdThermo = 48 µV/28 µV/K = 1.7 K

5) ΔTd = ΔTdCJC + ΔTdThermo = 2.23 K


7) Total error calculation – thermoelement input

⎛ |25.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |2.23 K| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |550 °C - 1000 °C| ⎠

= ± 2.87 K

Total Error – Thermoelement Input with External Cold Junction Compensation

Digital temperature Td:The digital temperature is the digitised value of the analogue sensor value of thethermoelement. The block diagram illustrates the measuring operation:

�

� �

�

Td


Total Error – Thermoelement Input with Internal Cold Junction Compensation

Example for internal cold junction compensation:Assumption: Thermoelement type J, internal cold junction compensation via Ni100,MBA = 400 °C, MBE = 800 °C,TU = 40 °C, age = 5 years, output: 4...20 mA


2) ΔTd = 30 µV/41µV/K + 1.5 K = 2.23 K



⎛ |17.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |2.23 K| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |400 °C -800 °C| ⎠

= ± 2.66 K


Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Temperature Measuring Amplifier IM34-11-Ex-i/IM34-12-Ex-Ri

3


Temperature MeasuringAmplifierIM34-11Ex-CiIM34-12Ex-CRi*)1-channel

��

��!�

��

%�&

%!�!��





• Input for Ni100/Pt100 resistancetemperature detectors, thermo-elements and millivolt signals

• Parameterisation and configurationwith the software tool "Device TypeManager“ (DTM) via PC

• Current output 0/4…20 mA, limitvalue relay (IM34-12Ex-CRi only)


• Adjust. analogue output performancein case of errors in the input circuit


• *) Device also available withcage-clamps, Type designation:IM34-12Ex-CRi-CC,Ident-no.: 7506640

��

��!4�

��

%�&

�

%!�!��

-�.� � �

H.��;D��

The single channel temperature measuringamplifier IM34-1.Ex-... is designed toevaluate the temperature-dependentvariations of Ni100/Pt100 resistancetemperature detectors, thermoelementtypes B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S and T or lowvoltages in a range of -160...+160 mV andto reproduce these values as temperature-linear current signals of 0/4…20 mA.The type IM34-12Ex-CRi is equipped withan additional relay output to monitor a limitvalue for under- and overrrange conditions.The input circuit of the measuring amplifiers isalso suited for connection of 2-, 3- or 4-wireNi100/Pt100 resistors. The Ni100/Pt100input may be used for external cold junctioncompensation for the thermoelements or asan independent measuring input. The soft-ware tool "Device Type Manager - DTM“ isneeded to configure and parameterise thedevices via PC. For this, the temperaturemeasuring amplifier is connected to the PCvia the 3.5 mm front panel jack. The premoul-

ded transmission cable can be ordered withTURCK under the type name IM-PROG(ident.-no. 6890422). The following settingscan be made via the DTM:– connection mode (2, 3 or 4-wire)– lower measuring range value– upper measuring range value– limit value (IM34-12Ex-CRi only)– input circuit monitoring for

wire-break– current output performance in case of

errors in the inputcircuit: 0 or > 22 mA– internal or external cold junction

compensation– output current (0/4...20 mA)– unit of temperature (°C or °K)– mode (RTD, thermoelement,

low voltage, line compensation)The signals are transformed according toITS90 IEC 584 for thermoelements andIEC 751 for PT100 RTDs and provided astemperature-linear signals at the currentoutput.

IM34-12Ex-CRi

IM34-11Ex-Ci��

��

3

!

��

��2�

�0#

� -.

��

,��

��-#�*��B(-0)2

C-

-�.�

��+++��$%01��!��

0�#

�3�

�#$"

��

��

3

!

��

��

��

�

2�

�

0#�

-.

��

,��

I�

��-#�*��B(-0)2

C-

-�.�

��+++��$%01��!��

� ��"%#��"##� ��"%�!��J� �%

0�#

�3�

�#$"


Temperature Measuring Amplifier IM34-11Ex-Ci/IM34-12Ex-CRi

Type IM34-11Ex-Ci IM34-12Ex-CRiIdent.-no. 7506633 7506632

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input and output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms, test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Input circuit intrinsically safe according to EN 50020version Ni100 and Pt100 (IEC 751), 2, 3 and 4-wire technologymeasuring range -200...800 °C (Pt100), -60...250 °C (Ni100)thermoelements B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T (ITS 90/IEC 584), L (DIN 43710)extra-low voltages with a measuring span of -160 mV...+160 mV

Resistor current Pt100/Ni100 approx. 200 µA

Output circuitscurrent output 0/4…20 mA (load ≤ 600 Ω) 0/4…20 mA (load ≤ 600 Ω)Relay output – 1 normally open contact– Switching voltage – ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDC– Switching current – ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity – ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Switching frequency – ≤ 10 Hz– Switching hysteresis – programmable– Contact materials: – Ag alloy + 3 µm Au

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 02 ATEX 1898 / TÜV 06 ATEX 552978 X TÜV 02 ATEX 1898 / TÜV 06 ATEX 552978 XInput circuit– Max. values

No-load voltage U0 5 V 5 VShort-circuit current I0 2 mA 2 mAPower P0 2.6 mW 2.6 mW

Internal inductances/capacitances Li /Ci 0.2 mH/– 0.2 mH/–Max. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1000 mH/100 µF 1000 mH/100 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 1000 mH/1000 µF 1000 mH/1000 µF– Ex nL IIC 100 mH/3,6 µF 100 mH/3,6 µF– Ex nL IIB 100 mH/18 µF 100 mH/18 µFMarking of the Device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Transfer characteristicsAccuracy see page 3 – 61Total error see from page 3 – 62 onRise time (10 %…90 %) < 1 sRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 1 sResponse time < 1 s

LED indications– Power green green– Error red red– Switching status – yellow






��5

��

��

3


Accuracy Ratings



ΔmV = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)





ΔRTD = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)




Basic accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Long-term stabilityα = 5 µA => β = 0.5 µA/K => χ = 1 µA/p. a. =>250 ppm of final value (20 mA) 25 ppm of final value (20 mA) 50 ppm of final value (20 mA)

ΔI = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)




ΔKSI = ± 1.5 K

Note:If the cables of the thermo-elements arerouted up to the temperature measuringamplifier, TURCK suggests the applicationof a cold junction compensation moduleIM-3-CJT (Ident-no.: 6900524). Thisensures a best possible accuracy.



Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔmV| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔmV| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

⎛ |14.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |27 µV| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |0 - 100 mV| ⎠

= ± 117 µV


Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠




Type αTmin ΔTdmax

Pt100 300 mΩ/K ± 0.16 K

Ni100 470 mΩ/K ± 0.1 K


In case of display via the DTM, the totalerror is reduced to the digitaltemperature Td.

⎛ |22.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |0.24 K| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |0 - 100 °C| ⎠

= ± 0.35 K











��

�

� �

�

Td


3



Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠





J 41 µV/K ± 0.24 K

B 4.0 µV/K ± 2.50 K

E 45 µV/K ± 0.22 K

K 30 µV/K ± 0.33 K

L 39 µV/K ± 0.25 K

N 21 µV/K ± 0.47 K

R 3.7 µV/K ± 2.70 K

S 3.9 µV/K ± 2.56 K

T 28 µV/K ± 0.36 K

Please note:The sensitivity rating αααααTmin is a „worst-case“ assessment and is generally better.The maximum digital temperature Td of afaulty thermovoltage can be calculated asfollows: When using, e.g., type B, thesensitivity rises from 4 µV/K at 400 °C upto 12 µV/K at 1600 °C. At 50 µV and400 °C the error is 12.5 K and at 1600 °Cit drops to 4 K. Thus it becomes clear thattype B is better suited for highertemperatures.


1) With external cold junction compensationvia RTD the digital temperature also has tobe considered.




3) ΔTdCJC = 158.5 mΩ/300 mΩ/K = 0.52 K





⎛ |25.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |2.23 K| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |550 °C - 1000 °C| ⎠

= ± 2.87 K



�

� �

�

Td



Example for internal cold junction compensation: Assumption:Thermoelement type J, internal cold junction compensation via Ni100,MBA = 400 °C, MBE = 800 °C, TU = 40 °C, age = 5 years, output: 4...20 mA


2) ΔTd = 30 µV/41µV/K + 1.5 K = 2.23 K



⎛ |17.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |2.23 K| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |400 °C -800 °C| ⎠

= ± 2.66 K


Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠


3


Temperature MeasuringAmplifierIM34-11Ex-Ci/K601-channel





• Input for resistance temperaturedetectors (RTD), thermoelements(TC) and millivolt signals

• Parameterisation and configurationwith the software tool„Device Type Manager“ (DTM) viapersonal computer



• Adjustable analogue outputperformance in case of errorsin the input circuit


Thermo- „Fast Mode“ „Normal Mode“ Temperature rangeelement 200 µV/s 80 µV/s

Typ B 20 K/s 8 K/s 1100 °CTyp E 2,6 K/s 1 K/s 0...1000 °CTyp J 3,5 K/s 1,5 K/s 0...1200 °CTyp K 5 K/s 1,6 K/s 0...1372 °CTyp L 3,5 K/s 1,5 K/s 0...900 °CTyp N 5,7 K/s 2,3 K/s 100...1300 °CTyp R 20 K/s 8 K/s 400 °CTyp S 18 K/s 7 K/s 400...1768 °CTyp T 4 K/s 1,5 K/s 150 °C

��

��!��5�

��

%�&

%!�!��

-�.� � �

��

��

3

!

��

��2�

�0#

�

0�#

�3�

-.

��

,��

�#

��-#�*��B(-0)2

C-

-�.�

��+++��$%01��!��

$"

The single-channel temperature measuringamplifier IM34-11Ex-Ci/K60 is designedto evaluate the temperature-dependent

variations of Ni100/Pt100 resistance tem-perature detectors (RTD), thermo-element(TC) types B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S and T orlow voltages in a range of -160...+160 mVand to reproduce these values as temper-ature-linear current signals of 0/4…20 mA.The input circuit of the measuring amplifieris also suited for connection of 2-, 3- or 4-wire RTDs. The RTD input may be used forexternal cold junction compensation for thethermoelements or as an independentmeasuring input. If the cables of the thermo-elements are routed up to the tempera-

ture measuring amplifier, TURCK suggeststhe application of a cold junction compen-sation module IM-3-CJT (Ident-no.:6900524). This ensures a best possibleaccuracy.In order to increase the measurementspeed with fast temperature changes onthermoelements, the device switches intothe “Fast Mode” after 200 ms at the verylatest after a gradient of 200 µV/s hasbeen exceeded.Thereafter the cycle time of the thermalvoltage measurement is < 80 ms.


Temperature Measuring Amplifier IM34-11Ex-Ci/K60

Type IM34-11Ex-Ci/K60Ident-no. 7506636

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input and output circuit and supply


Input circuit intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Version RTD: Ni100 and Pt100 (IEC 751), 2, 3 and 4-

wire technology, measuring span:Pt100: -200...800 °C , Ni100:-60...250 °CTC: B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T (ITS 90/IEC 584),L (DIN 43710),measuring span:B: 400...1750 °C, E: -100...1000 °C,J: -100...1200 °C, K: -180...1372 °C,N: -180...1300 °C, R: -50...1750 °C,S: -50...1750 °C, T: -200 ... 400 °C,L: -200 ... 900 °C,extra-low volt., measuring span: -160...+160 mVResistor current Pt100/Ni100approx. 200 µA

Output circuitCurrent output 0/4…20 mA (load ≤ 600 Ω)

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 02 ATEX 1898 / TÜV 06 ATEX 552978 XInput circuit– No-load voltage U0 5 V– Short-circuit current I0 2 mA– Power P0 2.6 mWInternal inductances/capacitances Li /Ci 0.2 mH/–Max. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1000 mH/100 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 1000 mH/1000 µF– Ex nL IIC 100 mH/3,6 µF– Ex nL IIB 100 mH/18 µFMarking of the Device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Transfer characteristicsAccuracy see page 3 – 67Total error see from page 3 – 68 onRise time (10…90 %), Release time (90…10 %),Response time „Normal Mode“ „Fast Mode“– RTDs < 1,2 s –– TCs < 200 ms < 80 ms

LED indications– Power green– Error red






��5

��

��

This will mean that no wire-break moni-toring and no measurement of the coldjunction temperature will occur. After thegradient drops below 80 µV/s the devicewill switch back to “Normal Mode”.In theprevious table the approximate tempera-ture gradients for the corres-pondingthermal elements (thermo-couples) arestated.

NOTE:The temperature gradients in the table areonly approximate values which apply forthe predefined temperature ranges. Exactdetermination of the temperature gradientis only possible when the characteristic ofthe respective sensor is used at thecorresponding operating point.The software tool „Device Type Manager -DTM“ is needed to configure and para-meterise the devices via PC. For this, thetemperature measuring amplifier isconnected to the PC via the 3.5 mm frontpanel jack. The premoulded transmissioncable can be ordered with TURCK underthe type name IM-PROG (ident-no.6890422).

The following settings can be made via theDTM:– Measurement mode (RTD, TC,

low-voltage, junction compensation)– Tag number designation

(32 freely selectable characters)– Unit of temperature (°C or °F)– RTD connection mode (2, 3 and

4-wire technology)– Cold junction compensation

(internal or with external RTD)– Measurement range mapped to current

source– Output current (0/4...20 mA)– Current output performance in case

of errors in the input circuit:0 or > 22 mA

The signals are transformed according toITS90 IEC 584 for thermoelements andIEC 751 for PT100 RTDs and provided astemperature-linear signals at the currentoutput.

3


Accuracy Ratings



ΔmV = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)





ΔRTD = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)





ΔI = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)




ΔKSI = ± 1.5 K



Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔmV| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔmV| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

⎛ |14.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |27 µV| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |0 - 100 mV| ⎠

= ± 117 µV


Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠




Type αTmin ΔTdmax

Pt100 300 mΩ/K ± 0.16 K

Ni100 470 mΩ/K ± 0.1 K



⎛ |22.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |0.24 K| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |0 - 100 °C| ⎠

= ± 0.35 K











��

�

� �

�

Td


3



Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠





J 41 µV/K ± 0.24 K

B 4.0 µV/K ± 2.50 K

E 45 µV/K ± 0.22 K

K 30 µV/K ± 0.33 K

L 39 µV/K ± 0.25 K

N 21 µV/K ± 0.47 K

R 3.7 µV/K ± 2.70 K

S 3.9 µV/K ± 2.56 K

T 28 µV/K ± 0.36 K







3) ΔTdCJC = 158.5 mΩ/300 mΩ/K = 0.52 K





⎛ |25.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |2.23 K| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |550 °C - 1000 °C| ⎠

= ± 2.87 K



�

� �

�

Td





2) ΔTd = 30 µV/41µV/K + 1.5 K = 2.23 K



⎛ |17.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |2.23 K| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |400 °C -800 °C| ⎠

= ± 2.66 K


Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠


3


• Universal 1-channel temperaturemeasuring amplifier with removableterminal blocks




• Input for Ni100/Pt100 RTDs, thermo-elements, millivolt signals, resistorsand potentiometers

• Parameterisation and configuration:– via the software tool “Device

Type Manager”– via front switches– via the current interface with

HART® protocol

• Current output 0/4…20 mA, threelimit value relays with one normallyopen contact each

• Freely parameterisable measuredvalue memory


• Adjustable analogue output perfor-mance in case of errors in the inputcircuit


The single-channel temperature measuringamplifier IM34-14Ex-CDRi is designed toevaluate the temperature-dependent varia-tions of Ni100/Pt100 resistance tempera-ture detectors or thermoelement types B,E, J, K, L, N, R, S and T and to reproducethese values as temperature-linear currentsignals of 0/4…20 mA.Furthermore, resistances, potentiometersor low voltages can be mapped linearly onthe current signal.

The device is equipped with three relayoutputs and a current output 0/4...20 mA.

The signals are transformed according toITS90 IEC 584 for thermoelements and

Temperature MeasuringAmplifierIM34-14Ex-CDRi1-channel

IEC 751 for PT100 RTDs and provided astemperature-linear signals at the currentoutput.

The measured value is written permanentlyinto a ring buffer with 8000 measuringpoints. A predefined trigger event isnecessary to stop the write procedure,e.g. when a limit value is exceeded. Therecorded behaviour of the signal can beread out afterwards.

Cold junction point compensation withthermocouples is implemented using anexternally connected Pt100/Ni100resistor, an internal Ni100 resistor or via anadjustable constant temperature.

��!�4�

��

%!�!��

�"

#$%

� ��

� ��

-�.� ��

H.��;D��

-� �$��

��

��

�!��

��

-�.� 2��0#

�

�,

��

��

�3

��

I�

I�

I�

��"%#��"##

��"%�!��J��%

3

�

�

-.

C-

��

��

,

�

��3�

�#

��0�#

$"

K

��+++��$%01��!��

��-#�*��B(-0)2�E%0�F�$�'�$


Type IM34-14Ex-CDRiIdent-no. 7506634

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input and output circuit and supply


Input circuit intrinsically safe according to EN 50020– Ni100 and Pt100 acc. to IEC 751 (2-, 3- 4-wire technology)– Thermoelements B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T acc. to ITS 90/IEC 548, L acc. to DIN 43710– Extra-low voltages -160...+160 mV– Resistor 2-, 3-, 4-wire technology, 0...1500 Ω– Potentiometer max. 1500 Ω (3-wire technology)

Output circuitsCurrent output 0/4...20 mA (load ≤ 600 Ω)Relay outputs 3 normally open (N.O.)– Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDC– Switching current ≤ 2 A– Switching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W– Switching frequency ≤ 10 Hz– Contakt material Ag-alloy +3 µm Au– Switching hysteresis adjustable

Measured value memoryNumber of measuring points 8000Measurement interval and trigger event adjustable via DTMPre-trigger/post-trigger length,minimum...maximum (increment size): 1st range 0 s...600 s (1 s),

2nd range 10 min...600 min (1 min)3rd range 10 h...600 h (1 h)

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 05 ATEX 2877 / TÜV 05 ATEX 2889 X /IECEx TUN 05.0014X

Input circuit– Max. values

Voltage U0 5 VCurrent I0 9 mAPower P0 11 mW

Characteristic curve linearInternal inductances 75 µHExternal Inductances/Capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 5 mH/2,9 µF– [EEx ia] IIB 10 mH/13 µFMarking of device É II 3G EEx nA nC [nL] IIC/IIB T4 /

[Ex ia] IIC/IIB and Ex nA nC [nL] IIC/IIB

LED indications– Power green– Error red– Switching status yellow

Housing 20 poles, 27 mm wide, Polycarbonat/ABS,flammability class V-0 per UL94





Temperature Measuring Amplifier IM34-14Ex-CDRi

Parameterisation and configuration isimplemented using the software tool“Device Type Manager” (DTM) or via theanalogue current interface using a modem.Furthermore, a reduced basicparameterisation requirement is possiblevia front panel switches and a display.

If the DTM is used, all settings areimplemented on the PC.The temperature measurement amplifier issimply connected to the PC via a 3.5 mmjack plug on the front of the device. Theprefabricated data transmission cable isavailable from TURCK under thedesignation IM-PROG (Ident-no.6890422).

The following settings are possible:– Type of measurement sensor or

resistor– Internal, external or constant cold

junction compensation withthermoelements

– Connection of the sensor with 2-, 3-or 4-wire technology

– Lower measurement range limitsadjustable in increments of:1 K, 1 mV, 1 Ω or 1 %

– Upper measurement range limitsadjustable in increments of:1 K, 1 mV, 1 Ω or 1 %

– Relay operating mode:overtemperature, undertemperature,window function, alarm function

– Current output performance in caseof errors in the input circuit:0 or > 22 mA

– Parameterisation of the ring bufferwith write interval, definition of atrigger event, etc.

��

��

�,

3


Input circuit configuration Measuring span Minimum measuring span

Start value End value

Ni100 and Pt100 (IEC 751)

– Pt100 -200 °C 800 °C 25 °C

– Ni100: -60 °C 250 °C 25 °C

Thermoelements B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T(ITS 90/IEC 548), L (DIN 43710)

– Type B 400 °C 1750 °C 200 °C

– Type E -100 °C 1000 °C 50 °C

– Type J -100 °C 1200 °C 50 °C

– Type K -180 °C 1372 °C 50 °C

– Type N -180 °C 1300 °C 100 °C

– Type R -50 °C 1750 °C 200 °C

– Type S -50 °C 1750 °C 200 °C

– Type T -200 °C 400 °C 50 °C

– Type L -200 °C 900 °C 50 °C

Extra-low voltage -160 mV +160 mV 10 mV

Resistor 0 Ω 1500 Ω 10 Ω

Potentiometer 0 % 100 % 1 %

Measuring spans

Transfer characteristics

Accuracy see page 3 – 74Total error see from page 3 – 75 onRise time (10 %…90 %) < 1 sRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 1 sResponse time < 1 s


Accuracy Ratings



ΔmV = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)





ΔRTD = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)





ΔI = ± (α + β · |TU - 25 °C| + χ · age)




ΔKSI = ± 1.5 K


3



Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔmV| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔmV| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

⎛ |14.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |27 µV| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |0 - 100 mV| ⎠

= ± 117 µV


Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠




Type αTmin ΔTdmax

Pt100 300 mΩ/K ± 0.16 K

Ni100 470 mΩ/K ± 0.1 K



⎛ |22.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |0.24 K| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |0 - 100 °C| ⎠

= ± 0.35 K











��

�

� �

�

Td



Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠





J 41 µV/K ± 0.24 K

B 4.0 µV/K ± 2.50 K

E 45 µV/K ± 0.22 K

K 30 µV/K ± 0.33 K

L 39 µV/K ± 0.25 K

N 21 µV/K ± 0.47 K

R 3.7 µV/K ± 2.70 K

S 3.9 µV/K ± 2.56 K

T 28 µV/K ± 0.36 K







3) ΔTdCJC = 158.5 mΩ/300 mΩ/K = 0.52 K





⎛ |25.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |2.23 K| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |550 °C - 1000 °C| ⎠

= ± 2.87 K



�

� �

�

Td


3





2) ΔTd = 30 µV/41µV/K + 1.5 K = 2.23 K



⎛ |17.5 µA| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |2.23 K| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |400 °C -800 °C| ⎠

= ± 2.66 K


Output: 0...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 20 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

Output: 4...20 mA

⎛ |ΔI| ⎞ΔG = ± ⎜ + |ΔTd| ⎟

⎜ 16 mA ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ |MBA - MBE| ⎠

3


The single-channel data transmitter IM35-11Ex-Hi/... is designed to transfer standardgalvanically isolated current signals fromthe safe area to the explosion hazardousarea in a 1:1 transmission mode.

In addition to the analogue signal, digitalHART® communication signals can betransferred bidirectionally.

Typical applications are the control ofI/P converters (e.g. at control valves/actuators) or of indicator displays inexplosion hazardous areas.

The actuator is connected to the outputterminals 1/2. Handheld terminals [HHT]may be connected to the output terminalsand input terminals 7/10.

The device is equipped with test sockets(Ø 2 mm) on the removable terminalblocks for signal control.

• 1-channel HART® analoguedata transmitter with removableterminal blocks

• Intrinsically safe output circuitEEx ia




• Transmission of current signals0/4…20 mA

• Supply of intelligentactuators with HART®

communication

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %



• Test sockets, Ø 2 mm


HART®-Analogue DataTransmitterIM35-11Ex-Hi/24VDC1-channel

��

� �

��

��6��1�� !

��

��

-�.�

��

��

��

��

��

,��

��+++��$%

E%0�F

2�

�-

��

-�.�

EE��+++��$%

-.


Type IM35-11Ex-Hi/24VDCIdent.-no. 7506516

Supply voltageUB 19...29 VDCRipple Wpp ≤ 10 %Power consumption ≤ 1.9 WGalvanic isolation between output and input circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms

Test voltage 4 kVrms

Input circuitInput current 0...20 mA (up to 24 mA can be transferred at a load of ≤ 430 Ω)Input resistance 110 Ω

Output circuit intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output current 0/4…20 mA, (up to 24 mA can be transferred at a load of ≤ 430 Ω)Load ≤ 600 Ω

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 03 ATEX 2311 / TÜV 06 ATEX 553057 XOutput circuitMax. values– No-load voltage U0 15.9 V– Short-circuit current I0 60 mA– Internal resistance Ri 528 Ω– Power Po 470 mWInternal inductances/capacitances Li/Ci -/ 5 nFMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 10 mH /860 nF (alt. 0.5 mH/2.2 µF)– [EEx ia] IIC 5 mH /140 nF (alt. 0.5 mH/330 nF)– Ex nL IIB 10 mH/1.7 µF (alt. 0,5 mH/3,9 µF)– Ex nL IIC 5 mH/290 nF (alt. 0.5 mH/640 nF)Marking of the Device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Transfer characteristicsLinearity error at limit value ≤ 0.1 % of final value.Measuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 % of final value.Long-term error ≤ 0.05 %/yearEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.02 % of final value.Effect of supply voltage impedance ≤ 0.05 % of final value.Ambient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/KRise time (10 %…90 %) < 90 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 90 ms







HART® Analogue Data Transmitter IM35-11Ex-Hi

��5

��

��

3


The two-channel data transmitter IM35-22Ex-Hi/... is designed to transfer standardgalvanically isolated current signals fromthe safe area to the explosion hazardousarea in a 1:1 transmission mode.

In addition to the analogue signal, digitalHART®communication signals can betransferred bidirectionally.

Typical applications are the control ofI/P converters (e.g. at control valves/actuators) or of indicator displaysin explosion hazardous areas.

The actuators are connected to the outputterminals 1/2 and 4/5. Handheld terminals[HHT] may be connected to the outputterminals and input terminals 7/10 and 8/9.

The device is equipped with test sockets(Ø 2 mm) on the removeable terminalblocks for signal control.

• 2-channel HART® analoguedata transmitter with removeableterminal blocks

• Intrinsically safe output circuitsEEx ia




• Transmission ofcurrent signals 0/4…20 mA

• Supply of intelligentactuators with HART®

communication

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %



• Test sockets, Ø 2 mm


HART®-Analogue DataTransmitterIM35-22Ex-Hi/24VDC2-channel

��

� �

��

��6��1�� !

��

��

-�.�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��+++��$%

E%0�F

2�

�-

��

��

,��

��

��

��+++��$%

E%0�F

�-

�

�

�

�

-�.�

EE��+++��$%

EE��+++��$%

-.


Type IM35-22Ex-Hi/24VDCIdent.-no. 7506515

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCRipple Wpp ≤ 10 %Power consumption 2.2 WGalvanic isolation between output and input circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Input circuitsInput current 0...20 mA (up to 24 mA can be transferred at a load of ≤ 430 Ω)Input resistance 110 Ω

Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output current 0/4…20 mA, (up to 24 mA can be transferred at a load of ≤ 430 Ω)Load ≤ 600 Ω

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 03 ATEX 2311 / TÜV 06 ATEX 553057 XOutput circuitMax. values– No-load voltage U0 15.9 V– Short-circuit current I0 60 mA– Internal resistance Ri 528 Ω– Power Po 470 mWInternal inductances/capacitances Li/Ci -/ 5 nFMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIB 10 mH /860 nF (alt. 0.5 mH/2.2 µF)– [EEx ia] IIC 5 mH /140 nF (alt. 0.5 mH/330 nF)– Ex nL IIB 10 mH/1.7 µF (alt. 0,5 mH/3,9 µF)– Ex nL IIC 5 mH/290 nF (alt. 0.5 mH/640 nF)Marking of the Device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


Transfer characteristicsLinearity error at limit value ≤ 0.1 % of final value.Measuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 % of final value.Long-term error ≤ 0.05 %/yearEffect of load impedance ≤ 0.02 % of final value.Effect of supply voltage impedance ≤ 0.05 % of final value.Ambient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/KRise time (10 %…90 %) < 90 msRelease time (90 %…10 %) < 90 ms







HART® Analogue Data Transmitter IM35-22Ex-Hi

��5

��

��

3





• Transmission of0…20 mA current signals

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %



The MK35-11Ex0-Li/... single channelanalogue data repeaters are used toisolate and convert standard currentsignals which are passed 1:1 withoutattenuation from the explosion non-hazardous area to hazardous area.

Typical repeater applications includedriving I/P transducers (e. g. for valvecontrol) or display devices locatedin hazardous areas.

��

��

��

�"��#$��!

��6��

� �

�� !

-�.�

Analogue Data RepeaterMK35-11Ex0-Li/24VDC1-channel

If the transfer of digital information toHART® terminals is required in addition toanalogue data transfer, the HART®-compatible Ex output isolatorsIM35-11Ex-Hi/24VDC andIM35-22Ex-Hi/24VDC are available(see page 3 – 79 and 3 – 81).


2�

��

��

��

,��

!��

��

3

�G

�+++��$%

�+++��$%-�.� -.


Type MK35-11Ex0-Li/24VDCIdent-No. 7506501



Input circuitsCurrent input– Input resistance ≤ 100 Ω– Operating characteristics 0… 20 mA (< 40 mA)

Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Current output (1 and 2)Output current 0…20 mALoad impedance ≤ 500 Ω

Ex-approvals acc. certificate of conformity TÜV 01 ATEX 1659Maximum values– No load voltage U0 13.8 V– Short-circuit current I0 61 mA– Internal resistance Ri 362 ΩMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia/ib] IIC 10 mH/760 nF– [EEx ia/ib] IIC 25 mH/4.9 µFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 % (linearity tolerance is included in the measuring tolerance)Load impedance ≤ 0,01 %Effect of load impedance ≤ 0,01 %Ambient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/K of final valuePulse rise time (10 %...90 %) < 50 msRelease time (90 %..0.10 %) < 50 ms


Housing 8-pole, 18 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 conform to UL 94




with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature range -25…+60 °C

Analogue Data Repeater MK35-11Ex0-Li

�

�

,�

3





• Transmission of0...10 V voltage signals

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %



The MK35-11Ex0-LU/... single channelanalogue data repeaters are used toisolate and convert standard voltagesignals which are passed 1:1 withoutattenuation from the explosion non-hazardous area to hazardous area.

A typical repeater application includesdisplay devices located in hazardousareas.


Analogue Data RepeaterMK35-11Ex0-LU/24VDC1-channel

��

��

��

�"��#$��!

��6��

� �

�� !

-�.�

2�

��4�

��

��3

��

,��

!��

��

�

�

�G

�+++��"01��4�

-�.�

�+++��"

-.


Type MK35-11Ex0-LU/24VDCIdent-No. 7506701



Input circuitsCurrent input– Input resistance 50 kΩ– Operating characteristics 0...10 V

Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Voltage output (3 and 4)Output voltage 0...10 VLoad resistance ≥ 1 kΩ

Ex-approvals acc. certificate of conformity TÜV 01 ATEX 1659Maximum values– No load voltage U0 13.8 V– Short-circuit current I0 61 mA– Internal resistance Ri 722 ΩMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia/ib] IIC 25 mH/0,76 µF– [EEx ia/ib] IIC 50 mH/4.9 µFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 % (linearity tolerance is included in the measuring tolerance)Load impedance ≤ 0,01 %Effect of load impedance ≤ 0,01 %Ambient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/K of final valuePulse rise time (10 %...90 %) < 50 msRelease time (90 %..0.10 %) < 50 ms


Housing 8-pole, 18 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 conform to UL 94




with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature range -25…+60 °C

�

�

,�

Analogue Data Repeater MK35-11Ex0-LU

3


PotentiometerTransducersIM36-11Ex-i/24VDCIM36-11Ex-U/24VDC1-channel

The potentiometer transducers IM36-11Ex-i... and IM36-11Ex-U... isolatesignals from 3-wire or 5-wire potentio-meters and transfer these as standardanalogue signals from the hazardous tothe non-hazardous area. The resistancevalue of the potentiometer’s wiper contact,ranging from 0 Ω to the nominal resistancevalue (final value) of the potentiometer, isdetected and processed linearly.A potentiometer is defined by its nominalvalue. Any potentiometer with a nominalresistance value within a range of800...20000 Ω may be connected. Thuscommon potentiometer types, e.g. with anominal resistance value of 1 kΩ or 10 kΩ,may be used.The permissible line resistance may notexceed 50 Ω at a potentiometerresistance of 800 Ω.There are devices with a current output of0/4...20 mA (IM36-11Ex-i...) or a voltage

IM36-11Ex-i...

IM36-11Ex-U...

��

� �

��

��5��

��

-�.�

��

��

�

�� !��=�=��"� ?�� !��

��#��!�

��=!��L��

• 1-channel potentimeter transducerswith removable terminal blocks



• Galvanic isolation and transmissionof potentiometer signals fromexplosion hazardous areas

• Output circuit 0/4…20 mAor 0/2...10 V

• Linearity ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.1 %

• Temperature drift ≤≤≤≤≤ 0.02 %/K v. E.

output of 0/2...10 V (IM36-11Ex- U...).The devices feature galvanic isolationbetween input circuit, output circuit andpower supply.


�+++��$%9�� ;�701��

-. 3

!��

��

��

,��

�

��" M��B�

��+++0$

0$�� +++��

2�

-�.�

�+++��"01��4�

-. 3

!��

��

��

,��

�

��" M��B�

��+++0$

0$�� +++��

2�

-�.�

��

� �

��

��5��

��


Type IM36-11Ex-i/24VDC IM36-11Ex-U/24VDCIdent-no. 7509525 7509526

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDC 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 % ≤ 10 %Current consumption ≤ 60 mA ≤ 60 mAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit



Input circuit intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Potentiometer input 3/5-wire circuit 3/5-wire circuitPotentiometer resistance 800...20 000 Ω 800...20 000 ΩLine resistance ≤ 50 Ω at 800 Ω potentiometer resistance ≤ 50 Ω at 800 Ω potentiometer resistanceVoltage at potentiometer 5 V 5 V

Output circuit current output voltage output, short-circuit protectedLoad impedance ≤ 500 Ω –Output current 0…20 mA –Load resistance – ≥ 1 kΩOutput current – 0...10 V

Ex-Approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 99 ATEX 1405 TÜV 99 ATEX 1405Maximum values from both inputs– No load voltage U0 13.8 V 13.8 V– Short-circuit current I0 35 mA 35 mA– Power P0 121 mW 121 mWMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 20 mH / 760 nF 20 mH / 760 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 100 mH / 4.9 µF 100 mH / 4.9 µFOperating temperature Tu -20…+60 °C -20…+60 °CMarking of devices É II (1) G [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) G [EEx ia] IIC

Transfer characteristicsLinearity tolerance of setpoint adjustment ≤ 0.1 % of final value ≤ 0.1 % of final valueMeasuring tolerance ≤ 0.2 % (typ. 0.1 %) ≤ 0.2 % (typ. 0.1 %)Long term error 0.1 %/year 0.1 %/yearAmbient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.02 %/K of final value ≤ 0.02 %/K of final valuePulse rise time (10 %...90 %) ≤ 100 ms ≤ 100 msRelease time (90 %...10 %) ≤ 100 ms ≤ 100 ms







��5

��

��

Potentiometer Transducers IM36-11Ex-i/IM36-11Ex-U

4


LOGIC CONTROLLERSLOGIC CONTROLLERS


Logic ControllersSelection Guide

Housing Styleinterfacemodulmultimodulmultisafe®

Hou

sing

Type

●

●

●

●

1 1 1 1

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

●

●

●

● ● ● ●

22U 2U 2U 2U

● ●

●

● ● ● ●

●

● ● ●

11 13 17 21

● ● ● ●

● ●

1 1 1 1

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

3 3 3 3

3S 3S 3S 3S● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

3 5 3 5

MS

41-1

2Ex0

-RM

S41

-22E

x0-R

MS

41-4

2Ex0

-RM

S43

-R

IM43

-13-

R

MK

43-1

11-R

● ●

1 1

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ●

1 11U 2U

● ●

● ●

7 9

MK

44-1

21-R

IM43

-14-

Ri

IM43

-13-

SR

IM43

-14-

SR

i

FunctionsPreset devicesPulse counter/reducerBistable amplifier relayAmplifier relay with logic functionsTeach function via push-buttons

Number of channels

IsolationBetween input and output circuitBetween output and power supplyBetween input and power supply

Input circuit per EN 60947-5-6Intrinsic. safe acc. to EN 50020Current input 0/4...20 mAVoltage input 0/2...10 VPt100NTC resistors

Input circuit monitoringWire-break and short-circuit,user programmable

Switching frequency≤ 10Hz

Output circuits per channelNumber of setpoint controlsRelay, NO(S) / SPDT(U) per channelTransistor, pnp, per channelCurrent output 0/4...20 mA

Alarm output

Switching optionsNO/NCuser programmable

Supply voltage10…30 VDC


Universal power supply20...250 VUC20...250 VAC/20...125 VDC


4


��

��

��

��

� � ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

!"

!"

!"

#��

$� $��

$��

%&� '��'��(((��)*

��+��*��+*

% %% %%%$��

#��

�

�

%+

�%

��+�,� ��)*

��

-��.�

��

�

$��

�

�

�%��

/��

Limit Value MonitorIM43-13-RIM43-14-Ri1-channel

The limit value monitors IM43-13R andIM43-14-Ri are single-channel devices andalternatively monitor measuring currents of0/4...20 mA or measuring voltages of0/2...10 V.

The three limit values are set via the sidecoded rotary switches.

In addition, a voltage of approx. 18 V (at35 mA max.) is provided, which can beused to power transmitters or sensors.

A green LED indicates that the device ispowered. Three yellow LEDs indicate theswitching status of the respective output.

The output mode and hysteresis areadjusted via DIP switches.

• 1-channel limit value monitorwith removable terminal blocks

• Input either viacurrent input 0/4...20 mA orvoltage input 0/2...10 V

• Supply of a two-wire orthree-wire transmitter/sensor

• Limit value adjustment via codedrotary switch

• Three relay outputs, each with onenormally open output

• Sealed relay with hard goldcontacts

• Current output of 0/4...20 mA.(IM43-14-Ri only)

• Universal operating voltage(20...250 VUC)

The type IM43-14-Ri is equipped with thefollowing additional functions:– For transfer to other devices

there is a galvanically isolated analoguecurrent output of 0/4...20 mA.

– The conversion of live-zero intodead-zero signals and vice-versa isselected via DIP switches. In the livezero mode the range of 4...20 mAis monitored. Outside this range(< 3,6 mA bzw. > 24 mA) anerror indication is given. In this casethe Power LED will illuminatered, the relays are de-energisedand an error current of 0 or > 22 mAis output.

– If a faulty transmitter causes a short-circuit, the relays are de-energised andan error current of 0 or > 22 mA isoutput.


Limit Value Monitor IM43-13-R/IM43-14-Ri

Type IM43-13-R IM43-14-RiIdent-no. 7540040 7540042

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUC 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 Hz 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 4.8 W ≤ 4.8 W

Clearances and creepagesInput circuit to output circuit ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm– output circuit to supply ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm– input circuit to supply ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm– test voltage 2 kV 2 kV

Input circuit current and voltage input current and voltage inputCurrent input– Input resistance < 50 Ω < 50 Ω– Operating values 0/4...20 mA (overload protected up to 24 mA) 0/4...20 mA (overload protected up to 24 mA)Voltage input– Input resistance > 50 kΩ > 50 kΩ– Operating values 0/2...10 V (overload protected up to 20 V) 0/2...10 V (overload protected up to 20 V)– Hysteresis (adjustable) 1; 2,5; 5; 10 % 1; 2,5; 5; 10 %Ambient temperature sensitivity 75 ppm/K 75 ppm/K

Output circuitRelay output three relay outputs three relay outputs– Contact configuration 1 normally open contact 1 normally open contact– Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC ≤ 250 VAC– Switching current ≤ 6 A ≤ 6 A– Switching capacity ≤ 1500 VA ≤ 1500 VACurrent output – 0/4...20 mA

LED indications– Power/error (2-colour LED) green/red green/red– Switching status yellow yellow






��

��

��

4


��

��

�

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

0)�1�2��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

!"

!"

!"

%&� '��'��(((��)*

��+��*��+*

�

�

�

�

#��

�

��+�,� ��)*

��

-��.�#��

$� $��

$��

% %% %%%$��

#��

%+

�%

�

$��

�

�

�%��

/��

��

��2�3��1��

��2�3��1��

��2�3 ��1��

��(((��)*%&� '��'��4��(((��)*

Limit value monitorIM43-13-SRIM43-14-SRi1-channel

The limit value monitors IM43-13-SR andIM43-14-SRi are single-channel devicesand alternatively monitor measuringcurrents of 0/4...20 mA or measuringvoltages of 0/2...10 V.

The three limit values are set via the frontpanel teach button.

In addition, a voltage of approx. 18 V (at35 mA max.) is provided, which can beused to power transmitters or sensors.

A green LED indicates that the device ispowered. Three yellow LEDs indicate theswitching status of the respective output.

The output mode is jumper programmableat terminals 5...8.

• 1-channel limit value monitorwith removable terminal blocks

• Input either viacurrent input 0/4...20 mA orvoltage input 0/2...10 V

• Supply of a two-wire or3-wire transmitter/sensor

• Limit value adjustment viaTeach button

• Three relay outputs, each with oneNormally open output

• Sealed relay with hard goldcontacts

• Current output of 0/4...20 mA.(IM43-14-SRi only)

• Universal operating voltage(20...250 VUC)

The type IM43-14-SRi is equipped withthe following additional functions:– For transfer to other devices

there is a galvanically isolated analoguecurrent output of 0/4...20 mA.

– The conversion of live-zero intodead-zero signals is determined by ajumper between terminals 5/9.In the live-zero mode the 4...20 mArange is monitored.Outside this range (< 3,6 mAor > 24 mA) an error indication isis output. In this case, the Power LEDwill illuminate red, the relays are de-energised and an error current of> 22 mA is output.

– If a faulty transmitter causes a short-circuit, the relays are de-energised andan error current of > 22 mA is output.


��

��

��

Limit Value Monitor IM43-13-SR/IM43-14-SRi

Type IM43-13-SR IM43-14-SRiIdent-no. 7540041 7540043

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUC 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 Hz 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 4.8 W ≤ 4.8 W

Clearances and creepagesInput circuit to output circuit ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm– Output circuit to supply ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm– Input circuit to supply ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm– Test voltage 2 kV 2 kV

Input circuit current and voltage input current and voltage inputCurrent input– Input resistance < 50 Ω < 50 Ω– Operating values 0/4...20 mA (overload protected up to 24 mA) 0/4...20 mA (overload protected up to 24 mA)Voltage input– Input resistance > 50 kΩ > 50 kΩ– Operating values 0/2...10 V (overload protected up to 20 V) 0/2...10 V (overload protected up to 20 V)– Hysteresis 5 % 5 %Ambient temperature sensitivity 75 ppm/K 75 ppm/K

Output circuitRelay output three relay outputs three relay outputs– Contact configuration 1 normally open contact 1 normally open contact– Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC ≤ 250 VAC– Switching current ≤ 6 A ≤ 6 A– Switching capacity ≤ 1500 VA ≤ 1500 VACurrent output – 0/4...20 mA

LED indications– Power/error (2-colour LED) green/red green/red– Switching status yellow yellow






4


Setpoint MonitorMK43-111-R/24VDCMK43-111-R/230VAC1-channel

The MK43-111-R setpoint device is usedto monitor either 0/4...20 mA currentsignals or voltage signals from 0/2...10 V.The front panel potentiometer serves toset the limit value.

The monitoring mode depends on theconfiguration of terminals 2 and 5. Linkingterminals 2 and 5 selects the overrangemonitoring mode, i.e. the output relay de-energises, if the limit value is exceeded.Leaving terminals 2 and 5 open, selectsthe underrange monitoring mode, i.e. theoutput relay de-energises, if the presetlimit value is underranged.

• 1-channel setpoint monitor

• For use with either0/4...20 mA current inputs or0/2...10 V voltage inputs

• 1 relay output with 1 SPDT contact

• Sealed relays with hardgold plated contacts

��

��

��

�

�

�

� �

��

��

��

��

0)�1�2��

�

�

�

�

��5#6

��5$6��

!"�

��

��.�

�

�

�

�

#

$

#

$

��(((��+

��(((��)*

�2�� 1�

Devices with a 24 VDC power supply donot provide galvanic isolation betweenthe inputs and the power supply.

A yellow LED indicates the switchingstatus of the relay; a green LED indicatesthat the device is powered.


Type MK43-111-R/230VAC MK43-111-R/24VDCIdent-no. 7506900 7506907

Supply voltage UB 184...253 VAC 19...29 VDCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48…62 Hz ≤ 10 %Power consumption ≤ 2.5 VA ≤ 1 W

Clearances and creepage distances– Input circuit to output circuit ≥ 4 mm ≥ 4 mm– Output circuit to supply voltage ≥ 4 mm ≥ 4 mm– Input curcuit to supply voltage ≥ 4 mm –– Test voltage 2.5 kV 2.5 kV

Input circuits voltage and current input (selectable) voltage and current input (selectable)Current input– Input resistance 50 Ω 50 Ω– Operation characteristics 0…20 mA (max. 40 mA) 0…20 mA (max. 40 mA)Voltage input– Input resistance 50 kΩ 50 kΩ– Operation characteristics 0…10 V (max. 250 V) 0…10 V (max. 250 V)Hysteresis typ. 2.5 % of final value typ. 2.5 % of final valueTemperature drift ≤ 2 % of final value ≤ 2 % of final value

Output circuits 1 relay output 1 relay outputNumber of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage 250 V 250 VSwitching current ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 W




Connection via flat terminals with self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm² or 2 x 1.5 mm²


��

��

Setpoint Monitor MK43-111-R

4


• 1-channel thermistor relay

• Evaluation of temperaturechanges in drives viaNTC resistors

• Excellent temperature stabilityand repeatability


• Switch point adjustable ina range from 20...140 °C

• 2 relay outputs, eachwith 1 SPDT contact

• Control switch connection forexternal acknowledgement

The MK44-121-R thermistor relay is atemperature monitoring device designedto identify excessive temperatures indrives and bearings.

The temperature sensing element is a NTCresistor. The following measuring resistorsmanufactured by Siemens can be used

– S863/10K/G40– S869/10K/G40.– M703.

It is also possible to use other resistortypes, provided they feature a similartemperature performance (25 °C - 10 kΩ,140 °C - 235.2 Ω).

The sensing element M703 (see chapter"accessories", page 9 – 7) can be ordereddirectly from TURCK.

The temperature range is programmed viaa potentiometer on the front of the device.

The switching status of the relays issignalled by a red LED. A green LEDindicates that the device is powered.When the input signal reaches the adjustedsetpoint, the output relays de-energiseand latch.

The limit value indication can be acknow-ledged by pushing a reset button. It canalso be reset by a potential free contact(terminals 11/15), or by turning the poweroff for at least 0.5 s.

If the temperature to be monitored fallsbelow the preset value prior to anacknowledgement, the relays re-energiseafter the reset. If the fault continues afterthe reset, the relays stay de-energised.The device can also operate as a tem-perature control by permanently linkingterminals 11/15.

Thermistor RelayMK44-121-R/24VUCMK44-121-R/230VAC1-channel

� ��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

7�)8��

��9��

:��

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

�

�;

�

�

��<��=�� ><��=�� ><��><

��



Supply voltage UB 184...264 VAC 19...29 VUCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48…62 Hz −Power/current consumption 5 VA ≤ 100 mAGalvanic isolaton between input circuit, output circuit input circuit to output circuit for 250 Vrms,

and supply voltage for 250 Vrms, test voltage 2.5 kVrms


Input circuitsSensor input NTC resistor NTC resistor– Input resistance 12.4 kΩ − 20 °C; 10 kΩ – 25 °C; 12.4 kΩ − 20 °C; 10 kΩ – 25 °C;

235.3 Ω − 140 °C 235.3 Ω − 140 °CWire-break threshold R > 60 kΩ R > 60 kΩShort-circuit threshold R < 150 Ω R < 150 ΩReset input potential-free NO contact potential-free NO contactHysteresis (from preset value) 1…10 % 1…10 %Ambient temperature sensitivity ≤ 0.01 %/K ≤ 0.01 %/K

Output circuits 2 relay outputs 2 relay outputsContacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage 250 V 250 VSwitching current ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 W

LED indications– Power green green– Switching status red red





Thermistor Relay MK44-121-R

��

��

4


• 1-channel pulse counter/pulsedivider




• 1 relay output with 2 SPDT contacts


The input operates with sensors accor-ding to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) or withmechanical contacts.

Changes in the input current, whichcorrespond to the actuation of a NAMURsensor or the opening of a contact in theinput circuit, are evaluated as input pulses.A selector switch located on the front ofthe device provides a choice of the follo-wing relay output functions:

– Switch position 1:Pulse counter NO

– Switch position 2:Pulse counter NC

– Switch position 3:Pulse divider NO

– Switch position 4:Pulse divider NC

Jumpers P1, P2 and P4 at terminals 1...16determine the number of input pulses

Pulse Counter/Pulse DividerMS41-12Ex0-R1-channel

Tab. 1 Pulse count programming

The MS41-12Ex0-R is a single channeldevice with an intrinsically safe input circuit.It is designed for counting and dividing ofpulse sequences.

(counts) needed to cause the relay outputto switch (see table 1). If more than 7 inputpulses are required, the selector switch ofthe logic controller (pulse counter/pulsedivider) must be in the lower position(n + 8). If input pulses between 1 and 7are needed, select the upper position (n).

When used as a pulse counter, the outputrelay changes state for one pulse durationif the pre-determined count is reached.

When used as a pulse divider, the outputrelay changes state for the entire presetpulse sequence (number of preset counts)if the number of preset input pulses hasbeen reached (see table on page 4-4).

A yellow LED indicates the switchingstatus of the relay.

The device's counter is reset to zero whenpower is applied to the device.

��

��

!"�#"$%��&��?�?

��

!��'��

!��'��

!��'��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

� ��

� � � � � � ��

� � � ��

��

�

��

@� �� 8��)) �

��+

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

$

#

$��+

�

��

A

��

5#6

�

B

B

�

B

B�4

��

��7�.

�"

��

""/

�

�

��

��

��

�*&/��

��

��

�$��

!"

��+*(��*��+�(��*





Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Input voltage 8 VInput current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mAInput frequency ≤ 150 Hz

Output circuits relay outputNumber of contacts 2 SPDT contacts, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/60 VDCSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching capacity ≤ 1000 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz


– [EEx ia] IIC 1 mH/500 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 3 mH/2500 nF– [EEx ia] I 10 mH/10 µFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC I (M1) [EEx ia] I



for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)Connection 2 x 8 self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm² or 2 x 1.5 mm²


Fig.1 output function and switching status

��#��"��

�!"#��!�$��)��C��%�D*�)��<��%�D*

�!"#��#��"��)��C��%�D*�)��<��%�D*

%!$&!$�'!��$��#

*�*"#��*D

D*'*�*"#��*D

C�

C++

*�*"#��*D

D*'*�*"#��*D

C�

C++

,��&��!�E&%�*"*D$�D��

,��&��!�E&%�*"*D$�D��

($��)�#$�$!#��$��"��!$ ($��)�#$�$!#��$��$��!$

*�*"#��*DD*'*�*"#��*D

C�

C++

��C��%�D* ��<��%�D*

*�*"#��*DD*'*�*"#��*D

C�

C++

-��=��%.

/��=��%.

� � � � �

Pulse Counter/Pulse Divider MS41-12Ex0-R

��

��

4


• 1-channel bistable switchingamplifier




• 1 output relay with 2 SPDT contacts

• For optional use as a switchingamplifier without bistablecharacteristics


The bistable amplifier relay MS41-22Ex0-Ris a single channel device with fourintrinsically safe inputs. It can be used as abistable relay, or as a programmableswitching amplifier without bistablecharacteristics.

As a bistable relay, the switching perfor-mance can be programmed for "priorityset" or "priority reset" functions.

By leaving the inputs open or closed, thedesired function may be selected. Pleaserefer to page 4-15 for further informationon logic functions.


Bistable Switchingamplifier MS41-22Ex0-R1-channel

��+

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

$

#

$��+

F�

F�

F��

��

��

�

�

B

5#6

��

��

!"

��

��

� � � � � � �

� ��

��

��





Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operation characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 4.5 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mA








Bistable Switching Amplifier MS41-22Ex0-R

��

��

4


Switching amplifier functionality

When using the MS41-22Ex0-R as anamplifier, the bistable relays fulfil thefunction of a monostable switchingamplifier. The output function (NO or NCoperation) is programmed by the positionof the jumpers and the input configuration.

Bistable SwitchingAmplifiersMS41-22Ex0-R1-channel

Bistable functionality

If the amplifier is used as a bistable relay,the following module functions are availabledepending on the input configuration:

– Set input with priority: Any time twoinputs are activated simultaneously,the set input has priority.

– Reset input with priority: Any time twoinputs are activated simultaneously,the reset input has priority.

– Switching upon detection of target:Attenuation initiates the switchingfunction as shown by (a) on the right.

– Switching function with no targetpresent. A switching function occurswhenever no target is present asshown by (b) on the right.

NO mode NC mode

Priority Set Priority Reset

Note: When mechanical contacts are usedas input devices, the output function isreversed from those shown on the right.

Note: When mechanical contacts are used,the switching function is reversed.

�*� �*�*� �*� �*�*�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�$��$� �$��$�

�0��0� �0��0�

�*��" C&��&� �*��" C&��&�

D*'*�*"#��*D *�"#��*D

*�*"#��*D D*'*�*"#��*D

��

��

��

��

4


• 1-channel amplifier relay




• 1 relay output with 2 SPDTcontacts


The MS41-42Ex0-R logic amplifier relayhas four intrinsically safe inputs which canbe combined logically with each other.The device has a relay output with twoSPDT contacts. The input circuit acceptsNAMUR sensors (EN 60947-5-6) ormechanical contacts.

A switch on the front panel serves to adjustthe following six logic functions:

1 AND2 NAND3 OR4 NOR5 IDENTITY6 NON-IDENTITY

A detailed description of the logic functionsis shown on page 4 – 19.

Amplifier Relayswith Logic FunctionsMS41-42Ex0-R1-channel

For applications requiring less than fourinputs, please observe the following:

– the unused inputs should be left openwhen selector positions 1 and 2(AND/NAND functions) are used.

– the unused inputs should be jumperedwhen selector positions 3 and 4(OR/NOR functions) are used.

The IDENTITY and NON-IDENTITYfunctions (selector positions 5 and 6) canonly be attained with four input sources.


��

��

� � � � � � �

� ��

��

�

� �

�

��

��

0��G� ��

��+

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

$

#

$��+��

F��A

��

A��

A��

��

A

��

$��+

5#6��

�*&/��

��

��

��

�

��

�*&/�

�*&/�

�

�

�*&/�

�

!"

��+*(��+�(

��*��+*��H



Supply voltage UB 20...250 VAC/20...125 VDCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and



Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR), intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Operation characteristics– Voltage 8 V– Current 4.5 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mA








Amplifier Relay with Logic Functions MS41-42Ex0-R

��

��

4


��.��

C&��&� C&��&� C&��&� C&��&� C&��&� C&��&�

��.�� C� ��C� ��,�1��,�2 ��C�',�1��,�2

�*��" �*��" �*��" �*��" �*��" �*��"

*�*"#��*D D*'*�*"#��*D

D*'*�*"#��*D *�*"#��*D

D*'*�*"#��*D*�*"#��*D

�"�"

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�I0�

0�I0�0�I0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0� 0�

0�I0�

Amplifier Relay withLogic FunctionsMS41-42Ex0-R1-channel

The output relay will beenergised when one ormore sensors detect atarget. If all four sensorsdo not detect a target,the output relay will de-energise.

The output relay will beenergised when all foursensors detect or do notdetect a target. If theinput conditions differ, theoutput relay will de-energise.

The output relay will de-energise when all foursensors detect or do notdetect a target. If the inputconditions differ, the outputrelay will energise.

The output relay will de-energise when one ormore sensors detect atarget. If all four sensorsdo not detect a target,the output relay willenergise.

The output relay will de-energise when all foursensors detect a target.If one or more sensorsdo not detect a target,the output relay willenergise.

The output relay willenergise when all foursensors detect a target.If one or more sensors donot detect a target, theoutput relay will de-energise.

4


Setpoint MonitorMS43-R1-channel

• 1-channel setpoint monitor

• For use with either0/4...20 mA current inputs or0/2...10 V voltage inputs

• Excellent temperaturestability and repeatability

• Input circuit monitoringfor wire-break and short-circuitconditions in live-zero mode

• 2 switch points 1…100 %

• Adjustable hysteresisfrom 1…10 %




The MS43-R setpoint relay is used withanalogue sensors or devices such as levelmonitors, flow meters, position encoders,pressure transmitters, frequency andcurrent converters. The input accommo-dates either 0/4...20 mA current signals,or voltage signals from 0/2...10 V.

2-wire (III) or 3-wire sensors (IV) with acurrent consumption of 30 mA may bepowered directly by the MS43-R.For this purpose, a constant voltage of15 V is provided by terminals 15/16.

The measuring range is converted from0...20 mA to 4...20 mA, or from 0...10 Vto 2...10 V by jumpering terminals 15 and16. With this setting (live-zero mode), theinput is monitored for short-circuit andwire-break conditions. When the inputsignal exceeds 22 mA or 11 V, or fallsbelow 2.0 mA or 1.0 V, both output relayschange state and the dual colour „Power“LED changes from green to red.

Two rotary switches located on the frontof the device allow setting of two indepen-dent setpoints between 1 % and 100 %of the defined range. If the input signalreaches one of the defined setpoints, therespective output relay changes state.Two yellow LEDs indicate the switchingstatus of the relays.

The switching hysteresis of both set-points can be adjusted between 1 % and10 % of the setpoint by a rotary switch.

The monitoring mode of both setpointscan be programmed separately byjumpering terminals 12 and 13 (setpoint 1)or 13 and 14 (setpoint 2).

Without jumpers:the relay de-energises if the input signaldrops below the setpoint.

With jumpers:the relay de-energises if the input signalexceeds the setpoint.

� � � � � � �

� ��

*��+,

��

��

��

�

��

-. ��/�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��0 ��

��/� ��/�

!"�

��

��

��

�� J3��

0)�1�2��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��3

�

�

��

�

��

��

��

�

�

�

K

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��3

�

��

�

��

K

�

��

�� 4�

�

� �

�

��

��

� � ��

�

��

��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

� ��

� � ��

�

�

��

�

��

��



Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Clearances and creepage distances– Input circuit to output circuit ≥ 4 mm– Input circuit to power supply ≥ 4 mm

Input circuits voltage and current input (selectable)Current input– Input resistance 50 Ω– Operation characteristics 0/4…20 mA (max. 50 mA)– Range preset (two setpoints) 0.2…20 mA (max. 50 mA)Voltage input– Input resistance 48 kΩ– Operation characteristics 0/2…10 V– Range preset (two setpoints) 0.1…10 VHysteresis (from adjusted preset) 1…10 %Temperature drift ≤ 0.01 %/K

Output circuits 2 relay outputsNumber of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage 250 VSwitching current ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W

LED indications– Power/fault indication green/red (2-colour LED)– Switching status 2 x yellow




Setpoint Monitor MS43-R

�

��

5


VALVE CONTROLMODULES

VALVE CONTROLMODULES


Valve Control Modules/Intrinsically Safe PowerSuppliesSelection Guide

Housing Stylemultimodulmulticart®

FunctionsValve control

Galvanic isolationInput to output circuitsInput circuits to power supplyOutput circuits to power supply

Power supplyWith auxiliary powerWithout auxiliary power

ActivationInput circuitControl input

Output circuitsIntrinsically safe acc. to EN 50020/14[EEx ib] IIC[EEx ia] IIC/IIB

Functional safety up to SIL3Approved for Installation in zone 2

Output voltagessee data sheet

Output currentsee data sheet

Supply voltage 24 VDC


• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • •

• •

• •• •

• • • • • • • • • •

5 7 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13

MK

72-S

01-E

xM

K72

-S02

-Ex

MK

72-S

03-E

xM

K72

-S04

-Ex

MK

72-S

05-E

xM

K72

-S06

-Ex

MK

72-S

07-E

xM

K72

-S08

-Ex

Hou

sing

Type

IM72

-11E

x/L*

)IM

72-2

2Ex/

L*)

5


• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • •

• •• •

• •• •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • •

• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

15 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22

MC

72-4

4Ex-

T

MC

72-4

3Ex-

T

MC

72-4

2Ex-

T

MC

72-4

1Ex-

T

MK

72-S

09-E

x0M

K72

-S10

-Ex0


MK

72-S

13-E

x0M

K72

-S14

-Ex0

MK

72-S

15-E

x0M

K72

-S16

-Ex0

MK

72-S

19-E

x0M

K72

-S20

-Ex0

MK

72-S

21-E

x0M

K72

-S22

-Ex0

*) Devices also available withcage-clamps:Type designation Ident-no.IM72-11Ex-CC/L 7520704IM72-22Ex-CC/L 7520705


Valve Control Modules

Fig. 3 Valve control module without auxiliary energy and adjustable output voltage

Fig. 2 Valve control module with auxiliary energy and adjustable output voltage

Applications and connection

The following pages provide a selectionof magnetic valves and matching valvecontrol modules, featuring DIN hat-railmounting or 19" Eurocard technology.

The cable lengths calculated for therespective explosion categories are basedon the assumed capacitances andinductances of 110 nF/km and 1mH/km(BASEFAA-Newsletter No. 3).

The max. line resistance is based on thetypical output curve of the valve controlmodule. The possible voltage drop on thecable can be determined by the minimumvoltage and current ratings of the magneticvalve. A value pair is obtained by thiscalculation. Generally, the shorter lengthshould be selected.

The user should always ensure that thetechnical data of the cable match thespecific application requirements.

For valves, which are not mentioned on thefollowing pages, please contact your localsales-office.

Interface devices with intrinsically safeoutput circuits

Interface devices with intrinsically safeoutputs are of great importance in the fieldof valve control. Each output provides anisolated supply voltage with limited voltageand current ranges for intrinsically safeapplications.

These devices are typically used in valvecontrol applications, but also to providepower to transmitters, pilot lights, andindicator displays in the hazardous area.

Valve control modules or solenoid driversare offered with a variety of output data tomeet a wide range of applications. Thereare several parameters to consider whenselecting the components. It is importantto make sure that the operating data andmaximum values meet the requirementsset forth in the conformity certificate.The following example explains this further.

Parameters of the valve controlmodule:UN = 12 VDC; IN = 45 mAU0 = 14.5 V; I0 = 108 mA; P0 = 1.3 W

Parameters of the valve:UN = 12 VDC; IN = 6.74 mA (1780 Ω)Ui = 27 V; Ii = 125 mA; Pi = 0.4 W

Although the operating data of the twocomponents given in this example arecompatible with the open circuit voltageU0 and the short-circuit current IK, a con-nection between the two components isnevertheless not possible because of thepower ratings of the valve. In the nextexample, a combination is possible withoutany power limits because of the differentdata:

Parameters of the valve controlmodule:UN = 24 VDC; IN = 25 mAU0 = 27 V; I0 = 79 mA; P0 = 1.5 W

Parameters of the valve:UN = 24 VDC; IN = 6 mA (4000 Ω)Ui = 32 V; Ii = 90 mA; Pi = 0.4 W oderUi = 28 V; Ii =115 mA; P= not specified

The following values must be consideredwhen calculating the maximum allowedcable lengths for hazardous area circuits:

– minimum operating voltage of the valve– voltage drop on the cable– maximum external inductances and

capacitances of the valve controlmodule

Load control and power requirements

Valve control modules are available withand without auxiliary power for a widespectrum of applications.In valve controls with auxiliary power, thesupply voltage is permanently applied tothe module and the switching operation istriggered via a control input. This makesthem ideal for PLC control, because theinput circuit does not have to provide allthe energy needed.

In valve controls without auxiliary power,the energy required must be provided bythe control signal. In some cases, it mightbe necessary to provide outputs with ahigher power rating to meet the energyrequirements of the PLC.

Capacitors in the input and output circuitsof the solenoid drivers (valve controlmodules) transfer power by removing andadding it, so that the switching frequencyin devices without auxiliary energy dropsdown to a few Hz.

�

�

�

�

��

5


• 1-channel solenoid driver withremovable terminal blocks





• Loop-powered

• Galvanic isolation betweeninput circuit and output circuit

• Switching frequency ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 500 Hz

• Device also available withcage-clamps,Type designation: IM72-11Ex-CC/L,Ident-no.: 7520704

Solenoid Driver andIntrinsically Safe PowerSupplyIM72-11Ex/L1-channel

The solenoid driver series IM72-11Ex/Lprovide an intrinsically safe output withlimited current and voltage. Within the areaof applicability of the European directive94/9/EC (ATEX) it is permitted to operateconnected loads in potentially explosiveatmospheres caused by dust or gas,provided they comply with the applicableregulations.

Typical applications are:– driving of EExi pilot valves– display supply– transmitter supply

The output values of the two connectionsU1 and U2 differ with respect to the no-load voltage indication (see output curveon next page). They are adapted to thevalves of different manufacturers.

Connected loads can be driven byapplying power.


��

��

��

��

�

� ��

��

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��


��

��

��

Solenoid Driver and Intrinsically Safe Power Supply IM72-11Ex/L

Type IM72-11Ex/LIdent-no. 7520703

Supply voltage UB 19...30 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption appr. 50 mA at 24 VDCGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Input circuits“OFF”-Signal ≤ 5 V“ON”-Signal 19…30 VDCInput current ≤ 45 mA/24 VDCSwitch-on delay ≤ 400 µs

Output circuits intrinsically safe per EN 50020Output voltage U1 = 24 V (terminals 1, 3), U2 = 15 V (terminals 2, 3)Output current I1 = 45 mA, (terminals 1, 3), I2 = 45 mA (terminals 2, 3), short-circuit protectedSwitching frequency ≤ 500 Hz

Output curve

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 05 ATEX 2846 X / TÜV 06 ATEX 553388 X / IECEx TUN 05.0011X / TUN 06.0013XMaximum nominal valuesTerminals 1, 3 2, 3– No load voltage U0 27 V 17,6 V– Short-circuit current I0 96 mA 96 mA– Power P0 678 mW 678 mW– Resistance R 295 Ω 295 ΩCharacteristic curve trapezoidal trapezoidalMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 0,68 mH/62 nF / 0,5 mH/70 nF 1,2 mH/130 nF / 0,5 mH/150 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 13 mH/260 nF / 2 mH/300 nF 13 mH/470 nF / 2 mH/1100 nF– Ex nL IIC 0,68 mH/120 nF / 0,5 mH/130 nF 1,2 mH/370 nF / 0,5 mH/420 nF– Ex nL IIB 13 mH/570 nF / 2 mH/620 nF 13 mH/1 µF / 2 mH/2,1 µFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC/IIB / [Ex ia] IIC








��

��

��

��!"�

��

��

5


• 2-channel solenoid driver withremovable terminal blocks





• Loop-powered


• Switching frequency ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 500 Hz

• Device also available withcage-clamps,Type designation: IM72-22Ex-CC/L,Ident-no.: 7520705

Solenoid Driver andIntrinsically Safe PowerSupplyIM72-22Ex/L2-channel

The solenoid driver series IM72-22Ex/Lprovide an intrinsically safe output withlimited current and voltage. Within the areaof applicability of the European directive94/9/EC (ATEX) it is permitted to operateconnected loads in potentially explosiveatmospheres caused by dust or gas,provided they comply with the applicableregulations.


The output values of the two connectionsU1 and U2 per channel differ with respectto the no-load voltage indication (seeoutput curve on next page). They areadapted to the valves of different manu-facturers.

Connected loads can be driven byapplying power.

A yellow LED indicates the switchingstatus of the corresponding output.

��

#

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� �

� ��

��


��

��

��

Solenoid Driver and Intrinsically Safe Power Supply IM72-22Ex/L

Type IM72-22Ex/LIdent-no. 7520702

Supply voltage UB 19...30 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption appr. 90 mA at 24 VDCGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Input circuits“OFF”-Signal ≤ 5 V“ON”-Signal 19…30 VDCInput current ≤ 45 mA/24 VDCSwitch-on delay ≤ 400 µs

Output circuits intrinsically safe per EN 50020Output voltage U1 = 24 V (terminals 1, 3 and 4, 6), U2 = 15 V (terminals 2, 3 and 5, 6)Output current I1 = 45 mA, (terminals 1, 3 and 4, 6), I2 = 45 mA (terminals 2, 3 and 5, 6), short-circuit protectedSwitching frequency ≤ 500 Hz

Output curve

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 05 ATEX 2846 X / TÜV 06 ATEX 553388 X / IECEx TUN 05.0011X / TUN 06.0013XMaximum nominal valuesTerminals 1, 3 and 4, 6 2, 3 and 5, 6– No load voltage U0 27 V 17,6 V– Short-circuit current I0 96 mA 96 mA– Power P0 678 mW 678 mW– Resistance R 295 Ω 295 ΩCharacteristic curve trapezoidal trapezoidalMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 0,68 mH/62 nF / 0,5 mH/70 nF 1,2 mH/130 nF / 0,5 mH/150 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 13 mH/260 nF / 2 mH/300 nF 13 mH/470 nF / 2 mH/1100 nF– Ex nL IIC 0,68 mH/120 nF / 0,5 mH/130 nF 1,2 mH/370 nF / 0,5 mH/420 nF– Ex nL IIB 13 mH/570 nF / 2 mH/620 nF 13 mH/1 µF / 2 mH/2,1 µFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC/IIB / [Ex ia] IIC








��

��

��

��!"�

��

��

5


Solenoid DriversMK72-S01...08-Ex/24VDC1-channel

• 1-channel solenoid drivers

• Intrinsically safe output circuitsEEx ib


• Input voltage 24 VDC


The solenoid drivers series MK72 providean intrinsically safe output with limitedcurrent and voltage. They can be directlyconnected to loads installed in explosionhazardous areas.


The output voltages of the MK72-S01 andthe MK72-S02 can be converted from12 to 6 VDC or from 24 to 15 VDC bylinking terminals 3 and 4.The other devices provide fixed outputvoltages.

Connected loads can be driven in twodifferent ways:

(I) By applying power: jumper terminals 5and 6. In this operating mode theswitching frequency is limited to 25 Hz.

(II) With permanent voltage supply via theinput circuit: use either an isolatedcontact between terminals 5 and 6 orapply input voltage to terminal 5. Dueto the minimal current requirement andthe large voltage range, even PLC out-puts with low power or large voltagedrops can be used for drive purposes.In this operating mode the highestswitching frequency of 250 Hz isreached.


��

��

��

�� !�"�#

$��%&��#

� '(�� $%�&'

��

(�

�

�

��

��

)��

#

��

��

(�

��

��

)��

#

��

$%�&'

$%�&'

��

)��

�

��

)��

�

MK72-S01-ExMK72-S02-Ex

MK72-S03-ExMK72-S04-ExMK72-S05-ExMK72-S06-ExMK72-S07-ExMK72-S08-Ex


Type MK72-S01-Ex MK72-S02-ExIdent-no. 7507005 7507205Ident-no. with FM/CSA Certification 75070 75072

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDC 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 % ≤ 10 %Current consumption approx. 70 mA at 24 V approx. 70 mA at 24 VGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit



Input circuits"OFF" signal ≤ 5 V ≤ 5 V"ON" signal 10…30 VDC 10…30 VDCInput current ≤ 1 mA/24 VDC ≤ 1 mA/24 VDCSwitch-on delay ≤ 2 ms ≤ 2 ms

Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output voltage 12 VDC (6 VDC with jumpers 3 - 4) 24 VDC (15 VDC with jumpers 3 - 4)Output current 50 mA, short-circuit protected 25 mA, short-circuit protected

Output curve

Switching frequency– Via input circuit ≤ 250 Hz ≤ 250 Hz– Via power supply ≤ 25 Hz ≤ 25 Hz

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity PTB 99 ATEX 2116 PTB 99 ATEX 2116Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 15.8 V 28.4 V– Short-circuit current Ik 59.4 mA 32.2 mA– Power Pmax 0.94 W 0.92 WMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ib] IIC 1.5 mH/110 nF –– [EEx ib] IIB 5 mH/370 nF 10 mH/128 nFMarking of device É II (2) G [EEx ib] IIC É II (2) G [EEx ib] IIC

LED indications– Switching status yellow yellow– Power green green





Solenoid Drivers MK72-S01...08-Ex

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

)

5


Type MK72-S03-Ex MK72-S04-ExIdent-no. 7507300 7507305

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDC 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 % ≤ 10 %Current consumption 30 mA at 24 V 70 mA at 24 VGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit




Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output voltage 8 VDC 13 VDCOutput current 20 mA, short-circuit protected 45 mA, short-circuit protected

Output curve


Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity PTB 99 ATEX 2116 PTB 99 ATEX 2116Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 10.5 V 15.8 V– Short-circuit current Ik 32.2 mA 52 mA– Power Pmax 0.34 W 0.82 WMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ib] IIC 4 mH/400 nF 1.5 mH/160 nF– [EEx ib] IIB 7 mH/1700 nF 6 mH/550 nFMarking of device É II (2) G [EEx ib] IIC É II (2) G [EEx ib] IIC






Solenoid DriversMK72-S01...08-Ex/24VDC

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

)



Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDC 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 % ≤ 10 %Current consumption 70 mA at 24 V 65 mA bei 24VGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit




Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output voltage 15 VDC 17.5 VDCOutput current 47 mA, short-circuit protected 36 mA, short-circuit protected

Output curve


Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity PTB 99 ATEX 2116 PTB 99 ATEX 2116Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 17.5 V 21 V– Short-circuit current Ik 59.4 mA 45 mA– Power Pmax 1.04 W 0.95 WMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ib] IIC 0.9 mH/120 nF 0.6 mH/79 nF– [EEx ib] IIB 4 mH/470 nF 3.5 mH/360 nFMarking of device É II (2) G [EEx ib] IIC É II (2) G [EEx ib] IIC






Solenoid Drivers MK72-S01...08-Ex

��

��

��

��

��

��

��*�

��

�

�

)

5







Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output voltage 19 VDC 21 VDCOutput current 32 mA, short-circuit protected 25 mA, short-circuit protected

Output curve


Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity PTB 99 ATEX 2116 PTB 99 ATEX 2116Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 22.3 V 24.2 V– Short-circuit current Ik 41 mA 32.2 mA– Power Pmax 0.92 W 0.78 WMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ib] IIC 0.6 mH/61 nF 0.5 mH/47 nF– [EEx ib] IIB 3 mH/330 nF 3 mH/290 nFMarking of device II (2) G [EEx ib] IIC II (2) G [EEx ib] IIC






Solenoid DriversMK72-S01...08-Ex/24VDC

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

)�

5


• 1-channel solenoid driver forbooster valves



• Designed for booster valve control

• Initialisation voltage of 17 V

• 24 VDC input voltage

• Galvanic isolation between inputcircuit and output circuit

Solenoid DriverMK72-S09-Ex0for Booster Valves1-channel

The valve control module MK72-S09.. isdesigned for supply/control of boostervalves. The intrinsically safe output featuresan isolated voltage, which provides 17 V(initialisation voltage) in the no-load modewhen the logic input is de-activated.This level is just below the switch-onthreshold of the booster valve. When thelogic input is activated, the output voltagerises to 22 V (no-load operation) and thevalve switches. Then the voltage drops toa hold value of 4.7 V.After de-activation of the control signal, thesolenoid driver generates an internal pulse,i.e. the output voltage goes down to 0 Vfor a period of 0.5 s to turn off the valve.

(II) With permanent voltage supply via theinput circuit: use either an isolatedcontact between terminals 5 and 6 orapply input voltage to terminal 5. Dueto the minimal current requirements andthe large voltage range, even PLC out-puts with low power or large voltagedrops can be used for drive purposes.In this operating mode the highestswitching frequency of 250 Hz isreached.

Within the area of applicability of theEuropean directive 94/9/EC (ATEX 100a)it is permitted to connect and operatebooster valves in potentially explosiveatmospheres caused by dust or gas,provided they comply with the applicableregulations.


��

��

��

��)��!"�#

$��*&��#

� +�,

�� $%�&'

After the turn-off phase, the output voltagereturns to 17 V. This mode of operationensures minimum switch-on times.The logic input is controlled via potential-free contacts or an input voltage of10...35 V. The drive time includes theinternal power-up time of the boostervalve.

Note:– The voltage values and the duration of

the switch-off pulse can be adapted tocustomer requirements and the specificvalve type used.

– The output voltage value quoted refersto the no-load operation mode. Thevoltage drop over the barrier resistorof 292 Ω must be substracted fromthe voltage applying to terminals 1and 2.


(I) By applying power: jumper terminals5 and 6. In this operating mode theswitching frequency is limited to 8 Hz.

��

(�

��

��

)��

#

��

$%�&'

��

)��

�


Type MK72-S09-Ex0/24VDCIdent-no. 7507328

Supply voltage UB 19...35 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Power consumption approx. 2 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit



Input circuits"OFF" signal ≤ 5 V"ON" signal 10…35 VDCInput current ≤ 1 mA/24 VDCSwitch-on delay ≤ 2 ms

Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output voltage 17 VDC initialisation voltage/22 VDC during drive operationOutput current ≤ 42 mA, short-circuit protectedInternal resistance 292 ΩSwitch-off pulse 0 V/500 msSwitching frequency– Via control input ≤ 250 Hz– Via power supply ≤ 8 Hz

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 00 ATEX 1553Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 23.3 V– Short-circuit current I0 107.5 mA– Power P0 0.84 W– Resistance R 292 ΩCharacteristic curve linearMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 1.40 mH/58 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 1.50 mH/360 nFMarking of device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC






Solenoid Driver MK72-S09-Ex0 for Booster Valves

�

�

)�

5


Solenoid DriversMK72-S10...22-Ex01-channel

• 1-channel solenoid drivers



• Input voltage 24 VDC


The solenoid drivers series MK72 providean intrinsically safe output with limitedcurrent and voltage. Within the area ofapplicability of the European directive94/9/EC (ATEX 100a) it is permitted tooperate connected loads in potentiallyexplosive atmospheres caused by dust orgas, provided they comply with theapplicable regulations.

Typical applications are:

– driving of EExi pilot valves– display supply– transmitter supply

The output values of the devicesMK72-S10... to MK72-S22... differ withrespect to the no-load voltage and outputcurrent indications and are adapted to thevalves of different manufacturers.


(I) By applying power: jumper terminals5 and 6. In this operating mode theswitching frequency is limited to 8 Hz.

(II) With permanent voltage supply via theinput circuit: use either an isolatedcontact between terminals 5 and 6 orapply input voltage to terminal 5. Dueto the minimal current requirements andthe large voltage range, even PLC out-puts with low power or large voltagedrops can be used for drive purposes.In this operating mode the highestswitching frequency of 250 Hz isreached.


��

��

��

��!"�#

$��*&��#

� +�,�� $%�&'

��

(�

��

��

)��

#

��

$%�&'

��

)��

�


��

��

��

�

��

��

Type MK72-S10-Ex0/24VDC MK72-S13-Ex0/24VDCIdent-no. 7507331 7507334

Supply voltage UB 19...35 VDC 19...35 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 % ≤ 10 %Current consumption approx. 90 mA at 24 V 129 mA at 24 VGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit




Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output voltage 12 VDC 16 VDCOutput current 60 mA, short-circuit protected 80 mA, short-circuit protectedSwitching frequency– Via input circuit ≤ 250 Hz ≤ 250 Hz– Via power supply ≤ 8 Hz ≤ 8 Hz

Output curve

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 00 ATEX 1553 TÜV 00 ATEX 1553Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 14.5 V 17.4 V– Short-circuit current I0 164.2 mA 190.8 mA– Power P0 1.28 W 1.35 W– Resistance R 191 Ω 149 ΩCharacteristic curve trapezoidal linearMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC 0.46 mH/230 nF 0.16 mH/323 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 3.00 mH/640 nF 2.50 mH/515 nFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC






Solenoid Drivers MK72-S10...22-Ex0

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

5



Supply voltage UB 19...35 VDC 19...35 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 % ≤ 10 %Current consumption 90 mA at 24 V 100 mA at 24VGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit between input circuit, output circuit





Output curve

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 00 ATEX 1553 TÜV 00 ATEX 1553Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 17.4 V 17.4 V– Short-circuit current I0 176.2 mA 110.6 mA– Power P0 1.38 W 0.87 W– Resistance R 178 Ω 284 ΩCharacteristic curve linear linearMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC – 0.70 mH/160 nF– [EEx ia] IIB 2.50 mH/495 nF 3.20 mH/627 nFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIB É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC






��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

Solenoid DriversMK72-S10...22-Ex0


��

��

��

��







Output curve

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 00 ATEX 1553 TÜV 00 ATEX 1553Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 18.3 V 27.6 V– Short-circuit current I0 135.4 mA 130.5 mA– Power P0 1.27 W 1.32 W– Resistance R 277 Ω 311 ΩCharacteristic curve trapezoidal linearMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC – –– [EEx ia] IIB 2.40 mH/488 nF 3.00 mH/205 nFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIB É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC





with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature -25…+60 °C

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


5







Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020 intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output voltage 24 VDC 25.5 VDCOutput current 35 mA, short-circuit protected 30 mA, short-circuit protectedSwitching frequency– Via input circuit ≤ 250 Hz ≤ 250 Hz– Via power supply ≤ 8 Hz ≤ 8 Hz

Output curve

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 00 ATEX 1553 TÜV 00 ATEX 1553Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 27.6 V 27.6 V– Short-circuit current I0 110.5 mA 82.0 mA– Power P0 1.12 W 0.92 W– Resistance R 367 Ω 545 ΩCharacteristic curve linear linearMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC – –– [EEx ia] IIB 3.00 mH/205 nF 3.00 mH/194 nFMarking of devices II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIB II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIB

LED Indications– Switching status yellow yellow– Power green green





Solenoid DriversMK72-S10...22-Ex0

��

��

��

��

��

��

��*�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


Type MK72-S22-Ex0/24VDCIdent-no. 7507342

Supply voltage UB 19...35 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption 80 mA at 24 VGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit



Input circuits"OFF" signal ≤ 5 V"ON" signal 10…35 VDCInput current ≤ 1 mA/24 VDCSwitch-on delay ≤ 2 ms

Output circuits intrinsically safe according to EN 50020Output voltage 25.5 VDCOutput current 35 mA, short-circuit protectedSwitching frequency– Via input circuit ≤ 250 Hz– Via power supply ≤ 8 Hz

Output curve

Ex-approvals acc. to certificate of conformity TÜV 00 ATEX 1553Maximum nominal values– No load voltage U0 27.6 V– Short-circuit current I0 109.3 mA– Power P0 1.11 W– Resistance R 371 ΩCharacteristic curve linearMax. external inductances/capacitances L0/C0

– [EEx ia] IIC –– [EEx ia] IIB 3.00 mH/202 nFMarking of devices É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIB







��*�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

6


COUPLERS ANDINTERFACE DEVICES

COUPLERS ANDINTERFACE DEVICES


MK

73-Z

22A

O

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

0.5

11

Couplers andInterface DevicesSelection Guide

Housing Styleinterfacemodulmultimodulmulticart®

Hou

sing

Type

MK

73-T

44E

MK

73-T

44A

MK

73-T

22E

MK

73-T

22A

MK

73-R

44E

MK

73-R

44A

MK

73-R

22E

MK

73-R

22A

MK

71-T

12

MK

73-T

22A

.../K

20

MK

73-T

44A

.../K

20

●

●

*)●

1*)

1*)

*)

0.2

5

O

●

●

4

1

●

●

1

11

O●

●

●

2

●

●

10

1S

●

2

11

I●

●

●

2

●

●

10

1S

●

●

2

11

O●

●

●

4

●

●

10

2S

●

●

2

11

O

●

●

4

1

●

1

11

I●

●

●

4

●

●

10

1S

●

●

●

2

11

O●

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

2520

●

●

0.1

11

I

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

2520

●

●

0.1

11

O

●

●

●

4

●

●

●

●

●

●

2520

●

●

0.1

11

I

●

●

4

●

●

●

●

●

●

2520

●

●

0.1

11

IM73

-12-

R

●

●

1

●

●

5

2U

●

5●

7

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

50

1U

●

0.24

●

9

MK

73-R

111-

Ex0

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

50

1S

●

0.24

●

9

MK

73-R

222-

Ex0

FunctionsInput/output coupler (I/O)Relay couplerRelay coupler with electronic inputInductive couplerOptocouplerGalvanic isolationBetween input and output circuit4 mm/2 kV8 mm/4 kVacc. to EN 50020Number of channelsInput

12 VUC10 ... 30 VUC

24 VDC24 VUC

5 … 30 VDC17 … 30 VDC10 … 65 VDC30 ... 120 VDC

3 … 8 VDC80 ... 150 VAC

150 ... 250 VAC90 … 250 VAC

160 … 250 VAC230 VAC

acc. to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)Switching frequency< … Hz< … kHzOutput circuitsIntrinsically safe relayRelay, NO(S) / NC(O) /

SPDT(U) per channelwith contact protectionTransistor, potential-freeTriacSwitching voltage / capacity

5 … 65 VDC30 VDC36 VDC30 VAC

20 … 250 VAC250 V

28 VDC45 VDC

Maximum switching current [A]Functional safety up to SIL 3Appr. for installation in zone 2Data sheet – see page

6


*) See data sheet for details**) TÜV tested relay with forced

guided contacts

MK

73-U

R12

/K03

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

5

1S1U

●

5

29

MK

73-S

02

MK

73-S

01

**)●

●

1

●

5

3S2O

●

3

25

**)●

●

1

●

5

3S1O

●

3

27

MK

73-R

22

MK

73-R

12

MK

73-R

11H

MK

73-R

11

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

5

1U

●

●

3

15

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

5

1U

●

●

2

17

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

5

2U

●

5

19

●

●

●

2

●

5

1S

●

●

2

23

MC

73-4

4-R

MC

73-8

81-R

E/3

MC

73-8

81-R

MC

73-4

81-R

E/3

MC

73-4

81-R

MC

73-4

42E

x0-R

MC

73-4

41E

x0-R

MC

73-8

8T

MC

73-8

8-R

MC

73-4

8-R

E3

MC

73-4

8-R

/RS

i●

●

●

●

4

●

10

1U

●

3

O●

●

2

●

10

1U

●

●

2

●

●

●

4

●

●

●

10

2U

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

8

●

10

1S

●

2

●

●

8

●

5

●

0.2

●

●

●

●

●

4

●

50

●

1U

●

0.24

●

●

●

●

4

●

10

●

2U

●

0.5

●

●

●

●

4

●

10

2U

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

4

●

●

●

10

1U

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

8

●

10

1U

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

8

●

●

●

●

5

1U

●

●

2


MK

73-R

14

●

1

●

5

4U

●

2

21


Couplers and interface devices provide thefollowing functions:

– isolation of different signals– conversion of signal levels,

e. g. from 24 VDC...220 VAC– noise suppression– signal amplification

This extensive product line covers the widerange of functions that are needed to meetthe various application requirements in thisfield.

Interface devices can be divided intoseveral function groups according to theirfunctionality:

– relay couplers– electronic couplers– relay couplers with intrinsically

safe output circuits

Relay couplers

Relays are used in a wide variety of appli-cations:

Apart from the good price, this proveninterface technology provides furtheradvantages:

– secure galvanic isolation between inputand output circuits

– extended switching capacity range– no leakage current when contacts

are open– minimal power loss when contacts

are closed– multiple contact capability

The use of relay couplers is limited by theirrelatively low switching frequencies andlimited contact life. TURCK uses highquality relays with a mechanical life of atleast 20 million switching operations.The electrical life depends strongly on theconnected load type and can drop toapprox. 1 million switching operations,when the relay contacts are subject tomaximum load.

TURCK's relay couplers are offered as fouror eight channel Eurocard versions. Singleor dual channel versions are available inmodular housings.

A key consideration in the selection of theappropriate electrical relay is the contactmaterial. Silver alloy, the standard contactmaterial, is primarily intended for powercircuits and is somewhat less reliable forlow voltages (≤ 10 mA). Hard gold-platedcontacts should be used for low voltagelevel applications.

If a high current is switched with a gold-plated contact, the gold plating will bedamaged and consequently the contactsare unsuitable for switching low levelcurrents.

All switching capacity and switchingcurrent indications refer to resistive loads.For inductive loads it is required to ob-serve the relay-specific load limits, whichcan be provided by TURCK on request.

If the relay coupler is directly to connectedto a contactor, the contactor must beequipped with a protective circuitry at thecoil connection.

Relay coupler with direct control

The coil in the relay coupler is energiseddirectly by the input signal. A bridgerectifier is wired in series with the non-polarised coil circuit which can then beinterfaced directly to AC input circuits.The rectifier bridge acts as a free wheelingdiode and the flyback voltage issuppressed when the relay is de-energised.

Hybrid Relays with amplifier input

Relay couplers with amplifier input provideadditional circuitry for input signal ampli-fication. This makes them suitable for lowlevel signal sources that otherwise wouldnot be capable of switching a relay directly.At a typical current consumption of ≤ 2mA, the relays have pre-defined switchingthresholds, depending on the particularversion. This type of relay needs auxiliarypower.

Electronic couplers

Relays using contacts suffer certain dis-advantages such as contact bounce,limited contact life and low switching fre-quency. In addition, they are unsuitable forlow level operation (current and voltage),unless special contact materials are used.

By comparison, electronic relays arebounce-free, resistant to wear and havea high switching frequency.

Electronic relays provide a wide controlvoltage range. As with all electronicdevices the voltage in the on-state and theleakage current in the off-state should beconsidered. Devices with Triac outputsalso require a minimum load current.Generally, output circuits are not short-circuit protected.

Safe isolation according to VDE 0106

Relays with safe isolation according toVDE 0106 are offered on interfacemodul,multimodul and in multicart® style modularhousings.

Forced-guided contact pairs

Safety relay couplers are equipped withforced-guided contact pairs, i.e. a normallyopen and a normally closed contact arelinked. This method provides a controlcontact to supervise correct switchingoperation.

Couplers and Interface Devices

6


• 1-channel inductive coupler


• Extended control voltage range

The single channel electronic couplersMK71-T12/… provide a reliable isolationbetween contact and control circuit.

A yellow LED on the front of the deviceindicates the switching status.

Inductive CouplerMK71-T12-60VDC/250VDCMK71-T12-250VDC/250VDC1-channel

The coupler has a defined switchingthreshold. The output Mosfets will onlybe switched after the input value hasreached a preset value.

Above the preset value the input currentremains constant, even if the input voltagevaries.

��

�

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

MK71-T12-60VDC/250VDC

MK71-T12-250VDC/250VDC

��

��

��

�

��

��


Type MK71-T12-60VDC/250VDC MK71-T12-250VDC/250VDCIdent-no. 7515302 7515301

Clearances and creepage distances safe galvanic isolation safe galvanic isolationBetween input and contact circuit 5 mm below varnish and plastic/5 kV 5 mm below varnish and plastic/5 kVBetween contact circuits 4 mm below varnish 2.5 kV 4 mm below varnish 2.5 kV

Input circuits reverse polarity protected reverse polarity protectedInput circuits 45...250 VDC 110...250 VDCCurrent consumption ≤ 3 mA (typically 1.4 mA) ≤ 3 mA (typically 1.8 mA)

Output circuits N-channel-Mosfet N-channel-MosfetSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VDC ≤ 250 VDCSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 200 mA ≤ 200 mASwitching frequency ≤ 1 kHz ≤ 1 kHz

LED indication– Switching status yellow yellow





Inductive Coupler MK71-T12

�!

��

6


The two single channel relay couplers typeIM73-12-R/... are used to securely isolatebinary signals.

Both couplers are equipped with twosynchronised output relays with one SPDTcontact each.

Depending on the type of device, the inputmay be either 24 VUC or 230 VAC.


Relay CouplerIM73-12-R/230VACIM73-12-R/24VUC1-channel

• 1-channel relay coupler with safegalvanic isolation per VDE 0106


• Relay per VDE 0435

• 2 SPDT relay outputs

• 5 A switching current at 250 VAC

• Housing with removable terminalblocks

�

��

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

�

� �

��

��

For the application in SIL 3 circuits thefollowing basic conditions have to beconsidered :– If the output relay triggers a contactor

directly, the contactor has to beprovided with a protective circuitry atthe coil.

– Both relays have to be connectedin series.

– The contact circuit has to be providedwith a fuse which initiates at 60 % ofthe rated current (see characteristicload curve).

IM73-12-R/230VAC

IM73-12-R/24VUC

*) Application in SIL 3 circuits

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� "��

�� "��

��

��

��

��#$��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� "��

�� "��

��

�� !��!��%�

��

��#$��

*)

*)


Type IM73-12-R/230VAC IM73-12-R/24VUCIdent-no. 7520511 7520512

Clearances and creepage distances– between the output relay circuits 8 mm/4 kV 8 mm/4 kV– between input and contact circuit 8 mm/4 kV 8 mm/4 kV

Input circuitsInput voltage 184...276 VAC 19...29 VUCInput current ≤ 15 mA ≤ 25 mA

Output circuits 2 relays, each 1 SPDT contact 2 relays, each 1 SPDT contactSwitching voltage ≤ 250 V ≤ 250 VSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 5 A ≤ 5 ASwitching capacity AC ≤ 2000 VA ≤ 2000 VASwitching capacity DC ≤ 180 W ≤ 180 WSwitching frequency 5 Hz 5 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

LED indication– Switching status yellow (in the input circuit) yellow (in the input circuit)



Connection removable terminal blocks, reverse polarityprotected, screw terminals, self-lifting



��

��

��

Relay Coupler IM73-12-R

The curved line indicates the maximum safeswitching levels at which arcing subsides priorto closing of the paired contact (importantwhen NO and NC contacts are at unequalpotentials).

Do not exceed the rated switching voltageand current.

&� &� &� &� � � � � � � �

� �

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

� �'

� �'

� �'

� �'

� �'

� �'

�� '

� �'

�� '

� �'

�

(��)��*+,��-

+��,+�.

�� //-��(�)

Characteristic load curve

6


• Relay couplersMK73-R111-Ex0/...: 1-channelMK73-R222-Ex0/...: 2-channel




• Relay coupler for switching ofintrinsically safe circuits EEx ia

• Safe galvanic isolationof contact and control circuitaccording to EN 50020

• High quality reed relays withrhodium contacts

• Switching frequency up to 50 Hz

The relay couplers MK73-R111-Ex0 andMK73-R222-Ex0 are designed to switchintrinsically safe circuits and feature safegalvanic isolation between contact andcontrol circuit according to EN 50020.

The relay coupler is available in thefollowing versions:

– Type MK73-R111-Ex0:single-channel with oneSPDT contact

– Type MK73-R222-Ex0:two channels with oneNO contact each

Relay CouplerMK73-R111-Ex0/24VUCMK73-R222-Ex0/24VUC1-channel/2-channel

The switching status of the relays isindicated via front panel LEDs. The reedrelay’s switching frequency of 50 Hz issignificantly higher than that of standardrelays.

These kind of reed relays with rhodiumcontacts are suited for general controltasks, especially then, when standardtypes cannot be used due to theswitching frequency requirements and theadmissible contact ratings.

MK73-R111-Ex0

MK73-R222-Ex0

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�0�

�� '

� �� %��

�

�

�

�

�0�

�

�0�

� �� %��

�� '

�

�

�

�


Type MK73-R111-Ex0/24VUC MK73-R222-Ex0/24VUCIdent.-no. 7521001 7521002

Clearances and creepages safe galvanic isolation to EN50020; A2 safe galvanic isolation to EN50020; A2Between control and contact circuit ≤ 375 V peak value ≤ 375 V peak valueBetween two contact circuits – ≤ 90 V peak value

Input circuitInput voltage 10…30 VUC 10…30 VUCInput current ≤ 30 mA ≤ 30 mA per channel

Output circuits reed relay for switching of reed relay for switching ofintrinsically safe circuits EEX ia II C intrinsically safe circuits EEX ia II C

Switching voltage ≤ 28 V ≤ 45 VSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 240 mA ≤ 200 mASwitching capacity ≤ 7 W ≤ 10 WSwitching frequency ≤ 50 Hz 50 HzContact configuration 1 SPDT contact 2 NO contactsContact material rhodium rhodium

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity/ BVS 03 ATEX E335 BVS 03 ATEX E335Statement of conformity TURCK 06007M X TURCK 06007M XMax. values– Switching voltage Ui < 28 VDC < 45 VDC– Switching current Ii < 240 mA < 200 mA– Switching capacity Pi 7 W 10 WInternal inductances/capacitances Li/Ci negligible negligibleMarking of the Device É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC É II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIC


LED indications– Switching status yellow yellow



Connection flat terminals with self-liftingpressure plates



Relay Coupler MK73-R111/222-Ex0

�!

��

6


The devices are available with relay,transistor or triac outputs to cover a widevariety of applications. Transistor outputsare short-circuit and reverse polarityprotected.

By purposely eliminating an overload oftechnical options, these couplers havebeen designed to provide high operationalintegrity at a low cost which makes theman ideal interface at the best price/functionratio.

A comprehensive range of options are alsoavailable for special applications.

Yellow LEDs on the front of the deviceindicate the switching status.

Interface ModulesMK73-R…EMK73-R…AMK73-T…EMK73-T…AMK73-Z…A2-channel/4-channel

• 2-channel in 18 mm widehousings, 4-channel in 36 mmwide housings

• Reliable interface betweendifferent potentials

• Isolation per VDE 0106

• 1 output per channelR = NO relayT = transistorZ = triac

The couplers MK73-... are used to isolateand process binary signals in applicationswhere a high component density isrequired.

Vertical isolation of up to 4 channels resultsin a 9 mm wide space per channel.

The couplers are designed as inputcouplers (type E) and output couplers(type A): input couplers have the inputterminals on the bottom plane and outputcouplers have the output terminals on thebottom plane; i.e. the terminals for thecontrol level are always on top, theterminals for the field level are always onthe bottom.

This allows for a clear single level layout ofthe couplers by function.

��

��

��

�

� �

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

� � � �


relay

2 4

MK73-R22E/12VUCMK73-R22E/24VUC MK73-R44E/24VUC

≤ 20 mA

5

8 mm/4 kV4 mm/2 kV (output circuits)

1 NO contact250 V2

500/60

silver-alloy + 3 µm Auvaristor

approx. 6 msapprox. 2 ms

30 x 106

1 x 105

18 3601 02

Connection diagram2 channel coupler

Connection diagram4 channel coupler

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 5 6

3 4 7 8

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12

5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16

Input coupler

transistor

2 4

MK73-T22E/12VDCMK73-T22E/24VDC MK73-T44E/24VDCMK73-T22E/60VDCMK73-T22E/115VACMK73-T22E/230VAC MK73-T44E/230VAC

≤ 10 mA

20 k (10 k with 60 V version)20

8 mm/4 kV4 mm/2 kV

40 VDC0.11

≤ 2 V

5 x Inom, yes

18 3601 02

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 5 6

3 4 7 8

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12

5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16

Output

Channels

Input voltage 12 V (± 20%)24 V (± 20%)30-120 VDC80-200 VAC

130-250 VACControl current/channel

Switching frequencyDC version [Hz]UC version [Hz]AC version [Hz]

Clearances and creepage distancesBetween control circuit and contactsBetween contacts

Output circuitsSwitching voltage (V)Switching current (A)Switching capacity (VA/W)Minimum current/leakage current (mA)Voltage drop at maximum load (V)Contact materialContact protectionShort-circuit and reverse polarity protection(A)"ON" delay"OFF" delayMechanical lifeElectrical life

Housing (mm)Dimensions (see page 14)

Switching diagram, 1 channel �� 1��

Interface Modules MK73

6


input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 5 6

3 4 7 8

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12

5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 5 6

3 4 7 8

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12

5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 5 6

3 4 7 8

input output

channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12

5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16

transistor

2 4

MK73-T22A/12VDCMK73-T22A/24VDC MK73-T44A/24VDCMK73-T22A/60VDC MK73-T44A/60VDCMK73-T22A/115VACMK73-T22A/230VAC

≤ 10 mA

20 k (10 k with 60 V version)

20

8 mm/4 kV4 mm/2 kV

40 VDC (80 VDC version .../K20)0.1 (1 A version .../K20)

≤ 2 V

5 x Inom, yes

18 3601 02

triac

2

MK73-Z22A/12VDCMK73-Z22A/24VDCMK73-Z22A/60VDCMK73-Z22A/115VACMK73-Z22A/230VAC

≤ 10 mA

20

20

8 mm/4 kV4 mm/2 kV

250 VAC0.3 Arms

1.5 mA

18 3601 02

relay

2 4

MK73-R22A/12VUCMK73-R22A/24VUC MK73-R44A/24VUC

≤ 20 mA

5

8 mm/4 kV4 mm/2 kV

250 V2

500/60

silver-alloy + 3 µm Auvaristor

approx. 6 msapprox. 2 ms

30 x 106

1 x 105

18 3601 02

Output coupler

�� 1�� 1��


MK73-R22A/12VUC 7530022MK73-R22A/24VUC 7530024MK73-R22E/12VUC 7530002MK73-R22E/24VUC 7530004MK73-R44A/24VUC 7530064MK73-R44E/24VUC 7530044

MK73-T22A/12VDC 7530122MK73-T22A/24VDC 7530124MK73-T22A/60VDC 7530125MK73-T22A/115VAC 7530126MK73-T22A/230VAC 7530128MK73-T22A/24VDC/K20 7530134MK73-T22A/60VDC/K20 7530135MK73-T22A/115VAC/K20 7530136MK73-T22A/230VAC/K20 7530138MK73-T22E/12VDC 7530102MK73-T22E/24VDC 7530104MK73-T22E/60VDC 7530111MK73-T22E/115VAC 7530106MK73-T22E/230VAC 7530108MK73-T44A/24VDC 7530164MK73-T44A/60VDC 7530165MK 73-T44A/115VAC 7530166MK 73-T44A/230VAC 7530168MK 73-T44E/24VDC 7530144MK 73-T44E/230VAC 7530148

Relay coupler Ident-no. Transistor coupler Ident-no. Triac coupler Ident-no.

MK73-Z22A/12VDC 7530222MK73-Z22A/24VDC 7530224MK73-Z22A/60VDC 7530225MK73-Z22A/115VAC 7530226MK73-Z22A/230VAC 7530228

01

02 Housing 16-pole, 36 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 per UL 94

Mounting snap-on clamps for top-hat rail(DIN 50022)or screw terminals for panelmounting

Connection via flat terminals with self-lifting pressureplates with wire sleeves


with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature -25...+60 °C

Dimension drawings Housing 8-pole, 18 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 per UL 94

Mounting snap-on clamps for top-hat rail(DIN 50022)or screw terminals for panelmounting

Connection via flat terminals with self-lifting pressureplates



Interface Modules MK73

�!

��

��

��

6


• 1-channel relay coupler

• Relay conforming to VDE 0435

• For 24 VAC/DC or230 VAC input

• Switching current ≤≤≤≤≤ 3 A

• Varistor protected output contacts

• Hard gold plated contacts

• Galvanic isolation according toVDE 0106

The MK73-R11/... single channel relaycoupler provides reliable galvanic isolationbetween the contact and control currentcircuit (8 mm/4 kV).

Both contacts are protected by varistors.Silver-alloy contacts with hard gold platingallow the relay to be used for standardcontrol as well as for power applications.

Input may be either 24 VAC/DC or230 VAC.


Relay CouplerMK73-R11230VAC/24VDC/24VUC1-channel

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�� "� �'

��

�!��!��%��


Type MK73-R11Ident-no. 75201

Clearances and creepage distancesBetween input and contact circuit 8 mm/4 kV

Input circuitsInput A1 and A3– Input voltage 184...276 VAC– Input current ≤ 20 mAInput A1 and A2– Input voltage 19...29 VUC– Input current ≤ 20 mA

Output circuits relay output (SPDT contact)Switching voltage ≤ 250 V per VDE 0110, Group CSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 3 ASwitching capacity ≤ 750 VA/60 WSwitching frequency 5 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm AuContact protection with varistors

LED indication– Switching status yellow (in the input circuit)





Relay Coupler MK73-R11

�!

��

6





• Switching voltage ≤≤≤≤≤ 250 V

• Galvanic isolation accordingto VDE 0106

• Universal supply voltage

The single channel MK73-R11H/... relaycoupler features three different operationmodes:

1. Standard operation: A 32. Manual operation: power supply on

A2 and input via the switch (H)located on the front of the device.

3. Off: switch in the front set to 0, noexternal input is possible.

In addition, an integrated blinking light maybe operated for all functions via input 1.The blinking light is independent from therelay input.


Relay CouplerMK73-R11H/24VUC1-channel

Typical applications are in the range of air-conditioning and ventilation systems,where drives must frequently be switchedon and off manually.

��

��

�� !

� �

��

��

��

��

��

23-/��+��+.-�.4 ��-��

5,��6��,��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

5�

� �+

78

9�

�� "� �'

��%��

5,��6-/

:��.


Type MK73-R11H/24VUCIdent-no. 7520120

Clearances and creepage distancesBetween input and contact circuit 8 mm/4 kV

Input circuitsPower supply during manual operation 24 VUCInput (A2, A3 und B1)– Nominal input voltage 24 VUCCurrent consumption ≤ 20 mA

Output circuits 1 relay, 1 SPDT contactSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 3 ASwitching capacity ≤ 750 VA/60 WContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching frequency ≤ 5 Hz

LED indications– Switching status yellow– Blinking light red





Relay Coupler MK73-R11H

�!

��

6




• 2 SPDT relay outputs

• 5 A switching current at 230 VAC

The MK73-R12… single channel relaycouplers are especially suited for use asinterface modules.

Each of the couplers has two SPDT relayoutputs.

Depending on the type of the device, theinput may be either 24 VUC or 230 VAC.


Relay CouplersMK73-R12/24VUCMK73-R12/230VAC1-channel

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�!��%��

�� 6��

�� 6��

MK73-R12/230VAC

MK73-R12/24VUC


Type MK73-R12/230VAC MK73-R12/24VUCIdent-no. 75205 75207

Clearances and creepage distancesBetween input and contact circuit 4 mm/2 kV 4 mm/2 kV

Input circuitsInput voltage 184...276 VAC 19...28 VUCInput current ≤ 20 mA ≤ 25 mA

Output circuits 2 relays, each1 SPDT contact 2 relays, each 1 SPDT contactSwitching voltage ≤ 250 V ≤ 250 VSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 5 A ≤ 5 ASwitching capacity AC ≤ 1 kVA ≤ 1 kVASwitching capacity DC see diagram see diagramSwitching frequency 5 Hz 5 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

LED indication– Switching status yellow (in the control circuit) yellow (in the control circuit)





�� ;��<

��=��

�� ;�<

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

� � � � �

��>��

��>� ��

��>��

�

�

�

�

�

!

��! ��

��>��

�� ;�<

�� ;�<

��"��

��"��

��?#�� $��@

��

��

�

�

��

�

��

��

Relay Couplers MK73-R12

�!

��

6



• Two relay outputs each withtwo SPDTs

• Relay according to VDE 0435

• 24 VUC input


• Minimum switching current 10 µA

• Hard gold plated contacts


The single channel device MK73-R14/... isdesigned to switch low currents, e.g.Pt100 signals.

Silver-alloy contacts with hard gold platingenable to use the relay for standard controlas well as for power applications.

The coupler output features twosynchronously controlled relays with twoSPDTs each.

Relay CouplerMK73-R14/24VUC1-channel

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

If currents higher than 25 mA are switched,the gold plating of the contacts may bedamaged. Consequently, low level signalscannot be switched reliably.

The devices are suited for 24 VUC inputsignals.


��

��

��

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

!

�

�

�!��!��%��

�� "��

��"� �'


Type MK73-R14/24VUCIdent-no. 7520807

Clearances and creepage distancesTest voltage input/output 1.5 kV

Input circuitsInput– Input voltage 19...29 VUC– Input current ≤ 20 mA

Output circuits 1 relay, 4 SPDT contactsSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC /220 VDC per VDE 0110, Group CSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 125 VA/60 WSwitching capacity min. 10 µA/30 mVContact resistance 50 mΩ (initial)Switching frequency 5 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

LED indication– Switching status yellow (in the control circuit)






%&

��

6



• Reliable interface betweendifferent voltages

• 1 NO contact per channel

• 2 channels in an 18 mm widehousing


The dual channel coupler MK73-R22/... isprimarily used for applications requiringhigh component density.

The coupler output features a relay with aNO contact for each channel.

Yellow LEDs on the front of the deviceindicate the switching status.

Relay CouplerMK73-R22/24VUC2-channel

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

0�

��

��

��

0�

�� "��

�� "� �'

�!��!��%��


Type MK73-R22Ident-no. 75200

Clearances and creepage distancesBetween input and contact circuit 8 mm/4 kVBetween output circuits 4 mm/2 kV

Input circuitsInput voltage 19...29 VUCInput current ≤ 20 mA

Output circuits relay output (double contacts, NO contact)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency 5 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

LED indications– Switching status contact 1 yellow– Switching status contact 2 yellow






�!

��

6


• 1-channel safety relay coupler

• Tested safety relay with forcedguided contacts in conformancewith ZH 1/457

• Output circuit with 3 NO and2 NC contacts

• Relay clearances and creepagesper VDE 0110,Isolation Group C 250 VAC/300 VDC

The MK73-S01/... coupler features aninternal SF4 safety relay manufactured bySDS and forced guided contacts forenhanced control reliability. The outputconsists of three NO and two NC contacts.

The forced guided operation of the twosets of contacts enables this relay to beused in two-hand control applications suchas presses. This type of operation is man-dated by occupational safety standardsand regulations.

Safety Relay CouplerMK73-S01/24VDC1-channel

A forced guided contact pair consists ofone NO and one NC contact tied toa common mechanical actuator. This con-figuration ensures that the NO and NCcontact cannot be closed simultaneously.If one of the contacts welds, the pairedcontact remains forced open, regardlessof the input state.

The following sets of contacts are forcedguided:– 5/6 and 13/14– 11/12 and 19/20

In addition to the two sets of forcedguided contacts, NO contacts 9/10 arealso available.

Welding of NO contacts 13/14 or 19/20forces the corresponding NC contact tostay open, without disabling the other pairof contacts. But if one of the NC contacts5/6, 9/10 or 11/12 welds, the armaturewould be blocked, forcing the othercontact pair(s) to remain fixed.

This type of operation corresponds to theregulations for forced guided operation.

By connecting an external monitoringdevice to the output circuit, it is possibleto detect both the type and location of afailure.

The internal relay’s forced guided contactconfiguration is prototype-tested by TÜVand approved by UL, SEV, and SUVA.Each contact spring has its own chamber,ensuring circuit isolation even if springbreakage occurs.

There are no return springs used, therebyeliminating the hazardous „intermediate“position, which is common in other safetyrelays, following contact spring breakage.


��

��

�

��

�

�

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

�!��!��

�

!

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�!

��

��

��


Type MK73-S01/24VDCIdent-no. 7524005

Clearances and creepage distances– Between input and contact circuit 4 mm/2.5 kV– Between contact circuits 4 mm/2.5 kV

Input circuitInput voltage 19...29 VDCInput current ≤ 30 mA

Output circuits forced guided contact pairsSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VUCSwitching current ≤ 3 A (when all contacts are used)

≤ 6 A (when two contacts are used)Switching capacity ≤ 100 W/1000 VASwitching frequency ≤ 5 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm AuElectrical life 4 x 105 operationsMechanical life 107 operations






The curved line indicates the maximum safeswitching levels at which arcing subsides priorto closing of the paired contact (importantwhen NO and NC contacts are at unequalpotentials).

Do not exceed the rated switching voltageand current.

�� ! ��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��'

��'

��'

!��'

��'

��'

��'

��'

��'

��'

(��) ��

�� (�)

��

Safety Relay Coupler MK73-S01

%&

��

6


• 1-channel safety relay coupler

• Tested safety relay withforced guided contacts inconformance with ZH 1/457

• Output circuit with 2 NO and2 NC contacts

• Relay according to VDE 0110Pollution degree 3/250 VOvervoltage category III/300 V

Safety Relay CouplerMK73-S02/24VDC1-channel

The internal relay's forced guided contactconfiguration is TÜV-prototype-tested andapproved by UL, SEV, SUVA. Each contactspring has its own chamber, ensuringcircuit isolation even if contact springbreakage occurs.

There are no return springs used, therebyeliminating the hazardous "intermediate"position, which is common in other safetyrelays, following contact spring breakage.

A yellow LED indicates the switchingstatus.

The safety relay coupler MK73-S02/... isinternal equipped with a forced guidedsafety relay manufactured by SDS, typeSF2. The output consists of two NO andtwo NC contacts.

The forced guided operation of the twosets of contacts allows this relay to beused in two-hand control applications suchas presses. This type of operation is man-dated by the occupational safety stan-dards and regulations.

Forced guided contacts consist of one NOand one NC contact linked to a commonmechanical actuator. This configurationensures that the NO and NC contactscannot be closed simultaneously. If one ofthe contacts welds, the paired contactremains forced open, regardless of theinput state.

Forced guidance always applies to one NCcontact and one NO contact as shown inthe block diagram. Internally, the two NCcontacts are connected in series.

Contact welding of one or two of the NOcontacts keeps both NC contacts securelyand durably open. Contact welding of oneNO contact does not affect performanceof the second NO contact.

An external monitoring device enables faultdetection.

��

��

��

�

� �

� �

��

��

��

�

�

�

!

��!��!��

��

�� %�� "� �'


Type MK73-S02/24VDCIdent-no. 7524010

Clearances and creepage distances– Between input and contact circuit 4 mm/2.5 kV– between contact circuits 4 mm/2.5 kV

Input circuitsInput voltage 19...29 VDCInput current ≤ 30 mA

Output circuits forced guided contact pairsSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VUCSwitching current ≤ 3 A (when all contacts are used)

≤ 6 A (when two contacts are used)Switching capacity ≤ 100 W/1000 VASwitching frequency ≤ 5 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm AuElectrical life 4 x 105 operationsMechanical life 107 operations






The curved line indicates the maximum safeswitching level at which arcing subsides priorto closing of the paired contact (importantwhen NO and NC contacts are at unequalpotentials).

The indicated switching voltage and currentmay not be exceeded.

�� ! ��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��'

��'

��'

!��'

��'

��'

��'

��'

��'

��'

(��) ��

�� (�)

��

Safety Relay Coupler MK73-S02

%&

��

6


Relay CouplerMK73-UR12/K03/24VDC1-channel


• Relay per VDE 0435

• Inexpensive relay coupler forNAMUR sensors accordingto EN 60947-5-6

• Programmable NO/NC outputfunction

The MK73-UR12/K03 relay coupler is de-signed specifically for use in conjunctionwith NAMUR type proximity sensors. It isa low cost alternative to switching ampli-fiers, if intrinsically safe protection is notrequired.

The output performance (normally open ornormally closed mode) of the relay isselected by means of the switch "A-R" onthe front of the device.

The output consists of an SPDT contactand a NO contact.


��

�

��

��

��

� "

��

�� A+�-/23-/��+��+.-�.4 ��-��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

78

��

9

�

�

A+�-/

�� 6��


Type MK73-UR12/K03/24VDCIdent-no. 75203

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 10 %Current consumption ≤ 50 mA

Clearances and creepage DistancesBetween input and contact circuit 4 mm/2 kV

Input circuits according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)Operating characteristics– Input voltage 8 V– Input current 8 mASwitching threshold 1.55 mAHysteresis 0.2 mA

Output circuits relay output (1 SPDT contact, 1 NO contact)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VSwitching current/continuous current ≤ 5 ASwitching capacity AC ≤ 1 kVASwitching capacity DC see diagrams belowSwitching frequency 5 HzContact material silver-alloy + 3 µm Au

LED indications– Power green– Switching status (in output circuit) yellow





�� $�� ;��<

��=��

�� ;�<

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

� � � � �

��>��

��>� ��

��>��

�

�

�

�

�

!

��! ��

��>��

�� ;�<

�� ;�<

��"��

��"��

��?#�� $��@

��

��

�

�

��

�

��

��

Relay Coupler MK73-UR12/K03

�!

��

7


POWER SUPPLIESPOWER SUPPLIES


Hou

sing

TTTTType

Power Supplies/MonitorsSelection Guide

Housing Styleinterfacemodulmultimodulmultisafe®

multicart® MS

81-2

22-T

MS

81-2

22-R

MS

81-2

21-R

MC

82-2

425

MC

82-2

450

MC

83-2

SA

1M

C83

-4S

i

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

1 2 1 2 2 2 2 4

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

1 1 1 2

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

2 2 2 1

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

13 15 3 5 17 19 7 9 11

MK

83-U

24

MK

82-2

401

MK

81-2

22-R

IM82

-241

4


MK

81-1

1-R

FunctionsSensor power supplyAmplifier relayAmplifier relay, bistableStand-by power supplyVoltage monitorRipple monitor WPP

Diode isolating amplifier cardCircuit monitorFuse monitor

Number of channels

Output circuitsRelay, 1 SPDT contactTransistor, potential-freeTransistor output, pnpRelay outputs

Output current40 mA50 mA100 mA300 mA700 mA1.4 A2.5 A5 ADegree of protection

Output voltage12 V24 V

Output functionProgrammable – NO / NC

Supply voltage24 VDC

100...400 VDC115 VAC230 VAC94...265 VAC48...250 VUC85...132 VAC, 176...265 VAC and210...375 VDC


IM82

-245

0

7


Amplifier RelayMK81-11-R/48...250VUC1-channel

The MK81-11-R/48...250VUC amplifierrelay is suited for connection of 3-wiresensors (pnp).

The device features a universal supply forAC or DC operating voltages with a wideinput voltage range from 48...250 VUC.

The short-circuit and overload protectedsensor supply output is 24 VDC with amax. sensor current consumption of100 mA.The sensor current is reduced to 20 mA ifthe overload limit of 130 mA is exceededor if there is a short-circuit.The nominal voltage recovers as soon asthe short-circuit is eliminated.

• 1-channel supply for3-wire sensors

• Scanning and supply of3-wire sensors (pnp)

• Sensor supply: 24 VDC with max.sensor curret of 100 mA,short-circuit and overload protected

• Relay output with NO contact

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

The output circuit features a relay with anNO contact

A green LED indicates that the device ispowered. A yellow LED indicates theswitching status of the output (LED on -relay energised).

��

��

��

�

�

�

�� !"

#

$

��

�

��

�

�

%

�

�&�&

'(

)�

��$��!*+��,*�$��!+#�-��!


Amplifier Relay MK81-11-R

Type MK81-11-R/48...250VUCIdent-no. 7545013

Supply voltage UB 48...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...62 HzPower consumption ≤ 3.5 VAGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms


Input circuit 3-wire sensors (pnp)Sensor supply 24 VDC ± 3 %Max. sensor current consumption ≤ 100 mA

Output circuit 1 Relay output (NO)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 HzContact material Ag alloy + 3 µm Au






�.

��

��

7


Amplifier RelayMK81-222-R/24VDCMK81-222-R/230VAC2-channel

• 2-channel supply for 3-wire sensors(pnp and npn) and 2-wire sensorsaccording to EN 60947-5-6(NAMUR)

• Monostable transmission,multiplication,8 selectable logic functions

• Separately adjustable outputfunction of each channel

• 2 relay outputs with 1 SPDTcontact each

The dual channel amplifier relays MK81-222-R/... are suited for connection of twoproximity switches according toEN 60947-5-6 or 3-wire sensors (pnp ornpn). The current consumption of eachsensor may not exceed 20 mA (admissibletotal current 40 mA).

The device features two relay outputs withone hard gold plated SPDT contact perchannel. A front panel rotary switch servesto adjust the following functions:

– transmission 1:1 (monostable)– multiplication, two relay outputs are

assigned to input 1– AND logic– NAND logic– OR logic– NOR logic

– XOR logic– XNOR logic– RS flipflop– D flipflop

The output function mode can be adjustedvia front panel switches. The input statesmay be inverted to adapt the logicfunctions to the sensors. In the mono-stable function mode, an inversion accordsto a change of the output function.Additionally, it is possible to change theoutput function mode of relay 2 via thethird switch.

The switching status of each relay isindicated via a yellow LED; a green LEDindicates that the device is powered.

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� � ��

��

��

� �

��

��

/��0 ��

1 �& �0 ��

��

��

��

�

�#

�

�

�!2�3

�

�

�

$

#

%

�

��

�%

��

.

��

�$

)�

'(

'(

�

�

�� !"

&�&�&�

�� !"

+�

+�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��$��!*+��,*

��!��$��!+#�-



Supply voltage UB 184...264 VAC 10...30 VDCLine frequency 48...62 Hz –Power consumption ≤ 5 VA ≤ 5 WGalvanic isolation between input circuits, output circuits between input circuits, output circuits


Input circuits 3-wire sensors, pnp 3-wire sensors, pnp3-wire sensors, npn 3-wire sensors, npn2-wire sensors, NAMUR 2-wire sensors, NAMUR

Sensor supply 12 V ± 5 %, stabilised 12 V ± 5 %, stabilised– Ripple WPP ≤ 1 % ≤ 1 %– Maximum load ≤ 40 mA ≤ 40 mA

Output circuits 2 relay outputs 2 relay outputsNumber of contacts each 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au each 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VAC ≤ 250 VACSwitching current ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity < 500 VA/60 W < 500 VA/60 W

LED indications– Power green green– Switching status 2 x yellow 2 x yellow

Housing 16-pole, 36 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABS 16-pole, 36 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 per UL 94 flammability class V-0 per UL 94

Mounting snap-on clamps for top-hat rail (DIN 50022) snap-on clamps for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)or screw terminals for panel mounting or screw terminals for panel mounting

Connection via flat terminals with self-lifting pressure plates via flat terminals with self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2

with wire sleeves with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20 IP 20Operating temperature -25…+60 °C -25…+60 °C

Amplifier Relay MK81-222-R

��

��

7


• 2-channel power supply for3-wire proximity sensors (npn, pnp)

• Programmable NO or NCoutput function of each channel

• Stabilised and short-circuitprotected sensor supply circuit



The dual channel MS81-221-R/... amplifierrelays are dual channel devices with relayoutputs.

The device is capable of powering two3-wire pnp sensors (II) or two 3-wire npnsensors (III). Mechanical contacts mayalso be used as input devices (I) (for ope-ration as a contact protection relay). Themaximum output current of the device is50 mA per channel. It is therefore suitablefor use with:

– inductive sensors– magnetic field sensors– capacitive sensors– photoelectric sensors– ultrasonic sensors

Each channel has one SPDT relay output.

Amplifier RelayMS81-221-R/230VACMS81-221-R/115VAC2-channel

The operation of each channel may bechanged from NO (without bridge) toNC (with bridge) by jumpering twoterminals.

Status indications are provided by threeLEDs located on the front panel. Thegreen LED is energised when the device ispowered, the two yellow LEDs indicatethe status of the respective outputs.

��

� � � � � � � �

� ��

��

��

��

� � ��

��

��

�

��

%

�

$

#

�

�

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#

�

�

�

�

4�

4�

&�&

��

��

��

��

�

�

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

�&�

��

��

��

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#

��

��

��

555 55 5

)�

'(

'(

3

3

3

3

3

3

��"

��"

��$��!*+��,*

��!��$��!+#�-

34��*"!4��1"


Type MS81-221-R/230VAC MS81-221-R/115VACIdent-no. 05121 05109

Supply voltage UB 196...253 VAC 98...132 VACLine frequency 48…62 Hz 48…62 HzPower consumption ≤ 6 VA ≤ 6 VAGalvanic isolation between input circuits, output circuits between input circuits, output circuits


Input circuits for 3-wire sensors, pnp/npn for 3-wire sensors, pnp/npnSensor supply– Sensor voltage 24 VDC, stabilised 24 VDC, stabilised– Sensor current ≤ 2 x 50 mA ≤ 2 x 50 mARipple WPP ≤ 5 % ≤ 5 %Maximum load ≤ 100 mA ≤ 100 mA

Output circuits 2 relay outputs 2 relay outputsNumber of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage 250 V 250 VSwitching current ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 10 Hz ≤ 10 HzSwitch-on time ≤ 15 ms ≤ 15 msSwitch-off time ≤ 15 ms ≤ 15 ms



for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)Connection 2 x 8 self-lifting pressure platesConnecton profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2

with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature -25…60 °C

Amplifier Relay MS81-221-R

�

��

7


The dual channel MS81-222-R/... amplifierrelays are dual channel devices with relayoutputs suitable for connection of twoproximity switches. The input circuits arecapable of powering two 3-wire proximitysensors (npn or pnp) or 2-wire NAMURsensors. The maximum sensor current is20 mA (maximum output current of device40 mA).

Each channel has one SPDT relay outputwith hard gold plated contacts.

The operation mode of each channel maybe programmed from NO to NC byjumpering two terminals. Status indicationsof the outputs are provided by two yellowLEDs. A green LED illuminates when thedevice is powered.

Amplifier RelayMS81-222-R/230VACMS81-222-R/115VAC2-channel

• 2-channel power supplyfor 3-wire proximity sensors(npn or pnp) or 2-wire sensorsper EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

• Monostable or bistablefunction (programmable)




Programming (with wire jumpers)

The device can be set to bistable opera-tion by setting the jumper block under thefront cover of the device. In the bistablemode one input serves as a set input andthe other as a reset input. The outputs aretriggered alternatively (complementaryoutput function).

When power is applied, the device resetsto the standard (preferred state) mode:channel 1, relay de-energised (LED 1, off)channel 2, relay energised (LED 2, on).

�6� ��67��7�� 67��

8��7��9��:�� 7��;�� ;��;�<��=��;��67��>��<��?8��<��6�7��;��<��767��> ?

��

� �

��

� � � � � � � �

� ��

��

��

��

� � ��

��

��

�

��

%

�

$

#

�

�

4�

4�

��

��@

��@

��

� A

3

(�

�

�

�

�

�

�

(�

'(

'(

)�

&�&

��

��

��

��

�

�

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#

��

��

��

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#555 55

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#

�!2�3

5

�!2�3

��

��

��

��

��

��

�&�

��

!

!

3

3

3

3

��"

��"

��$��!*+��,*

��!��$��!+#�-

��

��

34��*"!4��1"


Type MS81-222-R/230VAC MS81-222-R/115VACIdent-no. 0511100 0511102

Supply voltage UB 184...264 VAC 92...132 VACLine frequency 48...62 Hz 48...62 HzPower consumption ≤ 4.5 VA ≤ 5 VAGalvanic isolation between input circuits, output circuits between input circuits, output circuits


Input circuits 3-wire sensors, pnp 3-wire sensors, pnp3-wire sensors, npn 3-wire sensors, npn2-wire sensors, NAMUR 2-wire sensors, NAMUR

Sensor Supply 12 V ± 5 %, stabilised 12 V ± 5 %, stabilised– Ripple WPP ≤ 1 % ≤ 1 %– Maximum load ≤ 40 mA ≤ 40 mA

Output circuits 2 relay outputs 2 relay outputsNumber of contacts each 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au each 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 V ≤ 250 VSwitching current ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity < 500 VA/60 W < 500 VA/60 W

LED indications– Power green green– Switching status 2 x yellow 2 x yellow


for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)Connection 2 x 8 self-lifting pressure platesConnecton profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2


Amplifier Relay MS81-222-R

�

��

7


• 2-channel power supplyfor 3-wire proximity sensors(pnp, npn) or 2-wire sensorsper EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

• Monostable or bistablefunction (selectable)


• 2 short-circuit protected,potential-free transistor outputsfor switching of inductive loads

The dual channel MS81-222-T/... amplifierrelays provide a power source for twoproximity sensors. Available inputselections include two 3-wire proximitysensors with NO or NC outputs, or NAMURsensors. The maximum power consump-tion of each device is 40 mA. It is thereforesuitable for sensors with a powerconsumption of 20 mA each.

Each channel has one optically coupledisolated transistor output. The outputs arereverse-polarity protected by means of adiode connected in parallel. They areequipped with a thermic short-circuitprotection (a short-circuit during a polarityreversal will destroy the device).

They may be used for all types of DC loadssuch as contactors, lamps and valves.A protective circuitry against inductiveswitching peaks is integrated in the device.The outputs can be connected in parallelor in series.

The operating mode of each channel maybe changed from NO to NC by jumperingtwo terminals. Status indications of therespective outputs are provided by twoyellow LEDs. The green LED illuminateswhen the device is powered.

Amplifier RelayMS81-222-T/230VACMS81-222-T/115VAC2-channel

Programming via Jumper Block

The device can be changed to bistableoperation by setting the jumper blockunder the front cover of the device. In thebistable mode, one input serves as a setinput and the other as a reset input. Theoutputs are triggered alternatively(complementary output function).

When power is applied, the device resetsto standard (preferred state) mode:channel 1, relay de-energised (LED 1, off)channel 2, relay energised (LED 2, on).

� 6��67�� 7��67��

8��7��9��:��7��;��;��;�<��=��;��67��>��<��?8��<��6�7��;��<��767��>�?

��

� �

��

� � � � � � � �

� ��

��

� ��

��

��

� �

��

�

��

�

��

%

��

$�

#

��

��

4�

4�

��

��@

��

��@

��

� A

3 '(

'(

)�

&�&

��

��

��

��

�

�

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#

��

��

��

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#555 55

.

��

��

��

�%

��

�$

�#

�!2�3

5

�!2�3

��

��

��

��

��

��

�&�

!

!

3

3

3

3

��"

��"

�#$�,*��!

��

��34��*"!4��1"


Type MS81-222-T/230VAC MS81-222-T/115VACIdent-no. 0511000 0511020

Supply voltage UB 184...264 VAC 92...132 VACLine frequency 48...62 Hz 48...62 HzPower consumption ≤ 4.5 VA ≤ 5 VAGalvanic isolation between input circuits, output circuits between input circuits, output circuits


Input Circuits 3-wire sensors, pnp 3-wire sensors, pnp3-wire sensors, npn 3-wire sensors, npn2-wire sensors, NAMUR 2-wire sensors, NAMUR

Sensor supply 12 V ± 5 %, stabilised 12 V ± 5 %, stabilised– Ripple WPP ≤ 1 % ≤ 1 %– Maximum load ≤ 40 mA ≤ 40 mA

Output Circuits 2 potential-free transistor outputs 2 potential-free transistor outputsSwitching voltage ≤ 65 VDC ≤ 65 VDCSwitching current ≤ 2 A ≤ 2 AVoltage drop ≤ 0.3 V ≤ 0.3 V

LED Indications– Power green green– Switching status 2 x yellow 2 x yellow


for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)Connection 2 x 8 self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm² or 2 x 1.5 mm²


Amplifier Relay MS81-222-T

�

��

7


• Output voltage 24 VDC

• Output current 1.4 A

• Safety extra-low voltage (SELV)according to EN 60950

• Large voltage range94...265 VAC/100...400 VDC

• "Power good" relay

• Removable terminal blocks

The power supplies, type IM82-2414, aredesigned to power direct current devices,especially switching and monitoringdevices of the TURCK series interfacemodul, multimodul and multisafe®, as wellas light barriers and sensors.

The power supply provides an outputvoltage of 24 VDC and an output currentof 1.4 A. The cyclic overload protection isactivated if the current is higher than 1.6 A.The device provides safety extra-lowvoltage (SELV) according to EN 60950,protection class II.

If the front panel LED illuminates green, theconnected consumers are provided withpower. The "power good“ relay isenergised if the output voltage is higherthan 21 V. If the voltage drops below thisvalue, the relay is de-energised and theLED illuminates red.

The A.C. voltage inputs may only be usedalternatively and not for prime powerdistribution. During operation theremovable terminal blocks must beplugged in. When installing the device,please ensure that heat can dissipateeasily.

Power SupplyIM82-2414/94-265VAC/100-400VDC

��

��

��

��

��

��

��#

�%��,*��!

��

��

�$��

��.

�.$

��

�#�

��

�%�

��)�+3,

��

��,*� �!


Power Supply IM82-2414

Type IM82-2414/94-265VACIdent-no. 7545023

Supply voltage 94…265 VAC/100...400 VDCLine frequency 47…63 HzPower consumption < 40 WStarting current inrush < 15 times the nominal peak current value after ≥ 5 ms, I²t < 2,8 A²s

Galvanic isolation clearances and creepages: 8 mm,test voltage of serial device: 3 kVtest voltage of prototype: 4 kV

Output voltage 24 VDC ± 3 %Ripple ≤ 1 %Nominal load 1.4 AOverload protection > 1.6 A (cyclic)Power derating 2.5 %/K from 60 °C on

Output circuitSwitching voltage ≤ 30 VDCSwitching current ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity < 60 W

LED indicationsPower green/red (dual colour LED)

Housing 20-poles, 27 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 according to UL 94

Mounting snap-on mounting on hat rail (DIN 50022)or screw mounting on base plate

Connection removable terminal blocks, reverse-polarityprotected, screw connections, self-lifting

Connection profile ≤ 1 x 2.5 mm2, 2 x 1.5 mm2 or 2 x 1,0 mm2

with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature range -25...+70 °C

��!"

��

#�

7


• Output voltage 24 VDC(adjustable from 22.5...28.5 VDC)

• Output current 5 A

• Safety extra low voltage (SELV)according to EN 60950

• Large operating voltage range85...132 VAC or 176...264 VAC and210...375 VDC

• "Power-Good" relay

The power supplies, type IM82-2450, aredesigned to power direct current devices,especially switching and monitoringdevices of the TURCK series interfacemodul, multimodul and multisafe®.

The power supply provides an outputvoltage of 24 VDC and an output currentof 5 A. The potentiometer Vout is used toadjust the output voltage in a range from22.5...28.5 VDC.

The device provides safety extra-lowvoltage (SELV) according to EN 60950.

The front panel switch is used to set thepower supply mode, i.e. either individual orparallel operation:– single: individual mode– parallel: parallel mode

The “Power Good” relay is active as longas the input voltage is present and anovervoltage not exceeding 33 V isdetected on the output. If these conditionsare not fulfilled, the relay de-energises.


When installing the device, please ensurethat heat can dissipate easily.

Power SupplyIM82-2450

�$��%��!*��#��#��!*��%�$�,*

��

��

��,*$!

��$��!*+��,*�$��!+#�-��!

+� /

+� �

��

��

� � � �

!

�"#$

%&'()*

+,�,))*)

��!$% �� & �&��

��+&��&��


Type IM82-2450Ident-no. 7545025

Supply voltage UB 85…132 VAC, 176...265 VAC, 210...375 VDCLine frequency (AC) 47…63 HzPower consumption < 210 WStarting current inrush < 26 A at 230 VAC

Galvanic isolation clearances and creepages: 8 mm,test voltage of serial device: 3 kVtest voltage of prototype: 4 kV

Output voltage 24 VDC ± 3 % (adjustable from 22.5 VDC up to 28.5 VDC)Ripple ≤ 1 %Nominal load 5 APower derating from 60 °C on

Output circuit ("Power-Good" relay)Switching voltage ≤ 250 VAC/120 VDCSwitching current ≤ 2 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W


Housing 9-poles, 66 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSflammability class V-0 according to UL 94

Mounting snap-on mounting on hat rail (DIN 50022)Connection screw connections, self-liftingConnection profile 1.5...6 mm2

Degree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature range -10...+70 °C

Power Supply IM82-2450

��

��%

##

7


Power SupplyMK82-2401/230VUC

The power supplies MK82-2401 aredesigned for supply of DC loads, especiallyfor photoelectric barriers, sensors andmultimodul style switching and monitoringdevices.

The device features a universal powersupply with a wide voltage range forconnection of either AC or DC voltages.The devices features an output configu-ration of 24 VDC/100 mA. The output isshort-circuit and overload protected.If the overload limit of 130 mA is exceeded,the electronic fuse latches and the outputcurrent drops to approx. 20 mA. Latchingcan be reset by disconnecting the powersupply.

An illuminated green LED on the frontcover indicates that the power supply ofthe connected loads is ensured.

• Short-circuit and overloadprotected

• Output voltage: 24 VDCOutput current: 100 mA

• Ideal for supply of sensorsand photoelectric barriers

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��)�

�

�

%

�

�

�

�

�

��,*�� !


Type MK82-2401/230VUCIdent-no. 7545022

Supply voltage UB 48...250 VAC/48...375 VDCLine frequency 0...62 HzPower consumption ≤ 3.5 VA

Galvanic isolationClearances and creepage distances according to DIN/VDE 0110Test voltage 4 kVrms

Output voltage 24 VDC ± 3 %Ripple WPP ≤ 3 %Maximum load capacity ≤ 100 mAInfluence factor of suppy voltage level ≤ 1 %






Power Supply MK82-2401

�.

��

��

7


Voltage MonitorMK83-U241-channel

• 1-channel voltage monitor

• Monitoring of 24 VDCpower supplies

• 1 NO and 1 NC output contact

• Green LED for switchingstatus indications

The voltage monitor MK83-U24 isdesigned to monitor 24 VDC supplyvoltages for overvoltage, undervoltageand ripple.

Typical applications are:

– fuse failures in three-phase systems– voltage monitoring of battery charging

systems– fault indication for power supplies– overload control

This voltage monitor features two relayoutputs (1 NO and 1 NC contact).

The switching status is indicated bya green LED: it illuminates, if the voltagelevels are correct; it turns off, if there is anerror condition.

��

��

��

��

��

��

%

�

�

� ��

��

�%��!*+%#�,*

��!��#��!+#�-


Type MK83-U24Ident-no. 75220

Operating voltage UB 16.8...31.2 VDCRipple WPP ≤ 20 %Current consumption ≤ 30 mA

Output circuits 2 relay outputs (1 NC contact, 1 NO contact)Switching voltage 30 VAC/36 VDCSwitching current 2 ASwitching capacity 60 VA/60 W

Switching pointsUndervoltage– Switch-off threshold 19.68 V– Switch-on threshold 20.40 VOvervoltage– Switch-off threshold 28.32 V– Switch-on threshold 27.60 VRipple WPP ≥ 15 %Thermal drift of switching thresholds ≤ 0.03 %/K






Voltage Monitor MK83-U24

�.

��

��

8


LEVEL CONTROLSLEVEL CONTROLS

8


Hou

sing

Type

Level ControlsSelection Guide


MS

91-1

2-R

MK

91-R

11M

K91

-12-

RM

K91

-121

-RFunctionLevel controlProbe

Number of channels

Galvanic isolationInput circuit to output circuitInput circuit to power supplyOutput circuit to power supply

Input circuitsAdjustable sensitivity range

0.1...1 kΩ0.5...5 kΩ2...20 kΩ

10...100 kΩ40 kΩ

Hysteresis [%]

Switch-on and Switch-off delay0.1...15 s0.1...20 sSwitch-on delay15 s

ON/OFF controland probe selection

Output circuitsRelay output, SPDT contact per channelSwitching voltage 250 VSwitching current [A]

Transistor output per channel

Supply voltage24 VDC

230 VAC20...250 VUC


●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

1 1 1 1

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

5 10 10 10

●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

●●●●●

1 2 2 2●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

3 3 3 4

●●●●● ●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●● ●●●●●

●●●●●

5 7 9 11


Fig. 1 Dual level sensing regulator - example

Level Controls

Level controls are used to monitor andregulate the level of conductive liquids.They are typically used in bottling appli-cations where a distinction between foamand liquid must be made. The output ofthese controllers operate pump motorstarters and solenoid valves.

Monitoring and control of filling levels

Conductivity type level controllers aresuitable for all water-based liquids. Theymeasure the resistance between twoprobes in the liquid. AC voltages are usedin the probe circuit to eliminate build-up ofdeposits as well as corrosion.

Unlike most level controls available on themarket, the circuit voltage of the probes inTURCK devices is generated internally andhas no direct connection to the power line.Thus, line voltage fluctuations will not affectthe switching points. TURCK level controlsare also available for 24 VDC powersupplies.

The conductivity of liquids depends mainlyon their physical properties. In addition, theresistance of the liquid between the probesis directly affected by the distance and sizeof the probe itself. TURCK level controlscan be adjusted to wide ranges.

The devices also feature an adjustableswitch-on and switch-off delay function forapplications where turbulence in liquidlevels exist.

As a level monitor, these units can be usedto monitor and protect against overflow orrun-dry conditions. As a dual levelregulator, they can also be used to controlpumps and solenoid valves. For properdual level sensing a Reed relay is integratedin the device to alternate the probe voltagebetween upper and lower probe (MIN andMAX probe).

Dual level regulation with levelcontrols

Fig. 1 shows the basic configuration of adual level sensing regulator type MS 91.

Function A (Normally Open mode)

Free inlet/pump-out mode withenergised relay:If the liquid falls below the low levelsetpoint, the output relay and the "MIN"probe de-energise until liquid is added andthe liquid reaches the "MAX” probe.

Function R (Normally Closed mode)

Free outlet/pump-in mode with de-energised relay:When the liquid falls below the low levelsetpoint, the output relay and the "MIN"probe are energised until liquid is addedand the liquid level reaches the "Max"probe.

The MK91 coupler can be used forapplications with only one switch point.The switch point of this device is calibratedat 40 kΩ (other settings are availableon request).

Product range

Level controls are available in modulehousing and on Eurocard:

multisafe® level controls MS91– 1 channel– relay outputs (2 SPDT contacts)– modular housing, 50 x 75 mm

multimodul level controls MK91– 1 channel– 1 relay output (1 SPDT contact)– modular housing, 18 x 89 mm

Any commercial probes and accessoriesmay be used with these devices.(See TURCK EL1/1 probes in chapter 9,accessories, page 9 – 5).

An applications brochure is available onrequest.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

8


• 1-channel level control


• Relay output (1 SPDT contact)

• Switch point at 40 kΩΩΩΩΩ

• Hysteresis approx. 5 %

The MK91-R11 is a single channel levelcontrol for regulating conductive liquidlevels. Electrodes connected to the deviceanalyse the resistance of the liquid againstthe body of the container.

A rectangular AC voltage signal is appliedto the electrode. This enables DC-free andtherefore electrolytic-free measurement ofthe liquid resistance.

The switching point is firmly defined atRm = 40 kΩ (other values on request).When the switch point is reached, theoutput relay will close. A yellow LEDindicates the switching status; a greenLED indicates that the device is powered.

The device provides protection againstreverse polarity and transient overvoltage.

Level ControlMK91-R11/24VDC1-channel

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

�

��

�!

"

#

$%

&'

��

� �(�

�

�

�� )*+��,�� ),-� �.


Type MK91-R11/24VDCIdent-no. 7525202

Supply voltage UB 19...29 VDCCurrent consumption ≤ 20 mA at 24 VDCGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms, test voltage 4 kV/8 mm

input circuit and supply voltage galvanically connectedClearences and creepage distances– Input circuit and output circuit ≥ 4 kV/8 mm

Input circuitsSwitch point 40 kΩ ± 10 % (other values on request)Hysteresis approx. 5 %Switch point deviation in supply voltage range ≤ 1%Operation characteristics UB = 24 V, Rm = 40 kΩ– Rectangular signal f = 3 Hz– Amplitude of electrode voltage ± 2 V– Amplitude of electrode current ± 50 µA

Output circuits 1 relay outputNumber of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage ≤ 250 VUCSwitching current ≤ 3 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 WSwitching frequency ≤ 5 Hz





with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Operating temperature -25...60 °C

Level Control MK91-R11

#�

�#

"

8


Level ControlMK91-12-R/24VDCMK91-12-R/230VAC1-channel



• Adjustable sensitivity rangefrom 0.2...100 kΩΩΩΩΩ

• Distinction between liquidand foam

• Separately adjustable switch-onand switch-off delay from 0...20 s


• Electronic probe selection

The single channel MK91-12-R levelcontrol is used to monitor and regulate thelevels of conductive liquids. As a dual levelregulator, it can be used to control pumpsand solenoid valves. As a monitoringdevice it is designed for run-dryor overflow protection.

The level controller provides optimumreliability in differentiating a wide varietyof liquids. The device is also suited forapplications requiring distinction betweenfoam and liquid.

The sensitivity (resistance of liquid) isadjustable from 0.2...100 kΩ. One of foursensitivity options can be selected bymeans of the "Range" selector switch.Fine sensitivity adjustment within theselected range is accomplished witha potentiometer on the front cover.

The adjustable switch-on and switch-offdelay is especially important for turbulentliquid levels. A delay time from 0...20 scan be adjusted via two front coverpotentiometers.

The device features two relay outputs withone SPDT contact each. They operate inparallel and provide the switching function.The output configuration of both outputscan be programmed from NO to NC for allmeasuring ranges using the "Range"switch.

A green LED indicates that power isapplied to the device. A yellow LEDindicates the switching status.

For further information, please order ourinstallation guidelines.

� ��

&/�

��

��!��)

��

�

�

0��)

$%

�

��

� �

��

� ��

!��)

��

��

/�

&'

1 � �� (

11 2��(

111 2#��(

1) 2 ��(

�� )��,�� ),-� �.

3��4

��5�� 0��

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��677�8��5

/��

��6'�8��5

��9��5�8:��



Supply voltage UB 184...264 VAC 20...28 VDCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48…62 Hz ≤ 10 %Power/current consumption 3 VA/ < 15 mA rms 1.5 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and between input circuit, output circuit and

supply voltage for 250 Vrms, supply voltage for 250 Vrms,test voltage 2.5 kVrms test voltage 2.5 kVrms

Input circuitsProbe voltage 0.02...5 VPP/150 Hz (triangle) 0.02...5 VPP/150 Hz (triangle)Sensitivity range (switching threshold) 0.2…100 kΩ (adjustable in 4 ranges) 0.2…100 kΩ (adjustable in 4 ranges)– Range 1 0.2…1 kΩ 0.2…1 kΩ– Range 2 0.8…4 kΩ 0.8…4 kΩ– Range 3 2.5…15 kΩ 2.5…15 kΩ– Range 4 10…100 kΩ 10…100 kΩHysteresis approx. 10 % approx. 10 %Switch-on delay 0…20 s (adjustable) 0…20 s (adjustable)Switch-off delay 0…20 s (adjustable) 0…20 s (adjustable)

Output circuits 2 relay outputs 2 relay outputsNumber of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage 250 V 250 VSwitching current ≤ 3 A ≤ 3 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 W




Connection 2 x 16 flat terminals with 2 x 16 flat terminals withself-lifting pressure plates self-lifting pressure plates

Connection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2

with wire sleeves with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20 IP20Operating temperature -25…+60 °C -25…+60 °C

Level Control MK91-12-R

��

��

��

��

8


Level ControlMK91-121-R/24VDCMK91-121-R/230VAC1-channel



• Adjustable sensitivity rangefrom 0.2...100 kΩΩΩΩΩ

• Secure distinction betweenliquid and foam

• Separately adjustable switch-onand switch-off delay from 0...20 s


• Electronic probe selection

• Versions for voltages of 24 VDC/115 VAC/230 VAC available

The single channel MK91-121-R levelcontrol is used to monitor and regulate thelevels of conductive liquids. As a dual levelregulator, it can be used to control pumpsand solenoid valves. As a monitoringdevice it is designed for run-dryor overflow protection.

The level controller provides optimumreliability in differentiating a wide varietyof liquids. The device is also suited forapplications requiring distinction betweenfoam and liquid.

The sensitivity (resistance of liquid) isadjustable from 0.2...100 kΩ. One of foursensitivity options can be selected bylinking the input terminals. Fine adjustmentwithin the selected range is accomplishedwith a potentiometer on the front cover.

The adjustable switch-on and switch-offdelay is especially important for turbulentliquid levels. A delay time from 0...20 scan be adjusted via two front coverpotentiometers.

The device features two relay outputs withone SPDT contact each. They operate inparallel and provide the switching function.The output configuration of both outputscan be set from NO (with jumper betweenterminals 4/8) to NC (without jumper) forall measuring ranges.

A green LED indicates that power isapplied to the device. A yellow LEDindicates the switching status.

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

�� 677�8��5

�� 6'�8��5

�� 9� 5��8:��

�

&/�

��

��!��)

��

�

�

0��)

$%

�

��

� �

��

� ��

!��)

��

��

/�

&'

�

�

"

�

#

�

#/,

(��(

2#(��(

2 (��(

�� )��,�� ),-� �.

��5�� 0��

�� 8�� (�� (

3��4



Supply voltage UB 184...264 VAC 20...28 VDCLine frequency/ripple WPP 48…62 Hz ≤ 10 %Power/current consumption 3 VA/ < 15 mArms 1.5 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit, output circuit and between input circuit, output circuit and

supply voltage for 250 Vrms supply voltage for 250 Vrms

Input circuitsProbe voltage 0.02...5 VPP/150 Hz (triangle) 0.02...5 VPP/150 Hz (triangle)Sensitivity range (switching threshold) 0.2…100 kΩ (adjustable in 4 ranges) 0.2…100 kΩ (adjustable in 4 ranges)– Range 1 0.2…1 kΩ 0.2…1 kΩ– Range 2 0.8…4 kΩ 0.8…4 kΩ– Range 3 2.5…15 kΩ 2.5…15 kΩ– Range 4 10…100 kΩ 10…100 kΩHysteresis 10 % 10 %Switch-on delay 0…20 s (adjustable) 0…20 s (adjustable)Switch-off delay 0…20 s (adjustable) 0…20 s (adjustable)

Output circuits 2 relay outputs 2 relay outputsNumber of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm Au 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloy + 3 µm AuSwitching voltage 250 V 250 VSwitching current ≤ 3 A ≤ 3 ASwitching capacity ≤ 500 VA/60 W ≤ 500 VA/60 W




Connection 2 x 16 terminals with self-lifting pressure plates 2 x 16 terminals with self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2

with wire sleeves with wire sleevesDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20 IP20Operating temperature -25…+60 °C -25…+60 °C

Level Control MK91-121-R

��

��

��

��

8




• Adjustable sensitivity range0.1…100 kΩΩΩΩΩ

• Secure distinction betweenliquid and foam

• Adjustable switch-on andswitch-off delay from 0.1…15 s


• Probe selection via an integratedrelay


The single channel level controlMS91-12-R... is used to monitor andregulate the levels of conductive liquids (II).As a dual level regulator, it can be used tocontrol pumps and solenoid valves (I).As a monitoring devices it is designed forrun-dry or overflow protection.

The sensitivity (resistance of liquid) isadjustable from 0.1…100 kΩ. One of thefour sensitivity ranges is selected by theterminal configuration. Fine adjustment ofthe switch point within the selected rangeis achieved with a front cover potentio-meter. Thus the level controller providesoptimum reliability in differentiating a widevariety of liquids and also in applicationsrequiring distinction between liquid andfoam.

The adjustable switch-on and switch-offdelay is especially important for turbulentliquid levels. A delay time from 0.1...15 scan be adjusted via the front coverpotentiometer.

The device features two relay outputs withone SPDT contact each. They operate inparallel and provide the switching function.

The output configuration of both outputscan be programmed from NO (with jumperbetween terminals 15/16) to NC (withoutjumper between terminals 15/16).

A yellow LED indicates the switchingstatus.

Level ControlMS91-12-R1-channel

��

�

��

�

�

� �

� �

�

�

��

� �� ! "#��!�! �!

� �$��

� � � � �

�� 8��5��

�� 9� 5

�#�)

�

�

�

�

"

#

�

�

��

�

��

��

!

� 3�4

3!4

3�4

&

��

��

� �� (

�� (

2��(

2��(

��

��

;��

!�#�)

��

�

,-/

$%

111

� �� (

�� (

2��(

2��(

,-/

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

�� )��,�� ),-� �.


Type MS91-12-RIdent-no. 5220110

Supply voltage UB 20...250 VUCLine frequency (AC) 40...70 HzPower consumption ≤ 3 WGalvanic isolation between input circuit,output circuit and supply voltage for 250 Vrms

test voltage 2,5 Vrms

Input circuitsProbe voltage typ. 5 VPP/100 Hz (triangle)Sensitivity range (switching threshold) 0,1…100 kΩ (adjustable in 4 ranges)– Range 1 0.1…1 kΩ– Range 2 0.5…5 kΩ– Range 3 2…20 kΩ– Range 4 10…100 kΩHysteresis 10 %Switch-on and switch-off delay 0.1…15 s (adjustable)

Output circuits 2 relay outputsNumber of contacts 1 SPDT contact, silver-alloySwitching voltage ≤ 250 VSwitching current ≤ 4 ASwitching capacity ≤ 1 000 VA/60 W


Housing 50 mm wide, Polycarbonate/ABSMounting snap-on clamps for top-hat rail (DIN 50022)

or screw terminals for panel mountingConnection 2 x 16 screw terminalsConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2


Level Control MS91-12-R

��

��

9


ACCESSORIESACCESSORIES

9


• Practical tool for line monitoringof a mechanical contact

• Connection via cable ends andscrew terminals

• Compact housing

The resistor module WM1 is a requisitefor line monitoring between a mechanicalcontact and a signal processor which isequipped with inputs for sensors accordingto EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) and short-circuit and wire-break monitoring features.

The cable between the mechanical contactand the resistor module should be keptshort because monitoring of this section isnot possible.

Due to its small housing it is possible tointegrate the WM1 into the most types ofterminal blocks.

Connection is accomplished via the cableends on the one side and via screwterminals on the other side. Thus the cableends may be connected directly to theterminals of the mechanical switch, whilethe cable to the TURCK signal processor is

Resistor Module WM1

connected to screw terminals.Due to the symmetrical circuit layout, theoutput and input are electrically interchan-geable.

The resistor module WM1 is specificallydesigned for connection to TURCK signalprocessors.

The internal circuitry of the WM1 consistssolely of resistors and is classified assimple electrical equipment according toEN 60079-14 and does not requireapproval. Therefore it may be integratedin intrinsically safe circuits in explosionhazardous areas.

For use in dust hazardous locations (zone20 to 22) it is required that mounting hasto be done in a way, that no dust can forma sediment on the WM1.


Resistor Module WM1

Type WM1Ident-no. 0912101

Input circuit according to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

Hazardous area approvals simple electrical equipment according to EN 60079-14; an approval is not required– max. input voltage Ui 16 V– max. input current Ii 60 mA– max. input capacity Pi 150 mW– internal inductance/capacitances Li/Ci negligible– temperature class T6

Housing plastic coverConnection cable ends: 2 x 0.5 mm2,

screw terminals: < 2 x 2.5 mm2

Cable material H05 V-KDegree of protection (IEC 60529/EN 60529) IP20Temperature range -25…+60 °C

Dimensions

��

��

��

��

��

9


• Immersion electrode for use inconjunction with TURCKlevel controls

• Temperature range 0...60 °C

The immersion electrode EL1 is anaccessory for TURCK's level controls.The device is particularly suited for use inopen containers within a temperaturerange of 0...60 °C. If required, theconnection of the electrode to the single-wire cable can be fully encapsulated forwater-proofness by the customer.

Immersion ElectrodeEL1/1

Type EL1/1Ident-no. 69672

Electrode material X12CrMoS17Electrode surface 30 cm2

Protective sleeve and cap cover low-pressure polyethylene „Lupolen 8011 Lnt“Ventilation via longitudinal slotWeight 190 g

Note other versions such as single or multipleelectrodes for aggressive media, highertemperatures and extended pressure rangesavailable on request

��

��

9


Sensor type M 703 (Siemens)Ident-no. 6900198

Connection leads AWG 30/PTFE, isolated– Internal conductor material NickelConnection leads for solderingSensor mounting surface mounting with metal tabs

��

��

��

��

��

�

NTC ThermistorM703

The NTC thermistor (Siemens) M 703serves as a sensor type for the MK44-121-R/... Thermistor relay (page 4 – 11).

9


• Adapter for parameterisation ofTURCK interfacemodul seriesdevices via the serial PC interface

• Galvanically isolated signaltransmission

The IM-PROG serves the parameterisationof TURCK interfacemodul series devicesvia the serial interface of a PC.

The interfacemodul to be parameterised isconnected to the serial interface of the PCvia the IM-PROG using the includedconnection cable.

IM-PROGProgramming Adapterfor TURCK Devices withPACTware™Programming

The interfacemodul must be connected tothe voltage supply for parameterisation.

IM-PROG converts the signal level andimplements the galvanic isolation betweenPC and the interfacemodul.

Type IM-PROGIdent-no. 6890422

Connection– interfacemodul 3.5 mm jack– PC 25-pole RS232 interface

or via supplied adapter on the9-pole interface

Cable length 1.2 m

Galvanic isolation 60 V

��

��

�

��

9


Adapter cableUSB-2-RS232

• USB 1.1 and upwards compatible

• AMP 1.2 and upwards compatible

• Data rate max. 1 Mbps

• Supports hardware handshake

• Remote wake-up support

• Driver for WIN98/ME/2000/XP

• Cable length, 1.7 m

• Serial adapter DSUB9 femaleconnector to DSUB25 maleconnector includeddelivery

The adapter cable USB-2-RS232 is a user-friendly interface adapter from USB (fromversion 1.1 on) to RS232.

Each PC equipped with a USB port can befitted with an additional serial interfaceaccording to RS232 standards.

This is particularly interesting for the usersof notebooks, because these are often notequipped with an interface or only with aserial interface.

The adapter cable can be used for allTURCK devices which feature a serial port,e.g. the programming adapter IM-PROG,or the fieldbus systems BL20 and BL67.

The supplied driver supports the systemsWindows98/ME/2000/XP.The device is powered via the USB port ofthe PC.

Type USB-2-RS232Ident-no. 6900426

Connection USB to DSUB9 (9-pole RS232interface or via supplied adapterto 25-pole RS232 interface)

Cable length 1.7 m

Compatibility USB 1.1 and AMP 1.2 (upwards compatible)Data rate max. 1 Mbps

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

9


Power-Bus for theTURCK interfacemodulSeriesPB-08/03PB-16/03PB-32/03

• Voltage supply for processors of theinterfacemodul series

• 8, 16 or 32 devices connectable

• Cable length between voltagesupply and Power-Bus: 2 m

The TURCK Power-Bus serves for voltagesupply to processors of the interfacemodulseries.

The Power-Bus can supply voltage up to32 devices in 18 mm housings.

The following device types are available:– PB-08/03: 8 module connections– PB-16/03: 16 module connections– PB-32/03: 32 module connections.

Type PB-08/03 PB-16/03 PB-32/03Ident-no. 6900370 6900371 6900372

Cable– Cable cross-section 2 x 0.75 mm2

– Cable type H 05 V-K– Cable lenght between terminals approx. 45 mm– Cable length between supply voltage 2 m

and Power-Bus– Input voltage 0...230 V AC/DC– Output voltage 0...230 V AC/DC– Cable sheath colour RD (with DC +UB)

BK (with DC –UB)

Terminals 3-pole terminal blocks with coding

The cable length between the voltagesupply and Power-Bus is 2 m. The cablelength is approx. 45 mm between theindividual terminals.

� � ��

��

RD

BK

9


Frequency GeneratorFG1

• Simulation of sensors conform toEN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) orNO contacts

• Frequency range 0.01...99900 Hz,or 0.1...999000 min-1

• Internal voltage supply via9 V block battery (Type 6 LR 61)

The TURCK frequency generator FG1serves the simulation of sensors to EN60947-5-6 (NAMUR) or NO contacts. TheNO output is protected by a Zener diodeand a self-restoring fuse which activates atapprox. 200 mA.

Isolating switching amplifiers or countermodules, for example, can be functiontested with the frequency generator.

The decimal positions 0.01 to 9.99 of thefrequency, the frequency basis 1 Hz to10 kHz (or 10 min-1 (rpm) to 100000 min-1

(rpm)) as well as various mark-space ratiosin percent can be set via the coding switch.

The frequency generator is supplied via a9 V block battery which allows operationfor about 60 hours with its capacity of500 mAh.

The device is switched on and off via afront mounted pushbutton. The deviceswitches off automatically after 20minutes.

The operational readiness of the device isindicated by a front side LED which lightsgreen when the device is switched on.

1 2 3 4

NAMUR

pnp

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

�� !"#$

�%&��%&

��%&�'%&

��'%&

��(��(��(��( �(��(!�("�(#�($�(

��($�(#�("�(!�(��( �(��(��(��(

)��*��'

��'��'

)��*�)��*�)��*�)��*�

�� !��"#��$%��"#�

� �&


Type FG1Ident-no. 6900277

Supply voltage UB from 9 V block battery (6 LR 61)Current consumption approx. 8 mA (A block with 500 mAh capacity has capacity for approx. 60 hours)

Frequency range 0.01...99900 Hz (0.1...999000 min-1)Adjustment possibilities– Frequency decimal place via coding switch– Frequency basis via coding switch– Mark-space ration in percent via coding switch

Coding switch Frequency Frequency Mark-space ratioposition decimal place base in %

0 0.01...9.99 1 Hz 50 % On / 50 % Off1 0.01...9.99 10 Hz 10 % On / 90 % Off2 0.01...9.99 100 Hz 20 % On / 80 % Off3 0.01...9.99 1 kHz 30 % On / 70 % Off4 0.01...9.99 10 kHz 40 % On / 60 % Off5 0.01...9.99 10 min-1 50 % On / 50 % Off6 0.01...9.99 100 min-1 60 % On / 40 % Off7 0.01...9.99 1000 min-1 70 % On / 30 % Off8 0.01...9.99 10000 min-1 80 % On / 20 % Off9 0.01...9.99 100000 min-1 90 % On / 10 % Off

Accuracy typically 0.01 % minimum, 0.05 % across the entire adjustment range

Output circuitsNAMUR (Socket 1 and 3) Simulation of sensors to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)NO contact (Socket 2 and 4) Simulation of NO contactsNO contact protection circuitry Zener diode and self-restoring fuse, activates at approx. 200 mA

LED indications– Power “ON” green

HousingMaterial ABS (Flammability class UL 94 HB)Materialcover disc Acrylic, transparentOperating temperature range -25…+75 °C

Dimensions

Frequency Generator FG1

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

�� !"#$

�%&��%&

��%&�'%&

��'%&

��(��(��(��( �(��(!�("�(#�($�(

��($�(#�("�(!�(��( �(��(��(��(

)��*��'

��'��'

)��*�)��*�)��*�)��*�

�� !��"#��$%��"#�

� �&

�

��

��

�

9


PACTware ™DTM ProfessionalLicense

PACTware™ stands for “Process Automa-tion Configuration Tool” and is an open-source configuration software in which themanufacturers can integrate the operationof their field devices. The optimisation ofthe device operation is the primaryobjective with the PACTware™ concept.

Contrary to the concept of writing todevices via a text file (Device Description =DD), PACTware™ uses a commoninterface (Field Device Tool = FDT) betweenthe core program and the individualsoftware modules for device operation.Modern and user-friendly operatingconcepts can be implemented as a result.FDT specifies an interface in order to usethe software modules for field devices(Device Type Manager = DTM) in variousapplications from differing manufacturers.

The DTMs which are required are availablein a basic version (with functional featurelimitations) as well as a professionalversion.

The PACTware ™ core program and thebasic DTMs can be downloaded free ofcharge on the Internet at www.turck.de.

The professional variant which includesspecial features can be activated by alicense key which you must purchase.

• License key for activation ofspecial functions:– Monitor function– Print function– Trend viewer– Store function– Ring buffer (only IM34-14...,

MC32-144..., MC34-144...)

The special functions are:• Monitor function: The current

measured value and the state of theinputs and outputs can be viewed in awindow on the monitor. Cyclic-refreshcan be deactivated.

• Print function: The parameters can beprinted in three categories:– Offline parameterisation

(all parameters)– Measured value (frequency/rotary

speed, output current, measuringrange of the output current in %,output voltage, measuring range ofthe output voltage in %)

– Diagnostics (all diagnostics bits)• Trend viewer: A selection of the

measured values can be recordedcyclically. The changes to the values canbe observed online. Value curves whichare recorded can be saved in a speciallyformatted text file.

• Save function: Parameters are savedwith this function.

• Storage in ring buffer(only IM34-14..., MC32-144..., MC34-144...): Allows the storage of measuringvalues within the device.

DTM Professional License for:

IM34-11... Ident-No.: 6900404IM34-12... Ident-No.: 6900404MC25... Ident-No.: 6900405IM34-14... Ident-No.: 6901300MC32-144... Ident-No.: 6901300MC34-144... Ident-No.: 6901300

9


• 4...20 mA temperature transducerfor Pt100 sensors

• Intrinsically safe transducerII 1 G EEx ia IIC T5/T6

• For connection of 2-, 3- or4-wire sensors

• Increased accuracy < 0.25 °C

• Configuration via PC

• Excellent temperaturestability


• Terminal housing, type B

The intrinsically safe Pt100 temperaturetransducer KMP-Ex0-Li convertstemperature-dependent signals fromPt100 detectors and provides these astemperature-linear 4...20 mA currentsignals.

The transducer is integrated in a terminalhousing, type B. The housing has a centrehole with a diameter of Ø 6.3 mm for cableor sensor insertion. 2-, 3- or 4-wire Pt100detectors may be connected to the inputcircuit of the temperature transducer.

All adjustments are programmed via theprogramming device KM-IM232 using apersonal computer (see page 9 – 29).

TemperatureTransducerKMP-Ex0-Li

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

The following functions can be adjusted:

– number of detector cables– line resistance (2-wire connection)– performance of analogue output during

an error condition– measuring range– measuring unit– damping– offset– status indication– 15-digit TAG number

Supply and signal isolation is achieved withmeasuring transducers, series MK33 andMC33, via a 2-wire cable. An additionalpower supply is not needed.


Type KMP-Ex0-LiIdent-no. 7506620

Input circuits intrinsically safe per EN 50014/20Sensor element Pt100 IEC/EN/DIN 60741-2Sensor current approx. 300 µALine resistance < 20 Ω, adjustableResolution 14 bitsShort-circuit detection < -225 °CWire-break detection > 875 °C

Output circuitsAccuracy 12 bitsSignal range 4...20 mA, 2-wireSupply voltage UB 8...30 VDC, reverse-polarity protectedRipple Wpp ≤ 3 Vpp

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity DEMKO 00 ATEX 128104XMaximum values– No-load voltage Ui 28 V– Short-circuit current Ii 0.1 A– Power Pmax 0.7 W– Internal inductance Li ≤ 10 µH– Internal capacitance Ci ≤ 10 nFExplosion protection type EEx ia IIC T1...T5: -40 < Tu < +85 °C

EEx ia IIC T6: -40 < Tu < +50 °CMarking of device II 1 G EEx ia IIC T5/T6

Transfer characteristicsOperating range -200...850 °CMeasuring range adjustable via softwareSmallest range 25 °CAccuracy ≤ 0.1 % of measuring rangeRepeat accuracy < 0.1 °COffset adjustment ± 10 °C, adjustableDamping 0...30 s, adjustableSupply voltage effect 0.01 %/VTemperature effect typ. 0.003 %/°C; max. 0.01 %/°CAvailability 10 s

Housing style for terminal connection heads, type B (DIN 43729)Dimensions Ø 44 mm x 19 mmMounting vibration protected spring-mounted screwsConnection profile ≤ 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 with wire sleevesProtection degree (IEC 60529/EN 60529) housing IP40; terminals IP00Operating temperature -40...+85 °CHumidity (IEC 68-2-6) < 98 %Vibration resistance (IEC 68-2-6) GL, Test 2Long term test (IEC 770 6.3.2) ●

��

��

��

Temperature Transducers KMP-Ex0-Li

9


Application

TemperatureTransducerKMU-Ex0-Li

The intrinsically safe universal transducerKMU-Ex0-Li converts temperature-dependent signals from Pt100 detectors,thermoelements, resistor inputs or mVinputs and provides these as 4...20 mAcurrent signals.

The transducer is integrated in a terminalhousing, type B. The housing has a centrehole with a diameter of Ø 6.3 mm for cableor sensor insertion.


�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

• Universal 4...20 mA temperaturetransducer


• For connection of thermoelements,2-, 3- or 4-wire Pt100 components,mV inputs or variable resistors

• Insulation voltage 3.75 kVAC


• Configurable linearization


• Internal or external reference point




– type of detector– linearization– number of detector cables– line resistance (2-wire connection)– performance of analogue output during



Wiring Diagrams

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

!

"#$��%��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��&��'�&��'�� #��(#��)$��#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��&��'�&��'�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��&��'�&��'�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�� #��(#��#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

&#��#��(#��#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

��&#��#��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

��&#��#��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

!

�(��#�$��(��$�#$'+��#��#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

!

�

�(��#�$��(��$�#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

!�

�(��#�$��(��$��#�&�� #�

Temperature Transducers KMU-Ex0-Li

9


Type KMU-Ex0-LiIdent-no. 7506621

Input circuits intrinsically safe per EN 50014/20Sensor element as specifiedSensor current approx. 200 µA for resistance temperature detectorsLine resistance for T > 600 °C: < 10 Ω/line, adjustable

for T < 600 °C: < 30 Ω/line, adjustableResolution 16 bits

Output circuitsAccuracy 12 bitsSignal range 4...20 mA/20...4 mA, 2-wireSupply voltage UB 6.5...35 VDC, reverse-polarity protectedRipple Wpp ≤ 3 Vpp

TAG number 15 digits

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity DEMKO 00 ATEX 128102XMaximum values (terminals 1 and 2)– No-load voltage Ui ≤ 30 V– Short-circuit current Ii ≤ 0.1 A– Power Pmax ≤ 0.75 W– Internal inductance Li ≤ 15 µH– Internal capacitance Ci ≤ 2 nFExplosion protection type EEx ia IIC T1...T5: -40 < Tu < +85 °C

EEx ia IIC T6: -40 < Tu < +50 °CMarking of device II 1 G EEx ia IIC T5/T6Sensor data (terminals 3, 4, 5 and 6)Umax out ≤ 6.2 VDCImax out ≤ 20 mAPmax out ≤ 30 mWC0 ≤ 5 µFL0 ≤ 50 mH

Transfer characteristicsOperating range see chart on next pageMeasuring range adjustable via softwareRepeat accuracy < 0.05 °CDamping 0...30 s, adjustableTemperature effect typ. 0.003 %/°C; max. 0.01 %/°CRise time (10 %...90 %) Pt100 = 1 s, T/C = 1.6 sAvailability 1.8...3.9 s

Housing style for terminal connection heads, type B (DIN 43729)Dimensions Ø 44 mm x 26.3 mmMounting vibration protected spring-mounted screwsConnection flat terminals with self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 1.5 mm2

Protection degree (IEC 60529/EN 60529) housing IP55; terminals IP10Operating temperature -40...+85 °CHumidity (IEC 68-2-6) < 98 %Vibration resistance Lloyds Register Test 2

Technical Data KMU-Ex0-Li

��

��

��

,-.


Type Standard Range Smallest range Accuracy Resolution

Pt25...1000 DIN/EN/IEC 60751 -200...+850 °C 1) 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CPt25...1000 a = 0.003902 -200...+850 °C 1) 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CPt25...1000 a = 0.003916 -200...+850 °C 1) 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CNi25...1000 DIN 43760 -50...+250 °C 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CCu25...1000 0.428 Ω/°C -50...+200 °C 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CB (PtRh30-Pt) IEC 584 +100...1820 °C 50 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CC (W5-Re) ASTM 988 0...+2300 °C 100 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CD (W3-Re) ASTM 988 0...+2300 °C 100 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CE (NiCr-CuNi) IEC 584 -270...+900 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CJ (Fe-CuNi) IEC 584 -210...+1200 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CK (NiCr-Ni) IEC 584 -250...+1370 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CL (Fe-CuNi) DIN 43710 -200...+900 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CN (NiCrSi-NiSi) IEC 584 -200...+1300 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CR (PtRh13-Pt) IEC 584 -50...+1750 °C 100 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CS (PTRh10-Pt) IEC 584 -50...+1750 °C 100 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CT (Cu-CuNi) IEC 584 -250...+400 °C 40 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CU (Cu-CuNi) DIN 43710 -200...+600 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CLin. Voltage -10...70 mV -10...70 mV 2 mV 0.04 mV 0.1 mVLin. Voltage -0.1...1.1 V -0.1...1.1 mV 20 mV 0.4 mV 1 mVLin. Resistance 0...390 Ω 0...390 Ω 5 Ω 0.05 Ω 0.01 ΩLin. Resistance 0...2200 Ω 0...2200 Ω 25 Ω 0.25 Ω 0.1 Ω

1) The maximum termperature range of 500...1000 °C detectors is limited, e.g. a Pt1000 detector has a range of up to 320 °C.

Operating Ranges

Temperature Transducers KMU-Ex0-Li

9


• Universal 4...20 mA HART®

transducer


• For connection of thermoelements,2-, 3- or 4-wire Pt100 components,mV inputs or variable resistors

• Insulation voltage 3.75 kVAC


• Configurable linearization


• Internal or external reference point



The intrinsically safe universal HART®

transducer KMU-Ex0-HLi convertstemperature-dependent signals fromPt100 detectors, thermoelements, resistorinputs or mV inputs and provides these as4...20 mA current signals.

The transducer is integrated in a terminalhousing, type B. The housing has a centrehole with a diameter of Ø 6.3 mm for cableor sensor insertion.



– type of detector– linearization

– number of detector cables– line resistance (2-wire connection)– performance of analogue output during


HART® communication provides thefollowing possibilities:– online calibration– online adjustment– transmitter configuration– online process calibration– multidrop application in 2-wire networks

Application

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

HART® TemperatureTransducerKMU-Ex0-HLi


Wiring Diagrams

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

!

"#$��%��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��&��'�&��'�� #��(#��)$��#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��&��'�&��'�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

��&��'�&��'�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�� #��(#��#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

&#��#��(#��#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

��&#��#��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

*

��&#��#��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

!

�(��#�$��(��$�#$'+��#��#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

!

�

�(��#�$��(��$�#�&�� #�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

!�

�(��#�$��(��$��#�&�� #�

Temperature Transducers KMU-Ex0-HLi

9


��

��

��

,-.

Type KMU-Ex0-HLiIdent-no. 7506622

Input circuits intrinsically safe per EN 50014/20Sensor element as specifiedSensor current approx. 200 µA for resistance temperature detectorsLine resistance for T > 600 °C: < 10 Ω/line, adjustable

for T < 600 °C: < 30 Ω/line, adjustableResolution 16 bits

Output circuitsAccuracy 12 bitsSignal range 4...20 mA/20...4 mA, 2-wireSupply voltage UB 6.5...30 VDC, reverse-polarity protectedRipple Wpp ≤ 3 Vpp

Ex-approval acc. to certificate of conformity DEMKO 00 ATEX 128100XMaximum values (terminals 1 and 2)– No-load voltage Ui ≤ 30 V– Short-circuit current Ii ≤ 0.1 A– Power Pmax ≤ 0.75 W– Internal inductance Li ≤ 15 µH– Internal capacitance Ci ≤ 2 nFExplosion protection type EEx ia IIC T1...T5: -40 < Tu < +85 °C

EEx ia IIC T6: -40 < Tu < +50 °CMarking of device II 1 G EEx ia IIC T5/T6Sensor data (terminals 3, 4, 5 and 6)Umax out ≤ 6.2 VDCImax out ≤ 20 mAPmax out ≤ 30 mWC0 ≤ 10 µFL0 ≤ 50 mH

Transfer characteristicsOperating range see chart on next pageMeasuring range programmable via softwareRepeat accuracy < 0.05 °CDamping 0...30 s adjustableTemperature effect typ. 0.003 %/°C; max. 0.01 %/°CRise time (10 %...90 %) Pt100 = 1 s, T/C = 1.6 sAvailability 1.8...3.9 s

HART® characteristicsProtocol HCF standard, Rev. 5Parameters (adjustable) read serial number

read/set user IDread/set configurationread input valueread output valuelist input signal2-point sensor adjustment2-point current adjustment

Housing style for terminal connection heads, type B (DIN 43729)Dimensions Ø 44 mm x 26.3 mmMounting vibration protected spring-mounted screwsConnection flat terminals with self-lifting pressure platesConnection profile ≤ 2 x 1.5 mm2

Protection degree (IEC 60529/EN 60529) housing IP55; connections IP10Operating temperature -40...+85 °CHumidity (IEC 68-2-6) < 98 %Vibration resistance Lloyds Register Test 2

Technical Data KMU-Ex0-HLi


Type Standard Range Smallest range Accuracy Resolution

Pt25...1000 DIN/EN/IEC 60751 -200...+850 °C 1) 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CPt25...1000 a = 0.003902 -200...+850 °C 1) 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CPt25...1000 a = 0.003916 -200...+850 °C 1) 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CNi25...1000 DIN 43760 -50...+250 °C 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CCu25...1000 0.428 Ω/°C -50...+200 °C 10 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °CB (PtRh30-Pt) IEC 584 +100...1820 °C 50 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CC (W5-Re) ASTM 988 0...+2300 °C 100 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CD (W3-Re) ASTM 988 0...+2300 °C 100 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CE (NiCr-CuNi) IEC 584 -270...+900 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CJ (Fe-CuNi) IEC 584 -210...+1200 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CK (NiCr-Ni) IEC 584 -250...+1370 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CL (Fe-CuNi) DIN 43710 -200...+900 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CN (NiCrSi-NiSi) IEC 584 -200...+1300 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CR (PtRh13-Pt) IEC 584 -50...+1750 °C 100 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CS (PTRh10-Pt) IEC 584 -50...+1750 °C 100 °C 2 °C 0.1 °CT (Cu-CuNi) IEC 584 -250...+400 °C 40 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CU (Cu-CuNi) DIN 43710 -200...+600 °C 50 °C 1 °C 0.1 °CLin. voltage -10...70 mV -10...70 mV 2 mV 0.04 mV 0.1 mVLin. voltage -0.1...1.1 V -0.1...1.1 mV 20 mV 0.4 mV 1 mVLin. resistance 0...390 Ω 0...390 Ω 5 Ω 0.05 Ω 0.01 ΩLin. resistance 0...2200 Ω 0...2200 Ω 25 Ω 0.25 Ω 0.1 Ω

1) The maximum termperature range of 500...1000 °C detectors is limited, e.g. a Pt1000 detector has a range of up to 320 °C.

Operating Ranges

//0

��

*�1��

� #$��%�� '��(��%��'�� #�2��%�03*45�5��/��6

�&&$��#�7&#��#�&#��%

/�*08�#�9�%��#�

It is possible to use either a standard HART® configurator (see drawing) or TURCK's software for PC.

Standard HART® Configurator

Temperature Transducers KMU-Ex0-HLi

9


KMU-Ex0-HLiKMU-Ex0-Li

KMP-Ex0-Li

'��(�)*)

�

��

)

+��,��-(� ��.)*)

� �

� �!:

� �

� �

!:

� �

5��#&��#��$ 4#�

�;

��0

The KM-IM232 programming device isdesigned for configuration of TURCKtemperature transducers.

Connection to a conventional PC isestablished via a 9-pole RS232C interface.

The software is based on Windows andincludes extensive self-explanatory helpmenus in three languages.

The selected configuration can be savedunder a user-specified file name.

Suspend power supply to the temperaturetransducer via the isolating transducerduring configuration.

Programming DeviceKM-IM232

• For configuration of TURCKtemperature transducersseries KM...


• RS232C interface

• Simple operation

Connection of temperature transducers

Configuration may only be carried out inthe non-hazardous area.

If the power provided via the RS232Cinterface is not sufficient for configuration,it is also possible to connect a 9 V battery.

The PC may also be used as a data logger.This function is set via the software andenables the user to view measuring resultsor to enter the set-up mode for calibrationof the temperature transducer. The datalogger function is available with thefollowing transducer types:– KMU-Ex0-Li– KMP-Ex0-Li– KMU-Ex0-HLi

10


INDEX OF TYPESINDEX OF TYPES


Index of Types

Type Page Type Page Type Page

DTM-Professional-Lizenz 9 – 17EL1/1 9 – 5FG1 9 – 15IM12-22Ex-R 1 – 9IM1-12Ex-MT 1 – 15IM1-12Ex-R 1 – 11IM1-12Ex-R-CC 1 – 11IM1-12Ex-T 1 – 13IM1-121Ex-R 1 – 17IM1-121Ex-T 1 – 19IM1-22Ex-MT 1 – 25IM1-22Ex-MT-CC 1 – 25IM1-22Ex-R 1 – 21IM1-22Ex-T 1 – 23IM1-22Ex-T-CC 1 – 23IM1-451Ex-R 1 – 27IM1-451Ex-R-CC 1 – 27IM1-451Ex-T 1 – 29IM31-11-i 3 – 13IM31-11Ex-i 3 – 15IM31-11Ex-i/CC 3 – 15IM31-11Ex-U 3 – 17IM31-12-i 3 – 19IM31-12Ex-i 3 – 21IM31-12Ex-i/CC 3 – 21IM31-12Ex-U 3 – 23IM31-22-i 3 – 25IM31-22Ex-i 3 – 27IM31-22Ex-i/CC 3 – 27IM31-22Ex-U 3 – 29IM33-11Ex-Hi/24VDC 3 – 43IM33-11Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC 3 – 43IM33-22Ex-Hi/24VDC 3 – 45IM33-22Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC 3 – 45IM33-FSD-Ex/L 3 – 47IM34-11Ex-Ci 3 – 59IM34-11Ex-Ci/K60 3 – 65IM34-11Ex-i 3 – 53IM34-12Ex-CRi 3 – 59IM34-12-Ex-Ri 3 – 53IM34-14Ex-CDRi 3 – 71IM35-11Ex-Hi/24VDC 3 – 79IM35-11Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC 3 – 79IM35-22Ex-Hi/24VDC 3 – 81IM35-22Ex-Hi-CC/24VDC 3 – 81IM36-11Ex-i/24VDC 3 – 87IM36-11Ex-U/24VDC 3 – 87IM43-13-R 4 – 3IM43-13-SR 4 – 5IM43-14-Ri 4 – 3IM43-14-SRi 4 – 5IM72-11Ex/L 5 – 5IM72-22Ex/L 5 – 7IM73-12-R/230VAC 6 – 7IM73-12-R/24VDC 6 – 7IM82-2414/94-265VAC 7 – 13IM82-2450 7 – 15IM-PROG 9 – 9KM-IM232 9 – 29KMP-Ex0-Li 9 – 19KMU-Ex0-HLi 9 – 25

KMU-Ex0-Li 9 – 21M703 9 – 7MC13-241Ex0-R 1 – 6MC13-241Ex0-T 1 – 6MC13-41Ex0-RP 1 – 6MC13-441Ex0-R 1 – 6MC13-441Ex0-T 1 – 6MC13-451Ex0-P 1 – 6MC13-451Ex0-R 1 – 6MC13-451Ex0-RP 1 – 6MC13-451Ex0-T 1 – 6MC13-452Ex0-RP 1 – 6MC13-481Ex0-R 1 – 6MC13-8Ex0-P 1 – 6MC13-8Ex0-R 1 – 6MC16-41Ex0-RP 1 – 6MC16-41Ex0-TP 1 – 6MC25-144-LRP 2 – 2MC25-144Ex0-LRP 2 – 2MC30-28-Li 3 – 5MC31-11Ex0-Ri 3 – 5MC31-121Ex0-LRP 3 – 5MC31-22AEx0-i 3 – 5MC32-11Ex0-Ri 3 – 5MC32-121Ex0-LRP 3 – 5MC32-121Ex0-RP 3 – 5MC32-12Ex0-LRP 3 – 5MC33-121Ex0-LRP 3 – 5MC33-12AEx0-i 3 – 5MC33-22AEx0-i 3 – 5MC33-12Ex0-Hi 3 – 5MC33-22Ex0-Hi 3 – 5MC34-121Ex0-LRP 3 – 5MC35-11Ex0-Hi 3 – 5MC35-22Ex0-Hi 3 – 5MC35-22Ex0-i 3 – 5MC43-221-RP 4 – 2MC72-41Ex-T 5 – 3MC72-42Ex-T 5 – 3MC72-43Ex-T 5 – 3MC72-44Ex-T 5 – 3MC73-441Ex0-R 6 – 3MC73-442Ex0-R 6 – 3MC73-44-R 6 – 3MC73-481-R 6 – 3MC73-481-RE/3 6 – 3MC73-48-R/RSi 6 – 3MC73-881-R 6 – 3MC73-881-RE/3 6 – 3MC73-88-R 6 – 3MC73-88T 6 – 3MC82-2425 7 – 2MC82-2450 7 – 2MC83-2SA1 7 – 2MC83-4Si 7 – 2MK1-11-R/230VAC 1 – 31MK1-11-R/24VDC 1 – 31MK1-22N-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 37MK1-22P-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 37MK1-22-R/230VAC 1 – 35MK1-22-R/24VDC 1 – 35

MK1-2AP/24VDC 1 – 33MK1-2RP/24VDC 1 – 33MK13-11AEx0-R/230VAC 1 – 47MK13-11AEx0-R/24VDC 1 – 47MK13-121AEx0-R/230VAC 1 – 51MK13-121AEx0-R/24VDC 1 – 51MK13-12AEx0-R/230VAC 1 – 49MK13-12AEx0-R/24VDC 1 – 49MK13-22AEx0-R/230VAC 1 – 55MK13-22AEx0-R/24VDC 1 – 55MK13-22N-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 53MK13-22P-Ex0/230VAC 1 – 53MK13-N-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 39MK13-NF-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 41MK13-P-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 39MK13-PF-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 41MK13-PN-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 43MK13-R-Ex0/24VDC 1 – 45MK15-12Ex0-PN 1 – 57MK21-122Ex0-R 2 – 9MK21-122Ex0-Ri 2 – 13MK21-122-R 2 – 7MK21-122-Ri 2 – 11MK26-22-R/230VAC 2 – 15MK26-22-R/24VDC 2 – 15MK31-...Ex0-Li/24VDC 3 – 31MK31-...Ex0-LU/24VDC 3 – 31MK31-...-Li/24VDC 3 – 33MK31-...-LU/24VDC 3 – 33MK31-114Ex0-LU/24VDC 3 – 35MK32-11Ex0-Li/24VDC 3 – 39MK32-11-Li/24VDC 3 – 41MK33-11Ex0-Li-/24VDC 3 – 49MK33-11Ex0-PLi/24VDC 3 – 51MK35-11Ex0-Li/24VDC 3 – 83MK35-11Ex0-LU/24VDC 3 – 85MK43-111-R/230VAC 4 – 7MK43-111-R/24VDC 4 – 7MK44-121-R/230VAC 4 – 9MK44-121-R/24VUC 4 – 9MK71-T12-250VDC/250VDC 6 – 5MK71-T12-60VDC/250VDC 6 – 5MK72-S01-Ex/24VDC 5 – 10MK72-S02-Ex/24VDC 5 – 10MK72-S03-Ex/24VDC 5 – 11MK72-S04-Ex/24VDC 5 – 11MK72-S05-Ex/24VDC 5 – 12MK72-S06-Ex/24VDC 5 – 12MK72-S07-Ex/24VDC 5 – 13MK72-S08-Ex/24VDC 5 – 13MK72-S09-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 15MK72-S10-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 18MK72-S13-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 18MK72-S14-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 19MK72-S15-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 19MK72-S16-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 20MK72-S19-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 20MK72-S20-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 21MK72-S21-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 21MK72-S22-Ex0/24VDC 5 – 22MK73-R11/230VAC/24VUC 6 – 15

10


Type Page Type Page

MK73-R111-Ex0 6 – 9MK73-R11H/24VUC 6 – 17MK73-R12/230VAC 6 – 19MK73-R12/24VUC 6 – 19MK73-R14/24VUC 6 – 21MK73-R22/24VUC 6 – 23MK73-R222-Ex0 6 – 9MK73-R22A 6 – 11MK73-R22E 6 – 11MK73-R44A 6 – 11MK73-R44E 6 – 11MK73-S01/24VDC 6 – 25MK73-S02/24VDC 6 – 27MK73-T22A 6 – 11MK73-T22A.../K20 6 – 11MK73-T22E 6 – 11MK73-T44A 6 – 11MK73-T44A.../K20 6 – 11MK73-T44E 6 – 11MK73-UR12/K03/24VDC 6 – 29MK73-Z22A 6 – 11Mk81-11-R/24VDC 7 – 3MK81-222-R/230VAC 7 – 5MK81-222-R/24VDC 7 – 5MK82-2401/230VUC 7 – 17MK83-U24 7 – 19MK91-121-R/230VAC 8 – 9MK91-121-R/24VDC 8 – 9MK91-12-R/230VAC 8 – 7MK91-12-R/24VDC 8 – 7MK91-R11/24VDC 8 – 5MS1-12Ex0-R 1 – 59MS1-22Ex0-R 1 – 61MS13-11Ex0-T 1 – 67MS13-12Ex0-R 1 – 69MS13-12Ex0-T 1 – 71MS13-22Ex0-R 1 – 73MS13-22Ex0-T 1 – 75MS13-231Ex0-R 1 – 77MS13-33Ex0-R 1 – 79MS13-33Ex0-T 1 – 81MS1-33Ex0-R 1 – 63MS1-33Ex0-T 1 – 65MS21-12Ex0-R 2 – 17MS22-Ri 2 – 19MS23-22Ex0-R 2 – 23MS23-R 2 – 21MS24-112-R 2 – 27MS24-R 2 – 25MS25-Ui 2 – 29MS27-R 2 – 31MS28-R 2 – 33MS31-LiU/230VAC 3 – 37MS31-LiU/24VDC 3 – 37MS41-12Ex0-R 4 – 11MS41-22Ex0-R 4 – 13MS41-42Ex0-R 4 – 17MS43-R 4 – 21MS81-221-R/115VAC 7 – 7MS81-221-R/230VAC 7 – 7MS81-222-R/115VAC 7 – 9

MS81-222-R/230VAC 7 – 9MS81-222-T/230VAC 7 – 11MS91-12-R/230VAC 8 – 11MS91-12-R/24VDC 8 – 11PB-08/03 9 – 13PB-16/03 9 – 13PB-32/03 9 – 13USB-2-RS232 9 – 11WM1 9 – 3

10


Subject to change without notice

D200423 0407

*D200423ßß0407*

www.turck.com

I42

3/0

8IN

TE

RFA

CE

TE

CH

NO

LO

GY

INM

OD

UL

AR

HO

US

ING

S

... and more than 60 representatives and agencies world-wide.

TURCK WORLD-WIDE HEADQUARTERS

GERMANYHans Turck GmbH & Co. KGWitzlebenstraße 745472 Mülheim an der RuhrP. O. Box 45466 Mülheim an der RuhrPhone +49 208 4952-0Fax +49 208 4952-264E-Mail [email protected]

BELGIUMMultiprox N. V.P. B. 71Lion d’Orweg 129300 AalstPhone +32 53 766566Fax +32 53 783977E-Mail [email protected]

CZECH REPUBLICTURCK s.r.o.Hradecká 1151500 03 Hradec Králové 3Phone + 420 49 5518-766Fax + 420 49 5518-767E-Mail [email protected]

PR OF CHINATURCK (Tianjin) Sensor Co. Ltd.18,4th Xinghuazhi Road,Xiqing EconomicDevelopment Area,300381 TianjinPhone + 86 22 83988-188

83988-199Fax + 86 22 83988-111E-Mail [email protected]

EASTERN EUROPE / ASIAHans Turck GmbH & Co. KGAm Bockwald 208344 Grünhain-BeierfeldPhone +49 3774 1 35-0Fax +49 3774 1 35-222E-Mail [email protected]

FRANCETURCK BANNER S.A.S3, Rue de CourtalinMagny-Le-Hongre77703 Marne-La-Vallee Cedex 4Phone +33 1 6043-6070Fax +33 1 6043-1018E-Mail [email protected]

GREAT BRITAINTURCK BANNER LIMITEDBlenheim HouseHurricane WayWickford, Essex SS11 8YTPhone +44 1268 578888Fax +44 1268 763648E-Mail [email protected]

HUNGARYTURCK Hungary kft.Könyves Kalman Krt.761087 BudapestPhone +36 1 4770-740Fax +36 1 4770-741E-Mail [email protected]

ITALYTURCK BANNER S. R. L.Via Adamello, 920010 Bareggio (MI)Phone +39 02 90364-291Fax +39 02 90364-838E-Mail [email protected]

KOREATURCK Korea Branch OfficeRoom No 406, Gyeonggi Technopark1271-11, Sa 1-Dong, Sangnok-Gu, Ansan,Gyeonggi-Do, Korea, 426-901Phone +82 31 5004-555Fax +82 31 5004-558E-Mail [email protected]

MEXICOTURCK Mexico S. DE R.L. DE C.V.Carr. Saltillo-Zacatecas km 4.5 s/nParque Industrial “La Angostura“Saltillo, COAH. 25070Phone + 52 844 4826-924Fax + 52 844 4826-926E-Mail [email protected]

THE NETHERLANDSTURCK B. V.Postbus 2978000 AG ZwollePhone +31 38 4227-750Fax +31 38 4227-451E-Mail [email protected]

POLANDTURCK sp.z o.oul. Kepska 245-129 OpolePhone +48 77 4434-800Fax +48 77 4434-801E-Mail [email protected]

ROMANIATURCK Automation Romania SRLStr. luliu Tetrat nr. 18 Sector 1011914 BukarestPhone +40 21 2300279

2300594Fax +40 21 2314087E-Mail: [email protected]

RUSSIATURCK Avtomatizazija O.O.OVolokolamskoe Shosse 1 office 606 a125080 MoskauPhone +7 095 1050054Fax +7 095 1589572E-Mail [email protected]

USATURCK Inc.3000 Campus DriveMinneapolis, MN 55441-2656Phone +1 763 553-9224

553-7300Fax +1 763 553-0708E-Mail [email protected]

Turk

Documents

Transcript of Turk